Yamaha HTR-6260 de handleiding
- Categorie
- AV-ontvangers
- Type
- de handleiding
HTR-6260
AV Receiver
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
Caution-i En
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
1 Read these instructions.
2 Keep these instructions.
3 Heed all warnings.
4 Follow all instructions.
5 Do not use this apparatus near water.
6 Clean only with dry cloth.
7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions.
8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat
registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers)
that produce heat.
9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or
grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with
one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two
blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the
third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug
does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for
replacement of the obsolete outlet.
10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched
particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point
where they exit from the apparatus.
11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the
manufacturer.
12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket,
or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold
with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use
caution when moving the cart/apparatus
combination to avoid injury from tip-over.
13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when
unused for long periods of time.
14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing
is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any
way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid
has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the
apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not
operate normally, or has been dropped.
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions
contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications
not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority,
granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2 IMPORTANT:
When connecting this product to accessories
and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables.
Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all
installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void
your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.
3NOTE:
This product has been tested and found to comply with
the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B”
digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a
reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a
residential environment will not result in harmful interference with
other electronic devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not
installed and used according to the instructions found in the users
manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other
electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is
found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by
turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the
problem by using one of the following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by
the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or
fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the
antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the
lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,
please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of
product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please
contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe
Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by
Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
CAUTION
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
Caution-ii En
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha
will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common
operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF
to set this unit to the standby mode, and disconnect the AC
power plug from the wall outlet in the main room and Zone2.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:
.......AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz (General model)
.......................... AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz (Asia model)
20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or like.
21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can
cause hearing loss.
22 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the
same type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are
incorrectly replaced.
Caution: Read this before operating your unit.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,
it is not disconnected from the AC power source even
if you turn off this unit by
A
MAIN ZONE ON/
OFF. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a
very small quantity of power.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS
Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de
la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à
la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
1 En
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Features.................................................................... 2
About this manual................................................... 3
Supplied accessories................................................ 3
Part names and functions....................................... 4
Front panel ................................................................. 4
Rear panel .................................................................. 5
Front panel display..................................................... 6
Remote control........................................................... 7
Quick start guide.....................................................8
L
Preparing remote control ....................................... 9
Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 9
Using the remote control............................................ 9
Connections ...........................................................10
Placing speakers....................................................... 10
Connecting speakers ................................................ 11
Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 13
Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 14
Connecting other components ................................. 15
Connecting an external amplifier............................. 16
Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks............................... 17
Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver.................... 17
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .... 17
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 18
Connecting the power cable..................................... 18
Turning this unit on and off ..................................... 18
Optimizing the speaker setting for your
listening room (YPAO) .....................................19
Using Auto Setup..................................................... 19
When an error message is displayed during
measurement ........................................................ 21
When a warning message is displayed after
measurement ........................................................ 21
Playback.................................................................22
Basic procedure........................................................ 22
Using the SCENE function ...................................... 22
Muting audio output temporarily (MUTE).............. 23
Adjusting high/low frequency sound
(tone control) ....................................................... 23
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 23
Using your headphones............................................ 23
Displaying input signal information ........................ 24
Changing information on the front panel display .... 24
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 24
Enjoy the sound field programs .......................... 25
Selecting sound field programs................................ 25
Enjoying unprocessed input sources
(Straight decoding mode) .................................... 28
Enjoying sound field programs without surround
speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ....................... 28
Enjoy sound field programs with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA™) ........................................ 28
Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode ............................... 28
FM/AM tuning ......................................................29
Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station
(Frequency tuning) .............................................. 29
Registering FM/AM stations and tuning in
(Preset tuning)...................................................... 29
XM
®
Satellite Radio tuning
(U.S.A. model only) ........................................... 31
Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ............... 31
Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 31
XM Satellite Radio
®
operations ............................. 32
Registering XM Satellite Radio channels............... 33
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio™ information .. 34
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning
(U.S.A. model only)........................................... 35
Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner .................... 35
Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription.. 35
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations...................... 35
Registering the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
channels ............................................................... 37
Setting the Parental Lock......................................... 38
Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
information .......................................................... 39
Using iPod™.......................................................... 40
Controlling iPod™................................................... 40
Using Bluetooth™ components ........................... 42
Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver
and your Bluetooth™ component........................ 42
Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 42
Setting the option menu for each input source
(OPTION menu) ............................................... 43
OPTION menu items ............................................... 43
Outputting a video signal input from another
input source during reproducing a multi-channel
audio signal.......................................................... 45
Editing surround decoders/sound field
programs ........................................................... 46
Selecting a decoder used with a sound field
program................................................................ 46
Setting sound field parameters................................. 46
Sound field parameters ............................................ 46
Operating various settings for this unit
(Setup menu) ..................................................... 50
Basic operation of the setup menu ........................... 51
Speaker Setup .......................................................... 51
Sound Setup ............................................................. 53
Function Setup ......................................................... 54
DSP Parameter ......................................................... 56
Memory Guard......................................................... 56
Using multi-zone configuration ........................... 57
Connecting Zone2.................................................... 57
Controlling Zone2.................................................... 58
Controlling other components with the remote
control................................................................ 59
Setting remote control codes.................................... 59
Resetting all remote control codes........................... 59
Advanced setup..................................................... 60
Troubleshooting.................................................... 61
General..................................................................... 61
HDMI™................................................................... 64
Tuner (FM/AM) ....................................................... 64
XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)................ 65
SIRIUS Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only) .......... 66
Remote control......................................................... 67
iPod™ ...................................................................... 68
Bluetooth™.............................................................. 68
Auto Setup (YPAO)................................................. 69
Glossary ................................................................. 71
Sound field program information ....................... 73
Information on HDMI™...................................... 74
Additional information ........................................ 75
About the HDMI™ control function ....................... 75
Using the HDMI™ control function........................ 75
Specifications......................................................... 76
Index ...................................................................... 77
(at the end of this manual)
Contents
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
APPENDIX
List of remote control codes...................................i
2 En
INTRODUCTION
■ Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
• Minimum RMS Output Power (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω)
• FRONT L/R: 90 W + 90 W
• CENTER: 90 W
• SURROUND L/R: 90 W + 90 W
• SURROUND BACK L/R: 90 W + 90 W
■ Speaker/Preout outputs
• Speaker jacks (7-channel), preout output jacks (7.1-
channel)
■ Input/Output terminals
Input terminals
• HDMI input x 4
• Audio/Visual input
[Audio] Digital input (coaxial) x 2, digital input
(optical) x 2, analog input x 2
[Video] Component video x 2, composite video x 4
• Audio input (analog) x 2
• Dock input x 1
• V-AUX input
[Audio] Analog x 1, stereo mini jack x 1
[Video] Composite video x 1
Output terminals
• Monitor output
[Audio/Video] HDMI x 1
[Video] Component video x 1, composite video x 1
• Audio/Visual output
[Audio] Analog x 1
[Video] Composite video x 1
• Audio output
Analog x 1
• Zone2 output
Analog x 1
Other terminals
Remote input x 1, Remote output x 1
Trigger output x 1
■ Proprietary Yamaha technology for the
creation of sound fields
• CINEMA DSP 3D
• Compressed Music Enhancer mode
• Virtual CINEMA DSP
• SILENT CINEMA
■ Digital audio decoders
• Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus
• DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution
Audio, DTS Express
• Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX
• DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1,
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
• Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby Pro Logic IIx
• DTS NEO:6
• Neural Surround (U.S.A. model only)
• DSD
■ Radio tuners
• FM/AM tuning capability
• XM Satellite Radio tuning capability, using XM Mini-
Tuner and Home Dock, sold separately (U.S.A. model
only)
•
SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning capability, using
SiriusConnect tuner, sold separately (U.S.A. model
only)
■ HDMI™
(High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
• HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-
definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio
– Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync)
information capability
– Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission
capability
– “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability
– High refresh rate and high resolution video signals
capability
– High definition digital audio format signals capability
• Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion
(composite video → HDMI, component video →
HDMI) capability for monitor out
• Analog video input up-scaling for HDMI digital video
output 480i or 480p → 720p, 1080i or 1080p
■ DOCK terminal
• DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold
separately)
■ Automatic speaker setup features
• “YPAO” (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer) for automatically optimizing speaker
outputs suitable for listening environments
■ Other features
• 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
• OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to
optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual
system
• Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources
• Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability
• Scene function that allows you to change input sources
and sound field programs with one key
• Sleep timer
• Multi-zone function
Features
3 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:
5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 &
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a
registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTS-
HD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
Neural Surround
™
name and related logos are trademarks owned
by Neural Audio Corporation.
iPod™
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
Bluetooth
™
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG and is used by
Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement.
“HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
x.v.Color™
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius
XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not
available in Alaska and Hawaii.
Check that you received all of the following parts.
• Remote control
• Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4)
• Optimizer microphone
• AM loop antenna
• Indoor FM antenna
About this manual
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the keys on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the key names differ between
the front panel and the remote control, the key name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of
differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.
• “AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or “hHDMI 1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the
attached sheet or “Part names and functions” on page 4 for the information about each position of the parts.
• ☞ indicates the page describing the related information.
Supplied accessories
4 En
A MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
Switches this unit between on and off (see page 18).
B PHONES jack
For plugging headphones (see page 23).
C ZONE2 ON/OFF
Switches the zone function on and off (see page 58).
D ZONE2 CONTROL
Enables operation of a receiver set in Zone2, including input
source switching, volume control and tuner operation, with the
main amplifier or remote control after this key is pressed.
E INFO
Changes information display screens on the front panel display
(see page 24).
F MEMORY
Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (see page 30) or
XM/SIRIUS channels as preset channels (see page 33).
G PRESET l / h
Selects an FM/AM preset station (see page 30) or an XM/
SIRIUS preset channel (see page 33).
H FM/AM (CATEGORY l / h)
Changes the tuner bands between FM and AM.
Select a channel category for a XM/SIRIUS.
I TUNING/CH l / h
Changes FM/AM frequencies or XM/SIRIUS tuner channels.
J SCENE
Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field
programs (see page 22).
K TONE CONTROL
Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers/
headphones (see page 22).
L PROGRAM l / h
Changes sound field programs (see page 25).
M STRAIGHT
Changes a sound field program to straight decoding mode
(see page 28).
N PURE DIRECT
Changes mode to Pure Direct mode (see page 23). This key
lights up when Pure Direct mode is on.
O INPUT l / h
Selects an input source (see page 22).
P OPTIMIZER MIC jack
For connecting the supplied optimizer microphone and adjusting
output characteristics of speakers (see page 19).
Q VOLUME control
Controls the volume of this unit (see page 22).
R VIDEO (VIDEO AUX) jack
For connecting the video output cable of a camcorder or game
console (see page 17).
S AUDIO L/R (VIDEO AUX) jack
For connecting the audio output cable of a camcorder or game
console (see page 17).
T PORTABLE (VIDEO AUX) jack
For connecting the audio output cable of a portable music player
(see page 17).
U Front panel display
Displays information on this unit (see page 6).
V HDMI THROUGH
Lights up during pass-through output of an HDMI signal input
to this unit while this unit is on standby (see page 54).
Part names and functions
Front panel
l
h
CATEGORY
FM AM
TUNING/CH
MAIN
ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
TONE
CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
INPUT
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VIDEO
AUDIO
PORTABLE
THROUGH
ZONE2
ON/OFF
INFO
MEMORY
VIDEO
AUX
VOLUME
ZONE2
CONTROL
HDMI
EFFECT
PRESET
l
h
l
h
l
h
l
h
BD/DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
SCENE
A
U D
K NC PL O
V QFE G I
J S TRMB
H
5 En
Part names and functions
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
a SIRIUS terminal
For connecting a SiriusConnect tuner (separately sold)
(see page 35).
b DOCK terminal
For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-
11) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10)
(see page 17).
c XM terminal
For connecting XM Mini-Tuner in XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock
(separately sold) (see page 31).
d HDMI OUT/HDMI 1-4 terminals
For connecting an HDMI-compatible video monitor or external
components for HDMI inputs 1-4 (see page 15).
e ANTENNA jacks
For connecting supplied FM and AM antennas (see page 18).
f SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting front right and left, center, surround and
surround back speakers (see page 11). Connect the presence
speakers (see page 11) or the speakers for Zone2 (see page 57)
to EXTRA SP terminals.
g REMOTE IN/OUT jack
For connecting an external component that supports the remote
control function (see page 17).
h TRIGGER OUT jack
For connecting an external terminal with a trigger input terminal
to operate it linked with operation of this unit. For example,
when an electric screen that supports a trigger input is
connected, it opens and closes linked with operation of an input
source selected in this unit.
i AV 1-6 jacks
For connecting external components for audio/visual inputs 1-6
(see page 15).
j AV OUT jacks
Output audio/visual signals from a selected analog input source
to an external component (see page 16).
k AUDIO 1/2 jacks
For connecting external components for audio inputs 1-2
(see page 16).
l MONITOR OUT jack
Outputs visual signals from this unit to a video monitor, such as
a TV (see page 14).
m MULTI CH INPUT jacks
For connecting a player that supports a multi-channel output
(see page 16).
n AUDIO OUT jacks
Output audio signals from a selected analog input source to an
external component (see page 16).
o ZONE2 OUT jacks
Output sound of this unit to an external amplifier set in a
different zone.
p PRE OUT jacks
Output multi-channel signals from up to 7.1 channels to an
external amplifier (see page 16).
q Power Cable
Connect this cable to an AC wall outlet (see page 18).
Rear panel
SIRIUS
XM
DOCK
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PB
Y
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
A
V
1
AV 2
COAXIAL
AV 3
(
CD
)
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDI O1
AUDIO2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
AUDIO
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
CENTER
VIDEO
HDMI
ANTENNA
UNBAL.
FM
GND
AM
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
VIDEO
IN
OUT
MONITOR OUT
TRIGGER OUT
12V
0.1A MAX.
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
EXTRA SP
ZONE2/PRESENCE
1
2
CENTER
PR
PB
Y
REMOTE
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OUT
abc defgh
ij no p
q
mlk
6 En
Part names and functions
a SIRIUS indicator
Lights up when a SiriusConnect tuner is selected as an input
source.
b XM indicator
Lights up when an XM tuner is selected as an input source.
c HDMI indicator
Lights up during normal communication when HDMI is
selected as an input source.
d CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when a sound field program that uses CINEMA DSP
is selected.
e CINEMA DSP 3D indicator
Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D is activated.
f Tuner indicator
Lights up during receiving radio broadcast signals from an FM/
AM station (see page 29).
g SLEEP indicator
Lights up when the sleep timer is activated (see page 24).
h ZONE2 indicator
Lights up when the zone functions are turned on.
i VOLUME indicator
Displays volume levels.
j MUTE indicator
Flashes when audio is muted.
k Cursor indicators
Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are
available for operations.
l Multi information display
Displays menu items and settings for the current operation.
m Speaker indicators
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are currently
output.
Front panel display
STEREO
SLEEP
VOL.
TUNED
PL PR
SW
C
LR
SL SR
SBL SB SBR
MUTE
SIRIUS
XM
3
ZONE
2
abcdefghij
kl mk
SW
C
LR
SL SR
SBL SB SBR
PL PR
Subwoofer
Front L
Surround L
Surround back L
Center
Front R
Surround R
Surround back R
Surround back
Presence L Presence R
7 En
Part names and functions
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
a Remote control signal transmitter
Transmits infrared signals.
b MAIN/ZONE2
Switches amplifiers (Main or Zone2) to be operated by the
remote control (see page 58).
c TRANSMIT
Lights up when a signal is output from the remote control.
d CODE SET
Sets remote control codes for external component operations
(see page 59).
e SOURCE POWER
Switches an external component on and off.
f SLEEP
Switches the sleep timer operations (see page 24).
g POWER
Switches this unit on and standby.
h Input selection keys
i Tuner keys
j INFO
Changes the information shown on the front panel display
(see page 24).
k Sound selection keys
Selects sound field programs (see page 25).
l SCENE
Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field
programs (see page 22).
m SETUP
Displays the setup menu (see page 51).
n OPTION
Displays the option menu (see page 43).
o Cursors k / n / l / h/ENTER/RETURN
p VOLUME +/–
Adjust the volume of this unit (see page 22).
q DISPLAY
Displays or not display the OSD on the video monitor.
When an iPod is connected: Changes the operation mode of the
iPod connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock
(see page 40).
r MUTE
Turns the mute function of the sound output on and off
(see page 23).
s External component operation keys
Operate recording, playback etc. of external components
(see page 59).
t Numeric keys
Enter numbers.
u TV control keys
Enables operations of a monitor such as a TV and a projector.
Remote control
MAIN
POWER
1234
1256
1234
7856
90
10
1234
POWER
SOURCE
V-AU X
[ A ] [ B ] DOCK
MULTI
XM
SIRIUS
TUNER
FM
MOVIE
BD
DVD
TOP
MENU
MUSIC
SCENE
TV
CD
OPTIONSETUP
RETURN
REC
ENT
POWER
TV
TV VOL
INPUT
MUTE
TV CH
ENTER
VOLUME
DISPLAY
MUTE
MENU
RADIO
STEREO
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO
MEMORY
AM
CATEGORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
SLEEP
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
ZONE2
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
a
b
e
f
g
h
k
l
m
n
p
q
t
u
c
d
i
j
r
s
o
HDMI 1-4
Selects HDMI inputs 1 through 4.
AV 1-6
Selects AV inputs 1 through 6.
AUDIO 1/2
Selects AUDIO inputs 1 and 2.
V-AUX
Selects the V-AUX jack on the front panel of this
unit.
[A]/[B]
To control external components using the
sExternal component operation
keys separately from operations of this unit
(see page 59).
DOCK
Selects a Yamaha iPod universal dock/Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver connected to the DOCK
terminal.
TUNER
Selects the FM/AM tuner.
SIRIUS
Selects a SiriusConnect tuner as an input source.
XM
Selects an XM tuner as an input source.
MULTI
Selects a signal input from the MULTI CH
INPUT jack on the rear panel as an input source.
FM
Switches a band between FM and AM.
AM
(CATEGORY l / h)
Select a channel category for a XM/
SIRIUS.
MEMORY
Presets radio stations.
PRESET k / n
Selects a preset station.
TUN./CH k / n
Changes FM/AM frequencies or
XM/SIRIUS tuner channels.
Cursors k / n / l / h
Select menu items displayed on the
front panel display or on a video
monitor, or change settings.
ENTER
Confirms a selected item.
RETURN
Returns to the previous screen or
ends the menu display.
8 En
When you use this product for the first time, perform setup following the steps below. See the related pages for details on
operations and settings.
Prepare speakers, DVD player, cables, and other items
necessary for setup.
For example, prepare the following items for setting up a
5.1-channel sound system.
y
• Prepare two magnetically shielded speakers (for front). The priority of
the requirement of other speakers is as follows:
1 Two surround speakers
2 One center speaker
3 One (or two) surround back speaker(s)
• If your video monitor is a CRT, we recommend that you use magnetically
shielded speakers.
Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this
unit.
y
• This unit has a YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer)
that automatically optimizes this unit based on room acoustic
characteristics (audio characteristics of the speakers, speaker positions,
and room acoustics, etc.).
You can enjoy good balanced sound without special knowledge by using
the YPAO technology (see page 19).
Connect your TV, DVD player, or other components.
Connect the power cable and turn on this unit.
Select the component connected in the step 3 as an input
source and start playback.
y
• This unit supports the SCENE function that changes the input source and
sound field program at one time. Four scenes are preset for different
purposes for Blu-ray disc, DVD and CD, and you can select from a scene
from those just by pressing a remote control key. See page 22 for details.
Quick start guide
Step 1: Prepare items for setup
Requirements qty.
Speakers Front speaker 2
Center speaker 1
Surround speaker 2
Active subwoofer 1
Speaker cable 5
Subwoofer cable 1
Reproduction component such as DVD player 1
Video monitor such as TV 1
Video cable or HDMI cable 2
Audio cable 2
Front right speaker
Subwoofer
Surround left speaker
Surround right speaker
Front left speaker
Video monitor
Center speaker
Components
(such as DVD player)
Step 2: Set up your speakers
• Placing speakers ☞P. 10
• Connecting speakers ☞P. 11
Step 3: Connect your components
• Connecting a TV monitor or projector ☞P. 14
• Connecting other components ☞P. 15
• Connecting a multi-format player or
an external decoder ☞P. 16
• Connecting an external amplifier ☞P. 16
• Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver ☞P. 17
• Connecting the FM and AM antennas ☞P. 18
• Connecting an XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ☞P. 31
• Connecting a SiriusConnect tuner ☞P. 35
Step 4: Turn on the power
• Connecting the power cable ☞P. 18
• Turning this unit on and off ☞P. 18
Step 5: Select the input source and start
playback
• Basic procedure ☞P. 22
• Selecting sound field programs ☞P. 25
9 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
PREPARATION
1 Take off the battery compartment cover.
2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03,
UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+
and –) on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3 Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.
Notes
• Change all batteries if you notice the following conditions:
– the operation range of the remote control narrows
– the transmit indicator does not flash or is dim
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
This may shorten the life of the new batteries or cause old batteries
to leak.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Specification of batteries may be
different even though they look the same.
• If you find leaking batteries, discard the batteries immediately,
taking care not to touch the leaked material. If the leaked material
comes into contact with your skin or gets into your eyes or mouth,
rinse it away immediately and consult a doctor. Clean the battery
compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries.
• Dispose of the old batteries correctly in accordance with your local
regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes,
or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents
of the memory may be cleared. In such a case, install new batteries
and set the remote control code.
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be
sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
Notes
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
y
• You can operate external components with this remote control by setting
the remote control code. See page 59 for details.
Preparing remote control
Installing batteries in the remote
control
1
3
2
Using the remote control
30 30
Remote control sensor window
within 6 m (20 ft)
10 En
This unit supports up to 7.1-channel surround. We recommend the following speaker layout in order to obtain the
optimum surround effect.
7.1-channel speaker layout
6.1-channel speaker layout
5.1-channel speaker layout
■ Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds
(stereo sound) and effect sounds. Place these speakers at
an equal distance from the ideal listening position. When
using a screen, the appropriate top positions of the
speakers are about 1/4 of the screen from the bottom.
■ Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). Place it halfway between the left and
right speakers. When using a TV, place the speaker just
above or just under the center of the TV with the front
surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned. When using a
screen, place it just under the center of the screen.
■ Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds.
Place them at the rear left and rear right facing the
listening position.
To obtain a natural sound flow in the 5.1-channel speaker
layout, place them slightly further back than in the 7.1-
channel speaker layout.
■ Surround back left and right speakers (SBL
and SBR) / Surround back speaker (SB)
The surround back left and right speakers are used for rear
effect sounds. Place them at the rear of the room facing the
listening position at least 30 cm away from each other,
ideally at the same distance as that between the front left
and right speakers.
In the 6.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and
right channel sound signals are mixed down and output
from the single surround back speaker.
In the 5.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and
right channel sound signals are output from the surround
left and right speakers.
■ Subwoofer (SW)
The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and low-
frequency effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital
and DTS signals. Use a subwoofer with a built-in
amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing
Subwoofer System. Place it exterior to the front left and
right speakers facing slightly inward to reduce reflections
from a wall.
Connections
Placing speakers
60˚
30˚
SBR
SBL
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
SW
SW
30 cm (12 in) or more
60˚
30˚
SB
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
SW
SW
60˚
30˚
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
SW
SW
Speaker channels
11 En
Connections
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR)
The presence speakers supplement the sound from the
front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the
sound field programs (see page 25). We recommend that
you use the presence speakers especially for the CINEMA
DSP sound field programs. To use the presence speakers,
connect the speakers to EXTRA SP terminals and then set
“Extra SP Assign” to “Presence” (see page 51).
When you connect speakers, connect them to the respective terminals as follows, according to your speaker layout.
y
• Connect optional presence speakers or Zone2 speakers (see page 57) to the EXTRA SP jacks.
• You can connect up to two subwoofers. When two subwoofers are connected, the same sound is output from them.
■ 7.1-channel (with presence speakers)
■ 6.1-channel (when using the Multi-zone
function)
■ 5.1-channel (when using the Multi-zone
function)
FR
PRPL
C
FL
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
1.8 m
(6 ft)
1.8 m
(6 ft)
Connecting speakers
Speakers Jacks on this unit
a Front speaker L FRONT (L)
b Front speaker R FRONT (R)
c Center speaker CENTER
d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L)
e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R)
f Surround back speaker L SURROUND
BACK/BI-AMP (L)
g Surround back speaker R SURROUND
BACK/BI-AMP (R)
h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1
i Subwoofer 2 (optional) SUBWOOFER 2
j Presence speaker L (optional) EXTRA SP (L)
k Presence speaker R (optional) EXTRA SP (R)
SUBWOOFER
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
SPEAKERS
EXTRA SP
ZONE2/PRESENCE
1
2
R.BAC
K
S
UBWOOFER
N
PUT
AUDI
O
O
UT
Z
O
NE2
O
U
T
F
R
O
NT
S
URROUND
S
UR. BAC
K
P
RE
OUT
C
ENTE
R
D
MI 3
HDMI
4
X.
SPEAKERS
C
ENTER
e d
b
a
k
j
c
g f
h i
Speakers Jacks on this unit
a Front speaker L FRONT (L)
b Front speaker R FRONT (R)
c Center speaker CENTER
d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L)
e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R)
f Surround back speaker SURROUND
BACK/BI-AMP (L)
h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1
i Subwoofer 2 (optional) SUBWOOFER 2
j Zone2 speaker L (optional) EXTRA SP (L)
k Zone2 speaker R (optional) EXTRA SP (R)
Speakers Jacks on this unit
a Front speaker L FRONT (L)
b Front speaker R FRONT (R)
c Center speaker CENTER
d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L)
e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R)
h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1
i Subwoofer 2 (optional) SUBWOOFER 2
j Zone2 speaker L (optional) EXTRA SP (L)
k Zone2 speaker R (optional) EXTRA SP (R)
12 En
Connections
■ Connecting to the FRONT, CENTER,
SURROUND and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP
terminals
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of
insulation from the end of each speaker
cable and then twist bare wires of the cable
together so that they will not cause a short
circuits.
2 Loosen the knob, insert the twisted bare
wires into the hole, and then tighten the
knob.
■ Connecting to the EXTRA SP terminals
1 Press down the tab and insert the bare end of
the speaker cable into the hole in the terminal.
y
• You can connect the presence speakers (see page 11) or the speakers in
the second zone (Zone2) (see page 57) to EXTRA SP terminals.
2 Release the tab to secure the wire.
You can connect speakers that support bi-amplification
connections to this unit. To connect the speakers via a bi-
amp connection, connect them to the FRONT jacks and
SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP terminals as illustrated.
To enable the bi-amp connection, connect the power cable
to the wall outlet, display the ADVANCED SETUP menu
and set “BI AMP” to “ON” (see page 60).
Connecting the speaker cable
Caution
• A speaker cable is a pair of insulated cables running side by side in general. One of the cables is colored differently
or striped to indicate a polarity. Connect one end of the colored/striped cable to the “+” (red) terminal of this unit
and the other end to that of your speaker, and connect one end of the other cable to the “–” (black) terminal of this
unit and the other end to that of your speaker.
• Before connecting the speakers, be sure to disconnect the power cable.
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or
speakers. If the circuit shorts out, “CHECK SP WIRES!” appears on the front panel display when this unit is turned
on.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If images on the monitor are still distorted even when you use the magnetically
shielded speakers, place the speakers away from the monitor.
• Use speakers with an impedance of 6-ohm or larger. Set speaker impedance in “ADVANCED SETUP” before
connecting the speakers (see page 60).
Connecting the banana plug (Except Russia
and Asia models)
Tighten the knob, and then insert the banana plug into
the end of the terminal.
10 mm (0.4 in)
1
2
3
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Banana plug
Using bi-amplification connections
Caution
Before making bi-amplification connections, remove any
brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter.
Refer to the instruction manuals of speakers for details.
When not making bi-amplification connections, make
sure that the brackets or cables are connected before
connecting the speaker cables.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
FRONT
Front speakers
Right Left
This unit
13 En
Connections
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit has the following input and output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for components that you are
connecting.
■ Audio jacks
■ Video jacks
■ Video/audio jacks
y
• We recommend that you use a commercially available 19-pin HDMI
cable no longer than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• When you connect this unit to a component with a DVI jack, an HDMI/
DVI-D cable is required.
• You can check error information on HDMI connections (see page 74).
Information on jacks and cable plugs
Jack and cables Description
AUDIO jacks To transmit conventional analog
left and right audio signals. Use
stereo pin cables. Connect red
plugs to red jacks (R) and white
plugs to white jacks (L).
COAXIAL jacks To transmit coaxial digital audio
signals. Use pin cables for digital
audio signals.
OPTICAL jacks To transmit optical digital audio
signals. Use optical fiber cables for
optical digital audio signals.
Jack and cables Description
VIDEO jacks To transmit conventional
composite video signals. Use video
pin cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks
To transmit component video
signals that include luminance (Y),
chrominance blue (PB) and
chrominance red (PR) components.
Use component video cables.
AUDIO
L
R
(white)
(red)
COAXIAL
C
(orange)
OPTICAL
O
VIDEO
V
(yellow)
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
Y
P
R
(red)
(blue)
(green)
Jack and cables Description
HDMI jacks To transmit digital video and
digital audio signals. Use HDMI
cables.
A video signal input to this unit is output from the
output terminals in MONITOR OUT for the same kind
of signal as the input signal.
For example, if a VCR with a composite output signal
and a DVD player with a COMPONENT VIDEO
output signal are connected, connect both VIDEO jack
and COMPONENT VIDEO jack in MONITOR OUT
to the video monitor.
If an HDMI input compatible monitor is connected, this
unit automatically converts an analog signal that is
input from a video input terminal to a digital video
signal, and then output it from the HDMI OUT jack.
HDMI
HDMI
HDMI
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
HDMI
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Y
PB
PR
Input Output
Repeat Converted
14 En
Connections
Connect a video monitor such as a TV or projector to an output terminal of this unit. You can select one of the following
three types according to the input signal format supported by the video monitor.
Note
• Make sure that this unit and video monitor are unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
■ To connect an HDMI video monitor
■ To connect component video monitor
Note
• Only video signals input from this unit via the component input terminal
are output from the component output terminal.
■ To connect composite video monitor
Note
• Only video signals input from this unit via the composite video input
terminal are output from the composite video output terminal.
To output sound of a TV from this unit, make connection
between the AV input 1-6 and an audio output terminal.
If the TV supports an optical digital output, we
recommend that you use the AV input 1. Connecting to the
AV input 1 allows you to switch an input source to the AV
input 1 with a just a single key operation using the SCENE
function (see page 22).
Connecting a TV monitor or projector
Jacks on components Jacks on this unit
a HDMI input HDMI OUT
Jacks on components Jacks on this unit
b Component video output MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
Jacks on components Jacks on this unit
c Video input (composite) MONITOR OUT (VIDEO)
HDMI
VIDEO
M
O
NIT
O
R
OUT
PR
PB
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
OUT
ANTENNA
UNBAL.
FM
G
N
D
AM
HDMI
1
(
B
D
/
DVD
)
HDMI
2
HD
M
I
N
OU
T
T
RI
GG
ER
O
UT
12V
0
.1
A
MAX.
REM
O
TE
HDMI
V
a
c
b
P
B
YP
R
TV, or projector
Outputting sound of a TV from this unit
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AV 1
P
R
P
B
Y
AV
2
CO
AXIAL
A
V
3
(
CD
)
CO
AXIA
L
O
PTI
C
A
L
A
V
4
AV
5
AV
6
AV
OU
T
A
U
DI
O
1
A
U
D
VIDE
O
UNBAL
.
F
M
G
ND
A
M
M
P
R
P
B
Y
O
Digital output
(optical)
TV, or projector
15 En
Connections
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit has input and output terminals for respective input and output sources. You can reproduce sound and movies
from input sources selected with the front panel display or remote control.
Note
• Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
■ Audio and video player / Set-top box
y
• Input sources in parentheses are recommended to connect to the respective jacks. If a component is compatible with the SCENE function, you can switch
the input source to that component with a single key operation using the SCENE function (see page 22).
• You can change the name of the input source displayed on the front panel display or the OSD on the video monitor as necessary (see page 55).
• See page 57 on how to use ZONE2 OUT jacks.
Connecting other components
Output jacks on the connected external component
Input sources/jacks of this unit
External
components
Signals Output jacks
External component
with HDMI output
Audio/Video HDMI output HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) HDMI 1
HDMI 2 HDMI 2
HDMI 3 HDMI 3
HDMI 4 HDMI 4
External component
with component video
output
Audio Optical digital output AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL
Video Component video output COMPONENT VIDEO
Audio Coaxial digital output AV 2 COAXIAL
Video Component video output COMPONENT VIDEO
External component
with composite video
output
Audio Coaxial digital output AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL
Video Composite output VIDEO
Audio Optical digital output AV 4 OPTICAL
Video Composite output VIDEO
Audio Analog audio output AV 5 AUDIO
Video Composite output VIDEO
Audio Analog audio output AV 6 AUDIO
Video Composite output VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
OPTICAL
(
TV
)
AV
1
AV 2
COAXIAL
AV 3
(
CD
)
COAXIAL
OPTICAL
AV 4
AV 5
AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO1
AUDIO2
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
AUDIO
OUT
VIDEO
HDMI 1
(
BD/DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
MONITOR
OUT
TRIGGER
OUT
CENTER
S
IRIU
S
XM
D
OCK
ZO
O
HDMI
ANTENNA
UNBAL.
FM
G
N
D
AM
VIDE
O
IN
O
U
T
MONITOR OUT
TRIGGER OUT
1
2
V
0.1
A
MAX
.
FR
O
N
T
P
R
P
B
Y
REM
O
T
E
C
OMPONEN
T
VIDEO
OUT
Audio / video input (AV 1-6) Audio / video output (AV OUT)
Audio input (AUDIO 1-2)
HDMI input
(HDMI 1-4)
Audio output
(AUDIO OUT)
Multi channel audio input (MULTI CH)
16 En
Connections
■ Audio player
y
• We recommend connecting the coaxial digital output terminal of a CD player to the AV3 jack.
This unit has 8 sets of input jacks (FRONT L/R,
CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SUR. BACK and
SUBWOOFER) to input multi-channel analog sound
signals. If your playback component, such as a DVD
player or SACD player, has multi-channel analog output
capability, you can enjoy up to 7.1-channel multi-channel
sound. To output multi-channel sound, connect the audio
output jacks of your playback component to the MULTI
CH INPUT jacks of this unit, and set the input source of
this unit to “MULTI CH.” For details on how to change
input sources, see page 22.
Notes
• When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital sound field
processor is automatically disabled.
• Since this unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, connect at least a 5.1-
channel speaker system when using this feature.
• When the input source is switched to “MULTI CH,” images input from a
component connected to “AV1-6” or “V-AUX” (see page 45). If your
DVD player does not support multi-channel digital output, connect it to
these input jacks.
This unit has more than enough power for any home use.
However, if you want to add more power to the speaker
output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an
external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT
jack outputs the same channel signals as the
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
Note
• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make any
connections to the SPEAKERS terminals.
a FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel output jacks.
b SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel output jacks.
c SUR. BACK PRE OUT jacks
Surround back output jacks. When you only connect one
external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to
the single SUR. BACK jack.
y
• To output surround back channel signals at these jacks, set “Sur.
Back” to any parameter except “None” (see page 52).
d CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel output jack.
e SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1/2 jacks
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.
Output jacks on the connected external component
Input sources/jacks of this unit
External components Output jacks
External component with optical digital
output
Optical digital output AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL
AV 4 OPTICAL
External component with coaxial digital
output
Coaxial digital output AV 2 COAXIAL
AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL
External component with analog audio
output
Analog audio output AV 5 AUDIO
AV 6 AUDIO
AUDIO 1 AUDIO
AUDIO 2 AUDIO
About audio/video output terminals
Among the analog audio and analog video signals input to this unit via input terminals, the audio/video signals of the
selected input sources are output from the AV OUT jack and AUDIO OUT jack. An HDMI input signal,
COMPONENT VIDEO input signal or digital audio input signal cannot be output.
When using the AV OUT jack: connect an external component to the composite or analog audio terminal.
When using the AUDIO OUT jack: connect an external component to the analog audio terminal.
Connecting a multi-format player or an
external decoder
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
CENTER
LRLR LR
Surround
back out
Surround
out
Front out
Subwoofer out
Center out
Multi-format player/External decoder
(7.1-channel output)
Connecting an external amplifier
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR. BACK
SUBWOOFER
PRE OUT
CENTER
1
2
abc d
e
17 En
Connections
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
When the components are the Yamaha products and have
the capability of the transmission of the remote control
signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT
jacks to the remote control input and output jack with the
monaural analog mini cable as follows.
This unit has the DOCK terminal, to which you can
connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11, sold
separately) or a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-
10, sold separately). You can play an iPod or a Bluetooth
component with this unit by connecting it to the DOCK
terminal.
Use a dedicated cable for connection between the dock/
receiver and this unit.
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console or a video camera to this unit. Be sure to
turn down the volume of this unit and other components
before making connections.
Note
• When external components are connected both the PORTABLE jack and
AUDIO jack, sound input from the PORTABLE jack is output.
Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal
dock or Bluetooth™ wireless audio
receiver
IN
OUT
REMOTE
HDMI 1
B
D
/
DVD
)
HDMI 2
HDMI
3
HDMI
4
V
IDE
O
12V
P
R
P
B
Y
CO
MP
O
NENT
V
IDE
O
Remote
control out
Remote
control in
Infrared signal
receiver or Yamaha
component
Yamaha component
(CD or DVD player, etc.)
DOCK
SIRIU
S
XM
CO
MP
O
NEN
T
VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
V
IDE
O
HDMI
ANTENNA
U
NBAL
.
F
M
G
ND
A
O
U
T
Yamaha iPod universal
dock/Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the
front panel
VIDEO
AUDIO
PORTABLE
VIDEO
AUX
l
h
C
ATE
GO
RY
FM
AM
T
UNING/CH
OG
RAM
STRAIGHT
P
URE DIRECT
INPUT
OPTIMIZE
R
MI
C
EM
O
R
Y
V
O
L
U
M
E
EFFE
CT
P
RE
S
E
T
l
h
l
h
h
l
h
B
D
/
DV
D
TV
C
D
RADI
O
SC
ENE
V
L
R
R
L
AUDIO
VIDEO
PORTABLE
Game console/Camcorder Music player
Analog audio
output
Analog audio
output
Video output
18 En
Connections
An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are
supplied with this unit. Connect these antennas properly to
the respective jacks.
y
• The supplied antennas are normally sensitive enough to obtain good
reception.
• Position the AM loop antenna away from this unit.
• If you cannot get good reception, we recommend that you use an outdoor
antenna. For more details, consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer
or service center.
• Always use the AM loop antenna even when the outdoor antenna is
connected.
Assembling the AM loop antenna
Connecting the AM loop antenna
The wires of the AM loop antenna have no polarity. You
can connect either wire to the AM terminal and the other
to the GND terminal.
After all connections are complete, plug the AC power
cable of this unit into an AC wall outlet.
1 Press AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or
gPOWER) to turn on this unit.
2 Press AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or
gPOWER) again to turn off this unit
(standby mode).
y
• The unit needs a few seconds until ready to play back.
• You can also turn on this unit by pressing JSCENE (or lSCENE).
• This unit consumes a small amount of electricity even in the standby
mode. We recommend disconnecting the power cable from the AC wall
outlet.
Connecting the FM and AM antennas
ANTENNA
UNBAL.
FM
GND
AM
US
XM
DOC
K
CO
MP
O
NENT
V
IDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
VIDE
O
HDMI
HDMI 1
(
B
D
/
DVD
)
H
DMI 2
HDMI
3
H
V
IDE
O
IN
OU
T
M
O
NIT
O
R
OU
T
TRI
GG
ER
OUT
1
2V
0.1
A
MAX
.
FR
O
CENTER
P
R
P
B
Y
R
EM
O
T
E
CO
MP
O
NENT
V
IDE
O
O
U
T
Outdoor AM antenna
Connect a 5 to 10 m (16 to
33 ft) vinyl-covered wire,
and extend it outdoors
(use the AM loop antenna
together with this
antenna).
Ground (GND terminal)
The GND terminal is not for earth grounding.
To reduce noises, connect a ground bar or a
vinyl-covered wire with a copper plate at its tip,
and place it in the moist ground.
Indoor FM antenna
AM loop
antenna
Press and hold ReleaseInsert
Connecting the power cable
Turning this unit on and off
Caution
Do not unplug this unit while it is turned on. Doing so
may damage this unit or cause the settings of this unit
to be saved incorrectly.
To the AC wall outlet
Power cable
19 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit has a Yamaha Parametric Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO). With the YPAO, this unit automatically adjusts the
output characteristics of your speakers based on speaker position, speaker performance, and the acoustic characteristics
of the room. We recommend that you first adjust the output characteristics with the YPAO when you use this unit.
1 Check the following points.
Before starting the automatic setup, check the
following.
• All speakers and subwoofer are connected
properly.
• Headphones are disconnected from this unit.
• The video monitor is connected properly.
• This unit and the video monitor are turned on.
• This unit is selected as the video input source of the
video monitor.
• The connected subwoofer is turned on and the
volume level is set to about half way (or slightly
less).
• The crossover frequency controls of the connected
subwoofer are set to the maximum.
2 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
“MIC ON. View OSD MENU” appears on the front panel
display.
The following menu screen appears on the video monitor.
y
• You can bring up the above menu screen from the setup menu (see
page 51).
3 Place the optimizer microphone at your
normal listening position on a flat level
surface with the omni-directional
microphone heading upward.
y
• It is recommended that you use a tripod or something similar to fix the
optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when
seated in your listening position. You can fix the optimizer microphone to
the tripod with the attaching screw of the tripod.
4 When the speakers are connected to EXTRA
SP terminals, press oCursor k repeatedly
to select “Extra SP Assign,” and then press
oCursor l / h to select how to use EXTRA
SP terminals from “Zone2,” “Presence” or
“None.”
If this unit does not work when you press oCursor,
press mSETUP once and then operate this unit.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
Notes
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be
output during the “Auto Setup” procedure. Do not
allow small children to enter the room during the
procedure.
• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as
quiet as possible while the “Auto Setup” procedure is
in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the
results may not be satisfactory.
y
• See page 51 for the “Manual Setup” procedure.
Using Auto Setup
VOLUME
MIN MAX
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN MAX
Subwoofer
UT
V
IDE
O
A
UDI
O
P
O
RTABLE
VIDE
O
A
UX
h
OPTIMIZER
MIC
Optimizer microphone
1 AutoSetup
>Zone2Presence
ExtraSPAssign
[ENTER]:Start
None
EQ Type;;;;Natural
. Start
[]/[]:Up/Down
[
[
Optimizer microphone
20 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
5 To select a sound character for adjustment,
press oCursor n to select “EQ Type” and
then press oCursor l / h.
If this unit does not work when you press oCursor,
press mSETUP once and then operate this unit.
This unit has a parametric equalizer that adjusts the
output levels for each frequency range. The equalizer
is adjusted to produce a cohesive sound field based on
automatically measured speaker characteristics.
In “EQ Type,” you can select the following
parametric equalizer characteristics suitable for the
desired sound characteristics.
Natural
This adjusts all speakers to achieve natural sound.
Select this if sounds in the high frequency range seem
too strong when “EQ Type” is set to “Flat.”
Flat
This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same
characteristics. Select this if your speakers have
similar qualities.
Front
This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same
characteristics as the front left and right speakers.
Select this if your front left and right speakers have
significantly better qualities than the other speakers.
6 Press oCursor n to select “Start” and then
press oENTER to start the setup procedure.
A countdown starts and a measurement starts in 10
seconds. A loud test tone is output during
measurement.
Notes
• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any
operation on this unit.
• Press oCursor k to cancel the automatic setup procedure.
When measurement is successfully completed,
“YPAO Complete” appears on the front panel display
and the results appear on the monitor.
SP
Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in
the following order:
Total of Front and Center/Total of Surround and Surround
Back/Subwoofer
DIST
Displays the speaker distance from the listening position
in the following order:
Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance
LVL
Displays the speaker output levels in the following order:
Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level
Notes
• If “ERROR” appears on the video monitor during “Auto Setup,”
measurement is canceled and the type of error is displayed. For details,
see “When an error message is displayed during measurement”
(page 21).
• If problems occur during measurement, “WARNING (XX)” (xx indicates
the number of warning) appears above “RESULT” (see page 21).
7 Press oENTER to confirm the settings.
The speaker characteristics are adjusted according to
measurement results.
To cancel the operation, press oCursor l / h to
select “Cancel” and press oENTER.
When the following screen appears, remove the
optimizer microphone. “Auto Setup” is now
complete.
y
• If you do not want to apply the measurement results, select “Cancel.”
• Perform “Auto Setup” again if you change the number or positions of
speakers.
• If you press oENTER before removing the optimizer microphone,
“1 Auto Setup” of “Speaker Setup” in the setup menu (see page 51) is
displayed.
Measurement takes about 3 minutes. To obtain precise
results, stay where you will not disturb the
measurement, such as to the side of or behind the
speakers or outside the room.
1 AutoSetup
RESULT
[ENTER]:Finish
SP:3/4/0.1
DIST:8.0/8.5ft
LVL:-3.5/+4.5dB
. >Set Cancel
[]/[]:Select
p[
The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Store it
in a cool place and away from direct sunlight after
measurement. Do not leave it in a place where it will be
subjected to high temperatures such on an AV
component.
1 AutoSetup
AUTOSETUPComplete
[SETUP]:Exit
DisconnectMicrophone
PRESS[ENTER]
21 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Press oCursor n once, and select “Retry” or
“Exit” using oCursor l / h and then press
oENTER.
Retry
Performs “Auto Setup” again.
Exit
Terminates the measurement and “Auto Setup.”
y
• See page 69 for details on error messages.
• When “E-5:NOISY” appears, you can continue measurement. To
continue measurement, select “Proceed.” However, we recommend that
you solve the problem first and then perform measurement again.
If a problem occurs during measurement, “WARNING” is
displayed on the result display screen. Check the error and
solve the problems.
y
• See page 70 for details on warning messages.
• Optimization will not be performed while a warning message is
displayed. We recommend that you solve the problem and perform “Auto
Setup” again.
1 Check if “→” is displayed on the left of
“WARNING” and press oENTER.
Details of the warning message are displayed. If there
are multiple warning messages, you can display the
next message using oCursor h.
2 To return to the top result display, press
oENTER again.
When an error message is displayed
during measurement
ERROR
Don't
operate
.E-9:USER CANCEL
[ENTER]:Return
any function
>RetryExit
[]/[]:Select
p[
When a warning message is displayed
after measurement
WARNING
Reversechannel
W-1:OUTOFPHASE
[ENTER]:Return
FL---
CENTER
SL---
SBL---
[]/[]:Select
p[
22 En
BASIC OPERATION
1 Turn on external components (TV, DVD
player, etc.) connected to this unit.
2 Press OINPUT l / h (or hInput
selection keys) to select an input source.
The name of the selected input source is displayed for
a few seconds.
y
• You can change the input source name displayed on the front panel
display or the OSD on the video monitor as necessary (see
page 55).
3 Play the external component that you have
selected as the source input, or select a radio
station on the tuner.
Refer to the operating instructions of the external
component for details on playback. For selecting
radio stations or playback of an iPod or Bluetooth
component using this unit, see the following.
• FM/AM radio tuning (see page 29)
• Bluetooth component playback (see page 42)
• iPod playback (see page 40)
4 Turn the QVOLUME control to adjust the
volume (or press pVOLUME +/–).
This unit has a SCENE function that allows you to change
input sources and sound field programs with one key. Four
scenes are available for different usages, such as playing
movies or music. The following input sources and sound
field programs are provided as the initial factory settings.
y
• When this unit is on standby, you can turn on this unit by pressing the
SCENE key.
• If a Yamaha DVD player that can receive SCENE control signals is
connected to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, the DVD player
automatically turns on and starts playback when JSCENE (or
lSCENE) is pressed. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the
DVD player.
Press JSCENE (or lSCENE).
Select the desired input source/sound field
program, and press down JSCENE (or
lSCENE) until “SET Complete” appears on the
front panel display.
When the OSD is shown on the video monitor, “SCENE
Setting Complete” appears on the video monitor (OSD).
You can operate an external component with the remote
control of this unit by setting a remote control code for the
external component for each input source. Setting remote
control codes for desired input sources allows you to
switch between external components linked to scene
selections.
1 Register the remote control code of an
external component to the desired input
source (see page 59).
Note
• Remote control codes cannot be registered to TUNER, SIRIUS, or
XM input sources.
Playback
Basic procedure
Note
When you play back a DTS-CD, noise may be output in some
conditions, which may cause a speaker malfunction. Make sure
that the volume is set to low before starting playback. If noise is
output, do the following.
1) When only noise is output
If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit,
only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this
unit by digital connection and play back the DTS-CD. If the
condition is not improved, the problem may results from the
playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the
playback component.
2) When noise is output during playback or skip operation
Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the option menu
after selecting the input source and set “Decoder Mode” to
“DTS” (see page 44).
VOL.
AV1
Input source name
VOL.
SW
C
LR
SL SR
Volume-18.5dB
Volume
Using the SCENE function
Input source Sound field program
BD/DVD HDMI 1 Straight
TV AV 1 Straight
CD AV 3 Straight
RADIO TUNER 7ch Enhancer
Selecting a SCENE
Registering input source/sound field
program
Switching remotely controlled external
components linked to scene selections
23 En
Playback
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
2 Press hInput selection keys on the
remote control for the input source whose
remote control code was registered in step 1
for about 3 seconds while pressing down
lSCENE key whose assignment you want
to change. The external component can now
be controlled remotely just by selecting a
scene.
From now on the external component can be remotely
controllable just by selecting a scene.
1 Press rMUTE on the remote control to mute
the audio output.
The MUTE indicator on the front panel display
flashes while audio output is muted.
2 Press rMUTE again to resume audio
output.
You can adjust the balance of the high frequency range
(Treble) and low frequency range (Bass) of sounds output
from the front left and right speakers to obtain desired
tone.
y
• The tone control of the speakers or headphones can be set separately. Set
the headphone tone control with the headphones connected.
1 Press KTONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass.”
The current setting is displayed on the front panel
display.
2 Adjust the frequency range using
LPROGRAM l / h.
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
The display returns to the previous screen soon after
you release the key.
Notes
• The tone control settings are not effective during playback in Pure Direct
mode.
• If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those from
other channels well.
Use Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity
sound of the selected source. When Pure Direct mode is
activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the
least circuitry.
Press NPURE DIRECT (or kPURE DIRECT)
to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off.
NPURE DIRECT lights up when you set Pure Direct
mode on.
The front panel display turns off while the Pure Direct
mode is on. It turns on temporarily when you control this
unit (such as volume control). The front panel display
turns on again once you set the Pure Direct mode to off.
The following features are disabled in Pure Direct mode.
– sound field program, tone control
– display and operation of the option menu and setup
menu
– multi-zone function
Plug your headphones in the BPHONES jack on
the front panel.
When you select a sound field program while using the
headphones, the mode is automatically set to SILENT
CINEMA mode.
Notes
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker
terminals.
• When multi-channel signals are processed, sounds in all channels are
divided to left and right channels. When the input source is set to
“MULTI CH,” only front L/R sound is output from the headphones.
Muting audio output temporarily
(MUTE)
Adjusting high/low frequency sound
(tone control)
Treble
0.0dB
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound
Using your headphones
24 En
Playback
When HDMI1-4 or AV1-4 is selected as the input source,
you can display audio/video signal information.
y
• Input signal information is displayed on both a video monitor and the
front panel display.
1 Select the desired input source, and press
nOPTION.
The option menu for the selected input source is
displayed (see page 43).
2 Press oCursor k / n to select “Signal Info,”
and press oENTER.
Information on input signals is displayed. See
page 44 on information displayed on the screen.
Notes
• You can change items of information displayed on the front panel
display using oCursor k / n.
• If an HDMI related error occurs, error information is displayed at
the bottom of the screen.
3 To end the information display, press
nOPTION.
Information displayed on the front panel display can be
changed by pressing EINFO (or jINFO).
The following information can be displayed according to
the input source.
For example, if you select HDMI1 input and display “DSP
Program,” the following screen appears on the front panel
display.
The sleep timer is useful if you want to go to sleep while
this unit is playing or recording a source.
Press fSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of
time.
Each time you press fSLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
When the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator on the
front panel display lights up.
Press fSLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until
“Sleep Off” appears on the front panel display.
Displaying input signal information Changing information on the front
panel display
HDMI1-4: Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder
AV1-6: Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder
AUDIO1-2: Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder
MULTI CH: Input
V-AUX: Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder
FM/AM: Frequency, DSP Program, Audio
Decoder
XM: Channel, Category, Song, Antenna,
DSP Program, Audio Decoder
SIRIUS: Channel, Category, Artist / Song,
Composer, Antenna, DSP Program,
Audio Decoder
iPod (Simple remote mode): Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder
iPod (Menu browse mode): (in PlayInfo displayed) Artist, Album,
Song, DSP Program, Audio Decoder
(in Play menu displayed) List
Bluetooth: Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder
Using the sleep timer
Straight
Input source
Sound field program (DSP program)
Sleep 120min. Sleep 90min.
Sleep 60min.Sleep 30min.Sleep Off
25 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. You can enjoy multi-channel sounds
for almost all input sources using various sound field programs stored on the chip and a variety of surround decoders.
■ Selecting a sound field program on the front panel
Press LPROGRAM l / h repeatedly to select a desired sound field program.
■ Selecting a sound field program with the remote control
Perform the following operations depending on the category of the sound field programs.
Sound field programs for movies/TV programs............................... Press kMOVIE repeatedly.
Sound field programs for music ....................................................... Press kMUSIC repeatedly.
Stereo reproduction .......................................................................... Press kSTEREO repeatedly.
Multi-channel stereo reproduction ................................................... Press kSTEREO repeatedly.
Compressed music enhancer ............................................................ Press kSTEREO repeatedly.
Surround decoder ............................................................................. Press kSUR.DECODE repeatedly.
For example, if you select “Sci-Fi” in “movie/TV program,” the following screen appears on the front panel display.
Notes
• Sound field programs are stored for each input source. When you change the input source, the sound field program previously selected for that input
source is applied again.
• When you play back the Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS Express, DTS-HD Master Audio, or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio sources, this unit
does not apply any sound field program other than the surround decoder and they are played back in straight decode mode.
• If the sampling frequency of an input source is higher than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field programs.
This unit provides sound field programs for multiple categories including music, movies and stereo reproduction. Select
a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.
y
• You can check what speakers are currently outputting signals with the speaker indicators on the front panel display (see page 6).
• Each program can adjust sound field elements (sound field parameters). For details, see page 46.
• in the table indicates the sound field program with CINEMA DSP.
Enjoy the sound field programs
Selecting sound field programs
Sound field program descriptions
For movie/TV program sources
Program Descriptions
Standard This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic
positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an
ideal movie theater,” in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.
Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions.
It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent
dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.
Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effects-
featuring movies.
You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between
dialog, sound effects and background music.
Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies.
The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to
the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio
channels and the clarity of the sound.
Sci-Fi
Program name
Sound field program category
26 En
Enjoy the sound field programs
y
• When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers.
Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to
musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones
and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue
the listener even after long hours of viewing.
Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a
good old movie theater.
The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable
space with a certain sound depth.
Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live
feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center
while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence
in the stadium.
Action Game This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data
that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling
by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions.
Roleplaying Game This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for
movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during
play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game.
For audio music sources
Program Descriptions
Hall in Munich This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the
interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly,
creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna.
Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very
full, rich sound.
Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant
reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music.
Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field
features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz club once. The floor
can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener
can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals
and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a
big live hall.
For stereo reproduction
Program Descriptions
2ch Stereo Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels.
Program Descriptions
27 En
Enjoy the sound field programs
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sources on multi-channels.
See page 45 for details.
y
• An input source is played back in straight decode mode (see page 28) when multi-channel audio signal is input.
For Multi-channel stereo reproduction
Program Descriptions
7ch Stereo Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit
downmixes the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.
The Compressed Music Enhancer
Program Descriptions
Straight Enhancer Use this program to enhance the sound nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel
compression artifacts.
7ch Enhancer Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.
Surround decode mode
Decoder Descriptions
Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all kinds of sources.
PLIIx Movie /
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for movies. If your listening environment is as
follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.
• When the surround back speakers are not connected
• When headphones are connected
PLIIx Music /
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for music. If your listening environment is as
follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.
• When the surround back speakers are not connected
• When headphones are connected
PLIIx Game /
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for games. If your listening environment is as
follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.
• When the surround back speakers are not connected
• When headphones are connected
Neo:6 Cinema DTS decoder suitable for movies.
Neo:6 Music DTS decoder suitable for music.
Neural Sur.
(U.S.A. model only)
Neural Surround processing for any sources.
The Neural Surround decoder supports PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS Digital Surround, DSD and analog 2-channel
input sources. When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is
selected, multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing and the Neural Surround-incompatible PCM signals are reproduced in stereo. The Neural Surround
decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround program of XM Satellite Radio.
28 En
Enjoy the sound field programs
In straight decoding mode, sounds are reproduced without
sound field effect. 2-channel stereo sources are output
from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel
input sources are decoded straight into the appropriate
channels and multi-channel sounds are reproduced
without a sound field effect.
1 To enable straight decoding mode, press
MSTRAIGHT (or kSTRAIGHT).
“Straight” appears on the front panel display.
2 To cancel straight decoding mode, press
MSTRAIGHT (or kSTRAIGHT) again.
A sound field program name appears on the front
panel display, and sound is reproduced with that
sound field effect.
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy DSP sound
field surround effects even without any surround speakers
by using virtual surround speakers. You can even enjoy
Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker
system that does not include a center speaker.
When “Sur. L/R SP” in the setup menu is set to “None”
(see page 52), this unit operates in Virtual CINEMA DSP
mode.
Note
• Virtual CINEMA DSP is not available in the following conditions even if
you set “Sur. L/R SP” to “None” (see page 52).
– headphone plug is connected to the PHONES jack.
– 7ch Stereo of the field sound program is selected.
– Pure Direct mode or straight decoding mode is used.
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
sources with your headphones. SILENT CINEMA mode
is automatically selected when you connect the headphone
plug to the PHONES jack.
Note
• SILENT CINEMA mode is not available in the following conditions.
– 2ch Stereo of the sound field program is selected.
– Pure Direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected.
CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates the intensive and
accurate stereoscopic sound field in the listening room.
To use this unit in CINEMA DSP 3D mode, presence
speakers are required. Connect the presence speakers to
the EXTRA SP jacks, perform the following settings and
select a CINEMA DSP related sound field program.
• Set the “Extra SP Assign” to “Presence” (see page 51).
• Enables the CINEMA DSP 3D in the setup menu (see
page 47).
• Disconnect the headphones from the PHONES jack.
When the sound field program runs in CINEMA DSP 3D
mode, the 3D indicator on the front panel lights up.
Enjoying unprocessed input sources
(Straight decoding mode)
Enjoying sound field programs without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA
DSP)
Enjoy sound field programs with
headphones (SILENT CINEMA™)
Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode
29 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
The FM/AM tuner of this unit provides the following two
modes for tuning.
■ Frequency tuning mode (Auto tuning/Manual
tuning)
You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by searching
or specifying its frequency.
■ Preset tuning mode (Preset tuning)
You can preset the frequencies of FM/AM stations by
registering them to specific numbers, and later just select
those numbers to tune in.
Note
• Adjust the FM/AM antennas connected to this unit for the best reception.
1 Press OINPUT l / h (or hTUNER)
repeatedly and switch the input source to
“TUNER.”
2 Press HFM (iFM) or HAM (iAM) to select
a band.
“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display
according to the band that you have selected.
3 Press ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH
k / n) to specify the frequency.
To adjust the frequency to a higher range, press h (or
k). To adjust it to the lower range, press l (or n).
The TUNED indicator on the front panel display
lights up when the tuner is tuned in to a station. The
STEREO indicator also lights up if the program being
broadcasted is in stereo.
The frequency changes in the following manner according
to how you press ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./
CH k / n).
When you press the key more than 1 second
The tuner searches the frequency of a station that is
detectable around the current frequency. This is effective
when the tuner can receive strong signals without any
interference. Once the search starts, release the key.
When you keep holding the key, the search continues even
when a station is detected. This is useful when you want to
tune in to a specific station.
When you press and release the key
The tuner increases or decreases the frequency in steps.
Use this method when the tuner cannot receive strong
signals and stations are skipped during the search. You can
listen to better quality sound even when the tuner cannot
receive a strong signal.
y
• You can switch between stereo and monaural for FM broadcast in the
option menu (see page 44).
4 To tune in by direct frequency tuning, enter
the frequency of the desired station using
the numeric keys on the remote control.
Enter only integers. For example, if you want to set
the frequency to 88.9 MHz, enter “889” using
tNumeric keys.
Notes
• When you press tNumeric keys during preset tuning, a
preset number is selected. Set tuning mode to normal tuning mode
using ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n) prior to
the operation.
• “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you
enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that the
entered frequency is correct.
You can register up to 40 FM/AM stations (Preset) using
“Automatic station preset” or “Manual station preset.”
The tuner automatically detects FM stations with strong
signals and registers up to 40 stations. AM stations cannot
be automatically registered. Use manual station preset.
1 Press OINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press
hTUNER) to switch the input source to
“TUNER.”
2 Press nOPTION on the remote control.
The option menu screen for setting options of tuner
input appears on the front panel display.
y
• For details on the option menu, see page 43.
• The option menu is displayed on monitor components.
3 Select “Auto Preset,” and press oENTER.
Automatic station preset starts about 5 seconds later
from the lowest frequency upwards.
y
• You can select the preset number at which the preset starts by
pressing iPRESET k / n or oCursor k / n while the front
panel display is in the state as shown in the below figure.
• To cancel registration, press oRETURN on the remote control.
FM/AM tuning
Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station
(Frequency tuning)
STEREO
TUNED
FM92.5MHz
Registering FM/AM stations and
tuning in (Preset tuning)
Registering stations by automatic station
preset
Auto Preset
30 En
FM/AM tuning
During the automatic station preset, the upper area of
the screen changes as follows: READY → SEARCH
→ MEMORY each time a station is registered.
When registration is complete, “FINISH” appears
and the option menu screen automatically reappears.
When you press nOPTION on the remote control,
the screen returns to the original state.
You can manually register AM stations or FM stations
with weak signals.
1 Tune in to a station referring to “Tuning in to
the desired FM/AM station (Frequency
tuning)” (see page 29).
2 Press FMEMORY (or iMEMORY).
“Manual Preset” appears on the front panel display,
followed soon by the preset number to which the
station will be registered.
y
• By pressing down FMEMORY (or iMEMORY) for more
than 2 seconds, you can skip step 3 and register the preset number
to be one higher than the last preset number.
3 Press GPRESET l / h (or iPRESET k / n)
on the remote control to select the preset
number to which the station will be
registered.
When you select a preset number to which no station
is registered, “Empty” appears on the display. When
you select a registered preset number, a registered
frequency is displayed on the right of the preset
number.
y
• You can select a preset number using the tNumeric keys.
4 Press FMEMORY (or iMEMORY) again to
register.
When registration is complete, the screen returns to
the original state.
y
• To cancel registration, press oRETURN on the remote control
or leave the tuner without any operations for about 30 seconds.
You can call preset stations registered by automatic station
preset or manual station preset.
Press GPRESET l / h (or iPRESET k / n) to
select a preset number.
y
• Preset numbers to which no stations are registered will be skipped.
• When “No Presets” or “No Presets in Memory” is displayed it means that
no stations are registered. See page 29 and register stations.
• You can directly select a preset number by pressing a tNumeric
keys while calling a preset station. “Empty” appears on the display if
you enter a preset number to which no station is registered. “Wrong
Num.” appears if you enter an invalid number.
• When you press tNumeric keys during normal tuning, a preset
number is selected. Set tuning mode to preset tuning mode using
GPRESET l / h (or iPRESET k / n) prior to the operation.
1 Press OINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press
hTUNER) to switch the input source to
“TUNER.”
2 Press nOPTION on the remote control.
The option menu screen for setting options of tuner
input appears on the front panel display.
3 Display “Clear Preset” using the oCursor k
/ n and press oENTER.
The following screen appears on the display.
y
• You can cancel the operation and return to the option menu screen
by pressing oRETURN on the remote control.
4 Select the preset number of the registered
station you want to clear using the oCursor
k / n and press oENTER.
The preset station registered to the selected preset
number is cleared. To clear the registration of
multiple preset numbers, repeat the above steps.
To end the operation, press nOPTION.
Registering stations by manual station
preset
01:FM87.5MHz
Preset number Frequency
Status
01:Empty
Flashing
New registered frequency
Empty (or frequency that is currently
registered to the preset number)
Preset
number
Calling a preset station (Preset tuning)
Clearing the preset station
01:FM92.5MHz
Preset number of the registered station you want to clear.
31 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Listening to Satellite Radio
To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect either a SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to your
satellite-ready receiver. Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US (except Alaska and Hawaii).
Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free music from categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country, R&B,
Dance, Jazz, Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional and college sports including play by play
games from select leagues and teams. Additional programming includes expert sports talk, uncensored entertainment,
comedy, family programming, local traffic and weather and news from your most trusted sources.
Whether you purchase a SIRIUS or XM tuner, you’ll need to activate and subscribe to begin enjoying the service. Easy to
follow installation and setup instructions are provided with the satellite tuners. Whichever service you choose, there are a
variety of programming packages available, including the option of adding “The Best of SIRIUS” programming to your
XM tuner or “The Best of XM” programming to your SIRIUS tuner, enabling you to enjoy the most popular
programming among both services. The “Best of” packages are not available to SIRIUS or XM Canada subscribers at
this time. Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for
children.
To subscribe to XM, U.S. customers should visit xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346).
To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. customers can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit sirius.com (US).
Connect XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home
Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of
this unit. For details, see the operating instructions
provided with the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock.
y
• To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM
Mini-Tuner Home Dock must be placed at or near a southerly facing
window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors
or outdoors. Use the “Antenna” information on the front panel display or
on the OSD screen (see page 34) to check the antenna reception level and
adjust the orientation of the antenna.
Notes
• If “CHECK ANTENNA,” “CHECK XM TUNER” or “NO SIGNAL”
appears on the front panel display, the connection and setting of the
antenna, XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, or XM Mini-Tuner may not be
correct.
• When “UPGRADE XM TUNER” is displayed, it means that the
connected antenna is old. See page 65 for details.
Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock,
inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM Mini-
Tuner Home Dock to your XM Ready® home audio
system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to
subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There
are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID:
on the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package,
and on XM Channel 0. Record the XM Radio ID in the
following eight squares for reference.
Note
• The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I,” “O,” “S” or “F.” Activate
your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http://
activate.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346). You
will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to
activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15
minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM
Ready home audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the
full lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done.
XM
®
Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)
SIRIUS XM Radio Legal
SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other
marks and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. SIRIUS and XM subscriptions sold
separately. Taxes and a one-time activation fee may apply. XM tuners and home docks or SIRIUS tuners (each sold
separately) are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio service. All programming and fees subject to
change. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make
available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio
Systems. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii.
Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock
XM
S
IRIUS
D
OC
K
CO
MP
O
NENT
VIDE
O
P
R
XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock
(sold separately)
Activating XM Satellite Radio
32 En
XM
®
Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)
1 Press the OINPUT l / h (or press hXM) to
select “XM” as the input source.
The XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel
number, channel name, category, artist name, or song
title) for the currently selected channel appears on the
front panel display and video monitor (see page 34).
y
• When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit automatically
recalls the previously selected channel.
Note
• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel
display or on the OSD, see “XM Satellite Radio” (see page 65).
2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM
Satellite Radio search modes.
• To select a channel from the all channel list, see
“All Channel Search mode” on this page.
• To select a channel by category, see “Category
Search mode” on this page.
• To select the desired channel directly by entering
the channel number, see “Direct number access
mode” on this page.
• To select a channel from the preset channels, see
“Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)”
(page 33).
y
• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information on the front
panel display or in the video monitor (see page 34).
• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see page 33).
■ All Channel Search mode
Press ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k /
n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all
channels.
y
• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n).
• You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing
HCATEGORY l / h (or iCATEGORY l / h).
■ Category Search mode
1 Press HCATEGORY l / h (or
iCATEGORY l / h) to select the channel
category.
“CAT” is displayed on the front panel display during
the channel category selection. When you select the
category, the first channel in the category is selected.
Note
• If you don’t operate within 10 seconds, the category search mode
returns to “ALL (All Channel Search).”
2 While “CAT” is displayed on the front panel
display, press ITUNING/CH l / h (or
iTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a
channel within the selected channel
category.
y
• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n).
Note
• This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel
Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is
not malfunction of this unit):
– the channel is out of service.
– you do not subscribe to the channel.
■ Direct number access mode
Press the tNumeric keys to enter the desired
three-digit channel number.
For example, to enter the number 123, press the
tNumeric keys as “1,” “2” and “3.”
y
• To display the Radio ID number displayed on the front panel display,
select channel “0.”
• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the tNumeric
keys on the remote control and then press tENT to confirm the input
number.
• Instead of pressing tENT to tune into the channel immediately, you
can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel
number.
• If no key is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or
two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel
number.
• If the selected channel is not available, an advisory message may appear.
For details, see “XM satellite radio” on page 65.
• If you operate tNumeric keys in preset search mode (see next
page), a preset number is selected. If you want to directly select a channel
number, press ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n) to
switch to All Channel Search mode and enter the number.
XM Satellite Radio
®
operations
001Preview
XM
Search mode
Channel number Channel name
00880's
XM
Pop
XM
Category
search mode
The first channel in the category
Category name
33 En
XM
®
Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite
Radio channels. You can then recall any preset channel
easily by selecting the preset channel as described in
“Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)” on this
page.
1 Search a channel you want to set as a preset
channel in one of the XM Satellite Radio
search modes.
For details, see “XM Satellite Radio operations” (see
page 32).
2 Press FMEMORY (or iMEMORY).
The indicator on the front panel display changes as
follows.
y
• To store the selected channel under an empty preset number
automatically, press and hold FMEMORY (or iMEMORY)
for more than 2 seconds instead of step 2. In this case, the
following steps are unnecessary.
• To cancel the preset operation, press oRETURN.
3 Press GPRESET l / h (or iPRESET k / n)
to select the stored preset station number.
Note
• You can also select a preset number by pressing the tNumeric
keys.
4 Press FMEMORY (or iMEMORY).
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search
mode, you must preset XM channels. For details, see
“Registering preset channels” on this page.
Press GPRESET l / h (or iPRESET k / n)
repeatedly to change the preset channel number
(1 to 40).
y
• You can directly select a preset number by pressing a tNumeric
keys while calling a preset channel.
You can clear the assignments of preset XM Satellite
Radio channels.
1 Press nOPTION on the remote control.
The option menu is displayed on the front panel
display.
2 Press oCursor n repeatedly to select “Clear
Preset” and then press oENTER.
3 Press oCursor k / n to select the preset
station number that you want to clear.
4 Press oENTER to execute the clearing of
the selected preset channel.
To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers,
repeat the above steps. To end the operation, press
nOPTION.
Registering XM Satellite Radio
channels
Registering preset channels
00880's
XM
P01:---<<008
XM
Currently registered channel number
(or “---” if empty)
Channel number to be
registered
Preset number to which new
channel number is registered
Calling a preset channel (Preset Search
mode)
Clearing preset channels
00880's
XM
Preset channel number
008 80's
XM
34 En
XM
®
Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only)
Use this feature to display the XM Satellite Radio
information on the front panel display or on the OSD.
Note
• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display
or video monitor, see “XM Satellite Radio” (see page 65).
■ Front panel display
Press EINFO (or jINFO) repeatedly to toggle
the following XM Satellite Radio information
display modes.
Back to “Channel”
Front Panel Display (example)
y
• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be
recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space.
• When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears.
■ Video monitor (OSD)
Press qDISPLAY on the remote control to turn
on or off the information display.
The following information is displayed on the OSD.
a Search mode (see page 32)
b Channel category
c Song title
d Antenna reception level
e Channel number/name
f Artist name
y
• To turn off the OSD, press qDISPLAY.
• You can hold the music information screen or release it by oENTER.
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio™
information
Channel
Channel number, channel name
Category
Channel category, channel number
Artist / Song
Artist name, song title, channel number
Antenna
Antenna reception level, channel number
DSP Program
Current sound field program (see page 25)
Audio Decoder
Current Audio Decoder (see page 27)
Antenna
XM
XMANT:
AllCHSearch
008:'80s
:Decades
:Sanumemo
:RoadtoIndia
a
b
d
e
f
c
35 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the
SIRIUS jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see
the operating instructions provided with the SiriusConnect
tuner.
y
• To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals, the
antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed at or near a window
with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The orientation of the antenna for
the best reception differs depending on the area. Refer to the instruction
manuals supplied with the SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the
antenna. You can mount it indoors or outdoors.
• Use the “Antenna” information in the front panel or “SIRIUS
Information” screen in the video monitor (see page 39) to check the
antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of the antenna.
• You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet.
Notes
• If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears on the front
panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner or antenna is
incorrect. In such cases, check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner
and the antenna.
• If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears on the front panel display, this unit does
not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner.
Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you need
to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To
activate the subscription you need the Sirius ID which is
uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is
12-digit number and it appears on the package of the
SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect
tuner, and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channel “0” (see below).
1 Press the OINPUT l / h (or press
hSIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input
source.
2 Press t0 and then tENT to display the
Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner.
“000 Sirius ID” and “xxxxxxxxxxxx”
(“xxxxxxxxxxxx” indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of
your SiriusConnect tuner) appears alternately on the
front panel display.
Write the Sirius ID below.
ID:________________________________________
3 Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate
your subscription.
y
• Status messages appear on the front panel display or OSD during
the activation. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (see
page 66). Once the activation is finished, “SUB UPDATED”
appears.
1 Press the OINPUT l / h (or press
hSIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input
source.
The cursor on the left of the SIRIUS indicator lights
up on the front panel display and the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio information (such as channel number, channel
name, category, artist name, or song title) for the
currently selected channel appears on the front panel
display.
y
• When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit
automatically recalls the previously selected channel.
Notes
• When you have not activated your subscription yet, you can only
select “184” or “000.”
• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel
display or on the OSD, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (see
page 66).
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)
Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner
Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™
subscription
SIRIUS
D
C
5
V
A
N
T
SiriusConnect Tuner and the antenna
(sold separately)
To the AC wall outlet
Displaying the Sirius ID of your
SiriusConnect tuner
SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information
Contact for activation
URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/
Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations
184Weather
SIRIUS
Search mode
Channel number Channel name
36 En
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)
2 Search for a channel by using one of the
SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes.
• To select a channel from the all channel list, see
“All Channel Search mode” on this page.
• To select a channel by category, see “Category
Search mode” on this page.
• To select the desired channel directly by entering
the channel number, see “Direct number access
mode” on this page.
• To select a channel from the preset channels, see
“Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)”
(page 37).
y
• You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information on the
front panel display or in the video monitor (see page 39).
• If you tune into a channel that you do not subscribe, “CALL
SIRIUS on the front panel display” or “CALL 888-539-SIRIUS
TO SUBSCRIBE on the OSD” appears.
• You can set the SIRIUS Satellite Radio preset channels (see
page 37).
■ All Channel Search mode
Press ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k /
n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all
channels.
y
• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n).
• You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing
HCATEGORY l / h (or iCATEGORY l / h).
■ Category Search mode
1 Press HCATEGORY l / h (or
iCATEGORY l / h) to select the channel
category.
“CAT” is displayed on the front panel display during
channel category selection. When you select the
category, the first channel in the category is selected.
Note
• If you don’t operate within 10 seconds, the category search mode
returns to “ALL (All Channel Search).”
2 While “CAT” is displayed on the front panel
display, press ITUNING/CH l / h (or
iTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a
channel within the selected channel
category.
y
• You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding
ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n).
Note
• This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel
Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is
not malfunction of this unit):
– the channel is locked (see page 38).
– the channel is out of service.
– you do not subscribe to the channel.
■ Direct number access mode
Press the tNumeric keys to enter the desired
three-digit channel number.
For example, to enter the number 123, press the
tNumeric keys as “1,” “2” and “3.”
y
• To display the Sirius ID number displayed on the front panel display,
select channel “0.”
• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the tNumeric
keys on the remote control and then press tENT to confirm the input
number.
• Instead of pressing tENT to tune into the channel immediately, you
can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel
number.
• If no key is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or
two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel
number.
• If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:___” appears on the front panel
display. Enter the four-digit Parental Lock code number by using the
tNumeric keys or press tENT to cancel (see page 38).
• If the selected channel is not available, an advisory message may appear.
For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” on page 66.
• If you operate tNumeric keys in preset search mode (see next
page), a preset number is selected. If you want to directly select a channel
number, press ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n) to
switch to All Channel Search mode and enter the number.
001Hits1
SIRIUS
Pop
SIRIUS
Category
search mode
The first channel in the category
Category name
37 En
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite
Radio channels. You can then recall any preset channel
easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as
described in “Calling a preset channel (Preset Search
mode)” on this page.
1 Search a channel you want to set as a preset
channel in one of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
search modes.
For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio operations”
(see page 35).
2 Press FMEMORY (or iMEMORY).
The indicator on the front panel display changes as
follows.
y
• To store the selected channel under an empty preset number
automatically, press and hold FMEMORY (or iMEMORY)
for more than 2 seconds instead of step 2. In this case, the
following steps are unnecessary.
• To cancel the preset operation, press oRETURN.
3 Press GPRESET l / h (or iPRESET k / n)
to select the stored preset station number.
Notes
• You can also select a preset number by pressing the tNumeric
keys.
• If you select a preset number being used (“*” appears next to the
preset number), the current preset channel will be overwritten.
4 Press FMEMORY (or iMEMORY).
The selected channel is stored as a preset channel.
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search
mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. For details, see
“Registering preset channels” on this page.
Press GPRESET l / h (or iPRESET k / n)
repeatedly to change the preset channel number
(1 to 40).
You can clear the assignments of preset SIRIUS Satellite
Radio channels.
1 Press nOPTION on the remote control.
The option menu is displayed on the front panel
display.
2 Press oCursor n repeatedly to select “Clear
Preset” and then press oENTER.
3 Press oCursor k / n to select the preset
station number that you want to clear.
4 Press oENTER to execute the clearing of
the selected preset channel.
To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers,
repeat the above steps. To end the operation, press
nOPTION.
Registering the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio™ channels
Registering preset channels
001Hits1
SIRIUS
P01:---<<001
SIRIUS
Currently registered channel number
(or “---” if empty)
Channel number to be
registered
Preset number to which new
channel number is registered
Calling a preset channel (Preset Search
mode)
Clearing preset channels
001Hits1
SIRIUS
001 Hits 1
SIRIUS
38 En
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)
You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access
to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. This unit
automatically skips the locked channels when this unit is
in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode
and you search a channel by pressing ITUNING/CH
l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n).
Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number
(PIN) and select the channels to be locked.
1 Press nOPTION on the remote control.
The option menu is displayed on the front panel
display and video monitor.
2 Press oCursor n repeatedly to select
“Parental Lock” and then press oENTER.
3 Enter the desired 4-digit code number by
using the oCursor k / n l / h.
If you have entered a code number before, enter the
same code number.
4 Press oENTER twice to confirm the code
number.
A confirmation screen appears with the first press.
When you press again, “OK” and then the SIRIUS
Satellite Radio channel list appears.
Note
• If a code number is already registered and you enter the different
number, “Wrong” appears and the screen returns to step 3. Enter
the correct code number.
5 Press oCursor l / h to select a category of
that channel and a channel you want to lock.
6 Press oCursor k / n to select a channel you
want to lock.
Notes
• You can also select a channel by using iCATEGORY l / h or
iTUN./CH k / n.
• While the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen is displayed,
sound of the selected channel is output even the channel is locked.
7 Press oENTER to lock the selected
channel.
A check mark appears next to the locked channel on
the video monitor. You can toggle channel lock and
unlock as you press oENTER.
8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 to lock all the
desired channels.
9 Press oRETURN repeatedly to exit the
“PARENTAL LOCK” screen.
This unit is tuned into the last channel you select in
the “PARENTAL LOCK” screen. If the channel is
locked, this unit is tuned into “184 SIRIUS Weather
& Emergency” or “000 Sirius ID.”
y
• If you forget the Parental lock code or want to change it, reset it using
“SR PIN” (see page 60).
If you want to tune in the locked channels, set this unit to
Direct number access mode or preset tuning mode. When
you tune into the locked channel, “LOCKED” appears on
the front panel display and video monitor, followed by the
following message. Enter the set Parental lock code by
using the tNumeric keys. To cancel this operation,
press tENT.
Note
• If an incorrect number is entered, “Wrong” appears on the front panel
display or the video monitor and this unit is tuned into the previously
selected channel.
Setting the Parental Lock
Setting the code number and the locking
channels
The entered code number is needed for tuning in the
channel or unlocking the channel. Write it down the
space provided below.
Code number: ________________________________
PARENTALLOCK
CAT:Pop1/3
[ENTER]:Lock/Unlock
002:TheBlend
003:SiriusXMLove
004:The40son4
[]/[]:Channel
005:The50son5
[]/[]:Category
[
[
001:SiriusHits1
p[
Channel
category
Page number in the category
Tuning into the locked channels
PARENTALLOCK
CAT:Pop1/3
[ENTER]:Lock/Unlock
002:TheBlend
003:SiriusXMLove
004:The40son4
[]/[]:Channel
005:The50son5
[]/[]:Category
[
[
001:SiriusHits1
p[
Locked channel
PIN:
39 En
SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use this feature to display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
information on the front panel display or on the OSD.
Note
• If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display
or video monitor, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (see page 66).
■ Front panel display
Press EINFO (or jINFO) repeatedly to toggle
the following SIRIUS Satellite Radio information
display modes.
Back to “Channel”
Front Panel Display (example)
y
• If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character that
cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a
space.
• When the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner cannot receive the signals,
“ACQUIRING” appears on the front panel display.
• When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears.
■ Video monitor (OSD)
Press qDISPLAY on the remote control to turn
on or off the information display.
The following information is displayed on the OSD.
a Search mode (see page 35)
b Channel category
c Song title
d Antenna reception level
e Channel number/name
f Artist name
g Composer name
y
• To turn off the OSD, press qDISPLAY.
• You can hold the music information screen or release it by oENTER.
Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite
Radio™ information
Channel
Channel number, channel name
Category
Channel category, channel number
Artist/Song
Artist name, song title, channel number
Composer
Composer name, channel number
Antenna
Antenna reception level, channel number
DSP Program
Current sound field program (see page 25)
Audio Decoder
Current Audio Decoder (see page 27)
Antenna
SIRIUS
SIRIUS ANT:
AllCHSearch
001:SIRIUSHits1
:Pop
:Sanumemo
:RoadtoIndia
C:FrankieZipper
a
b
d
e
f
c
g
40 En
Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-11, sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit (see page 17), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied
remote control or the menu displayed on the video monitor. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of
this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see
page 27).
Notes
• iPod touch, iPod (Click and Wheel including iPod classic), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
• Some features may not be available depending on the model of Yamaha iPod universal dock. The following sections describe the procedure when using
the YDS-11.
y
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears on the front panel display.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display and on the video monitor, see the “iPod” section on page 68.
You can control your iPod when you set it in the iPod
universal dock and switch the input source to DOCK. The
operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the
video display (menu browse mode) or without it (simple
remote mode).
When you connect your iPod to this unit, you can perform
the following operations with the remote control.
You can perform basic iPod operations (play, stop, skip,
etc.) using the supplied remote control without displaying
the menu on the video monitor. You can also directly
control your iPod in this mode.
You can perform advanced iPod operations using the
remote control while looking at the menu displayed on the
video monitor. You can browse the song files or video files
stored on your iPod and displayed on the monitor. You
cannot directly control your iPod in this mode.
y
• “_”(underscore) is displayed for characters that this unit cannot display.
1 Change the input source to “iPod (DOCK)”
using OINPUT l / h (or hDOCK).
2 Press qDISPLAY on the remote control.
The following screen appears on the video monitor.
3 Press oCursor k / n to select “Music” or
“Videos” and press oCursor h.
• Select “Music” to browse music files.
• Select “Videos” to browse video files.
Note
• “Videos” will not be displayed when your iPod or Yamaha iPod
universal dock do not support the browser function for browsing
video files.
Using iPod™
Controlling iPod™
Key Function
o
ENTER Subsequent menu
k Menu up
n Menu down
l Previous menu
h Subsequent menu
s
w Search backward (Press and hold)
f Search forward (Press and hold)
a Skip forward
b Skip backward
s Stop
e
Pause (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
p
Play (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
q DISPLAY
Switch between Menu browse mode and
Simple remote mode
Controlling iPod in simple remote mode
Controlling iPod in menu browse mode
iPodTop
Videos>
Music>
41 En
Using iPod™
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
4 Press oCursor k / n / l / h to select a
menu item and then oENTER to start
playback.
Menu items of “Music”
Playlists, Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres, Composers
• Playlists > Songs
• Artists > Albums > Songs
• Albums > Songs
• Songs
• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs
• Composers > Albums > Songs
Menu items of “Videos”
Menu items vary depending on the files stored on your
iPod.
■ Description of the play information display
a Track number/total tracks
b Artist name
c Album title
d Song title
e Progress bar
f Elapsed time
g Shuffle and repeat icons
h (playback), (pausing), (search forward) and
(search backward)
i Remaining time
y
• You can change information screens on the front panel display using
EINFO (or jINFO) (see page 24). Items displayed on the front panel
display vary depending on mode that is currently selected.
You can use a special playback function such as shuffle
playback and repeat playback by setting the option menu.
1 Press qDISPLAY to switch to menu browse
mode while “DOCK” is selected as the input
source.
The option menu can be displayed only in menu
browse mode. Press qDISPLAY to switch to menu
browse mode before starting shuffle or repeat
playback.
2 Press nOPTION.
The option menu is displayed.
3 Press oCursor k / n to select the desired
playback function, Shuffle or Repeat, then
press oENTER.
The following playback styles are available
depending on the playback function selected.
Shuffle: Plays back songs or albums in random
order (Choices: Off, Songs, Albums).
• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in
random order.
• Select “Songs” to play back songs in random order.
• Select “Albums” to play back albums in random
order.
Repeat: Plays back songs or albums repeatedly
(Choices: Off, One, All).
• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back
repeatedly.
• Select “One” to repeat each song.
• Select “All” to repeat all songs.
4 Select the desired style using oCursor l /
h.
The style is selected. Playback starts with the
function selected in step 2.
To return to the previous screen, press oRETURN.
To return to the previous playback function, redo the
above steps.
y
• When the shuffle function is on, “ ” appears on the video monitor.
• When “Repeat” is set to “One” or “All,” “ ” or “ ” appears on the
video monitor.
iPod[Play]
1/9
FrankieZipper
Made-to-order
RoadtoIndia
|||||;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;
0:51-7:44
All
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Shuffle/repeat playback
1 All
42 En
You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of
this unit and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without
wiring between this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “Pairing” the connected Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver and your Bluetooth component in advance.
Note
• This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of the Bluetooth profile.
“Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a Bluetooth
component for Bluetooth communications. Pairing must
be performed when using a Bluetooth component with the
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connected to this unit
for the first time or if the pairing data has been deleted.
y
• You only need the pairing operation for the first time that you use the
Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
• Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other component with
which Bluetooth communications are to be established. If necessary,
refer to the other component’s operating instructions.
■ Pairing the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
and your Bluetooth component
1 Change the input source to “DOCK” using
OINPUT l / h (or hDOCK).
2 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want
to pair with and set it to pairing mode.
For details on operation of the Bluetooth component,
refer to its operating instructions.
3 Press nOPTION.
The option menu for DOCK input appears on the
video monitor.
4 Press oCursor n to select “Pairing” and
press oENTER.
“Searching” appears on the front panel display and
the pairing operation starts.
y
• To cancel pairing, press oRETURN.
• You can also start pairing operation by pressing and holding
FMEMORY on the front panel.
5 Make sure the Bluetooth component
recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver.
If the Bluetooth have recognized the Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver, “YBA-10 YAMAHA,” for
instance, is displayed in the Bluetooth device list.
6 Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
from the Bluetooth device list, and enter a
path key “0000” into the Bluetooth
component.
When pairing is complete, “Completed” appears on
the front panel display.
y
• The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be paired with up to
eight Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully
with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the pairing data
for the least recently used other component is cleared.
1 Change the input source to “DOCK” using
OINPUT l / h (or hDOCK).
2 Press nOPTION.
3 Press oCursor n repeatedly to select
“Connect” and press oENTER.
After you execute “Connect,” communication with
the Bluetooth component is established. When the
connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
recognizes the Bluetooth component, “BT
Connected” appears on the front panel display.
y
• When you press oENTER on the remote control, the connected
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver searches and connects to the last
connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found”
appears on the front panel display.
• To disconnect the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from the
Bluetooth component, display the option menu again, select
“Disconnect,” and press oENTER.
4 Start playback of the Bluetooth component.
Using Bluetooth™ components
Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio
receiver and your Bluetooth™
component
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for
the pairing operation. You are recommended to read
and fully understand all the instructions before starting.
DOCKOPTION
Connect
.VolumeTrim
[ENTER]:Select
Pairing
[]/[]:Up/Down
[
[
Playback of the Bluetooth™
component
43 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
This unit has an OPTION menu of frequently used menu items for input sources compatible with this unit. The procedure
for setting the OPTION menu items is described below.
1 Select an input source using OINPUT l / h
(or hInput selection keys).
2 Press nOPTION on the remote control.
The OPTION menu appears. The displayed OPTION
menu items differ depending on the input source. For
details, see the following section.
3 Select the desired menu item using
oCursor k / n, and press oENTER.
Parameters of the selected menu item are displayed.
4 Change the setting of the selected menu item
(or enable a function) using oCursor k / n /
l / h and oENTER.
Details of the selected menu item are displayed.
Parameters you can set differ depending on the menu
items.
5 To close the OPTION menu, press
nOPTION.
You can also use oRETURN to return to the
previous screen or close the OPTION menu.
y
• When oCursor or other keys do not work after completing the
menu, select the input source again using hInput selection
keys.
The following menu items are provided for each input
source.
Details of the menu items are as follows:
y
• The default settings are marked with “*.”
■ Volume Trim
Reduces any change in volume when switching input
sources by correcting volume differences between input
sources.
You can set this parameter for each input source.
Setting the option menu for each input source (OPTION menu)
HDMI1OPTION
DecoderMode
.VolumeTrim
[ENTER]:Select
ExtendedSurround
SignalInfo
[]/[]:Up/Down
[
[
OPTION menu items
Input
Source
Menu item
HDMI1-4 Volume
Trim
Decoder
Mode
Extended
Surround
Signal Info
AV1-4 Volume
Trim
Decoder
Mode
Extended
Surround
Signal Info
AV5-6 Volume
Trim
AUDIO1-2 Volume
Trim
V-AUX Volume
Trim
TUNER Volume
Trim
FM Mode Auto
Preset
Clear
Preset
XM Volume
Trim
Clear
Preset
SIRIUS Volume
Trim
Parental
Lock
Clear
Preset
iPod
(DOCK)
Vo l u m e
Trim
Shuffle Repeat
Bluetooth
(DOCK)
Vo l u m e
Trim
Connect/
Disconnect
Pairing
MULTI
CH
Vo l u m e
Trim
Video Out
Input source: All
Adjustable range: -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB* to +6.0 dB
(in 0.5 dB steps)
44 En
Setting the option menu for each input source (OPTION menu)
■ Decoder Mode
Selects DTS digital audio signals for reproduction.
■ Extended Surround
Selects whether to reproduce multi-channel input signals
in 6.1- or 7.1-channel when surround back speakers are
used.
■ Signal Info
Displays information on audio and video signals on the
video monitor and front panel display. You can change
items to be displayed using oCursor k / n.
■ Audio information
Notes
• “No Signal” is displayed when no signals are input and “---” is displayed
when signals that this unit cannot recognize are input.
• The bit rate may vary during playback.
■ Video information
HDMI error message
(appears only when an error has occurred)
■ FM Mode
Sets FM broadcasting receiving mode.
Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4
Choices: Auto*/DTS
Auto Automatically selects audio input signals.
DTS Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals
are not reproduced.
Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4
Choices: Auto*/PLIIxMovie/PLIIxMusic/EX/ES/
Off
Auto Automatically selects the most suitable
decoder according to whether a flag for
reproducing surround back channel is present,
and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1-
channel.
PLIIx
Movie
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-
channel using the PLIIxMovie decoder
whether or not surround back channel signals
are contained. You can select this parameter
when one or two speakers are connected.
PLIIx
Music
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1-
channel using the PLIIxMusic decoder whether
or not surround back channel signals are
contained. You can select this parameter when
one or two speakers are connected.
EX/ES Automatically selects the most suitable
decoder for input signals whether or not the
flag for reproducing surround back channel is
present, and always reproduces signals in 6.1-
channel.
Off Always reproduces signals in 5.1-channel
whether or not the flag for reproducing
surround back channel is present.
Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4
Signal Info parameters
Information Description
Format
Format of digital audio signals.
Channel
The number of input signal channels (front/
surround/LFE).
For example, if input signal channels are 3
front channels, 2 surrounds and LFE, “3/2/
0.1” is displayed.
If a channel that cannot be expressed as the
above, a total number of channels such as
“5.1ch” may be displayed.
Sampling
The sampling frequency of digital input
signal.
Bitrate
The bit rate of input signal per second.
Information Description
In
Format and resolution of video input signal.
Out
Format and resolution of video output signal.
Message
Error messages about HDMI signals and
HDMI components. See the following for
details of the error messages.
HDCP Error
HDCP authentication failed.
Device Over
The number of HDMI components connected is
over the limit.
Out of Res.
The connected monitor is not compatible with
the video input signal.
Input source: TUNER
Choices: Stereo*/Mono
Stereo Receives in stereo mode.
Mono Receives in monaural mode. You can get a
better reception in Mono mode.
45 En
Setting the option menu for each input source (OPTION menu)
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Auto Preset
Automatically detects radio stations in the FM frequency
band and registers them as preset stations (see page 29).
■
Clear Preset
When TUNER is selected:See page 30.
When XM is selected: See page 33.
When SIRIUS is selected: See page 37.
■
Parental Lock
Set the Parental Lock (see page 38).
■
Shuffle
Changes the shuffle playback style (see page 41).
■
Repeat
Changes the repeat playback style (see page 41).
■
Connect / Disconnect
Switches communication with a Bluetooth component on
and off (see page 42).
■
Pairing
Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component
(see page 42).
■
Video Out
When the multi-channel input is selected, an input signal
input from another terminal is outputted to the video
monitor. See “Outputting a video signal input from
another input source during reproducing a multi-channel
audio signal” on this page.
When “MULTI” is selected as the input source, a video
signal input from another terminal can be output to the
video monitor. For example, even if an audio and video
component such as a DVD player that does not support a
multi-channel digital audio output, the video signal can be
output to the video monitor while reproducing a multi-
channel analog audio signal.
1 Press OINPUT l / h (or hMULTI) to
change the input source to “MULTI CH.”
2 Press nOPTION on the remote control.
The OPTION menu appears.
3 Press oCursor k / n to display “Video,” and
press oENTER.
4 Press oCursor l / h to select a video input
terminal from the following to input a video
signal that is output to the video monitor
during reproducing a multi-channel audio
signal.
– AV1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO terminal)
– AV3-6 (COMPOSIT terminal)
– V-AUX (COMPOSIT terminal)
– Off (no video output)
5 To end the setting, press nOPTION.
Input source: TUNER
Input source: TUNER, XM, SIRIUS
Input source: SIRIUS
Input source: iPod (DOCK)
Choices: Off*/Songs/Albums
Input source: iPod (DOCK)
Choices: Off*/One/All
Input source: Bluetooth (DOCK)
Input source: Bluetooth (DOCK)
Input source: MULTI CH
Choices: AV1 to 6/V-AUX/Off*
Outputting a video signal input from
another input source during
reproducing a multi-channel audio
signal
Video;;;;;;AV1
46 En
When using sound field programs for movies or TV
programs, you can select a surround decoder to be used
with the sound field program after setting the parameters
from the following decoders. To set the parameters for
sound field programs, see the following section.
Decoders that can be used with a sound field
program
• PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie)
• Neo:6 Cinema
Note
• The following MOVIE sound field programs cannot be used with a
surround decoder.
– Mono Movie
– Sports
– Action Game
– Roleplaying Game
Although the field sound programs would satisfy you as
they are with the default parameters, you can arrange
sound effect or decoders suitable for acoustical conditions
of sources or rooms by setting the parameters (sound field
elements).
y
• You can protect the sound field against the changes of parameters the
sound filed parameters when “Memory Guard” of the setup menu is set
to “On” (see page 56). To change the parameters, set it to “Off.”
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press mSETUP on the remote control.
The setup menu appears on the monitor.
3 Press oCursor k / n to select “DSP
Parameter” and press oENTER.
The screen changes as follows.
4 Press oCursor k / n to move “→” to the
sound field program and press oCursor l /
h to select the sound field program.
5 Press oCursor k / n to select the parameter
that you want to change, and press oCursor
l / h to change the parameter.
An asterisk (*) appears on the left of the sound field
parameter name displayed on the monitor when you
change the parameter from its default setting. For
details on functions and adjustable ranges of the
sound field parameters, see “Sound field parameters”
on this page.
y
• Repeat steps 4 and 5 to change other sound field program
parameters.
• A complete list of the parameters of some sound field programs
may exceed one page. In this case, press oCursor k / n to scroll
through pages.
6 To end the edit, press mSETUP.
y
• The default settings are marked with “*.”
DSP Level
Fine adjusts an effect level (level of the sound field effect
to be added). You can adjust the level of the sound field
effect while checking sound levels. Adjust “DSP Level” as
follows.
• The effect sound is too soft.
• There are no differences between effects of the sound
field programs.
→Increase the effect level.
• The sound is dull.
• The sound field effect is added too much.
→Reduce the effect level.
Editing surround decoders/sound field programs
Selecting a decoder used with a sound
field program
Setting sound field parameters
MOVIE1/2
3DDSP;;;;;;;;;ON
.Sci-Fi
SUR.;;;;PLI
[]/[]:Select
DSPLevel;;;;;0dB
S.Init.DLY;;;;2ms
p
[
P.Init.Dly;;;16ms
P.RoomSize;;;1.0
Movie
I
Sound field program
Sound field parameters
Cursor
Set values
To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field
program, oCursor n repeatedly to select “Initialize”
and then press, oCursor h. When the confirmation
screen appears on the monitor, press oCursor h to
confirm the initialization or oCursor l to cancel it.
Sound field parameters
CINEMA DSP basic parameters
Adjustable range: -6 dB to 0 dB* to +3 dB
47 En
Editing surround decoders/sound field programs
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Dialog Lift
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the
dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is
at the center of the video monitor screen.
If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video
monitor screen, increase the value of “Dialog Lift.”
When the value is set to zero, the position is at the lowest.
The position gets higher as you increase the value.
Notes
• “Dialog Lift” is displayed only when the presence speakers are available.
• You cannot the move the dialogue position loser than the default setting.
■ Parameter for CINEMA DSP 3D
3D DSP
When CINEMA DSP 3D is enabled, sets whether to use
sound field programs in 3D mode.
Note
• When the presence speakers are not used, the 3D DSP parameters are not
displayed.
■ Parameters for adjusting early-reflected
sound
Adjusts attenuation characteristics of early-reflected
sound. You can create a lively sound field (with a high
reverberant sound level) as you increase the value, and a
dead sound field (with a low reverberant sound level) as
you decrease the value. Creating either a lively sound field
or a dead sound field in an actual music hall is determined
by the acoustic absorption characteristics of reflection
surfaces. A dead sound field is created when the
attenuation time is short while a lively sound field is
created when the attenuation time is long.
y
• We recommend that you adjust the size of corresponding sound field
when you adjust the delay time.
■ Parameters for specifying room size
Produces different senses of sound expansion according to
room sizes specified. In a large size room such as a music
hall, the duration from when reflected sound is heard until
when the next reflected sound is heard is long. Thus,
different senses of sound expansion can be created by
changing the duration. 1.0 is the original room size. When
this parameter is set to 2.0, each side of the room is
defined as twice larger than the original room size.
Choices: 0* to 5
Sound field parameters for the advanced
configurations
Choices: On* / Off
Parameter Adjustable range
Init.Dly
P.Init.Dly
S.Init.Dly
SB Init.Dly
1 to 99ms
1 to 99ms
1 to 49ms
1 to 49ms
The ideal dialogue
position
Move up to the ideal
dialogue position
Parameter Adjustable range
Room Size,
P.Room Size,
S.Room Size,
SB Room Size
0.1 to 2.0
Delay
Time
Level
Delay
Time
Level
Early-reflected
sound
Original source sound
Sound source
Reflecting
surface
Small = 1ms Large = 99ms
48 En
Editing surround decoders/sound field programs
■ Parameters for defining attenuation
characteristics of early-reflected sound
Adjusts the attenuation of reflected sound. You can create
a lively sound field (with a high reverberant sound level)
as you increase the value, and a dead sound field (with a
low reverberant sound level) as you decrease the value.
Creating either a lively sound field or a dead sound field in
an actual music hall is determined by the acoustic
absorption characteristics of reflection surfaces. A dead
sound field is created when the attenuation time is short
while a lively sound field is created when the attenuation
time is long.
■ Parameters for adjusting reverberant sound
Rev.Time parameter adjusts the attenuation time of the
rear reverberant sound based on the time that about 1kHz
reverberant sound takes for 60dB of attenuation.
Reverberant sound attenuates faster as you decrease the
value. Rev.Time adjustment allows you to create a natural
reverberant sound, by setting the attenuation time longer
for a sound source or room with less echo, or shorter for a
sound source or room with more echo.
Rev.Delay parameter adjusts the time difference between
the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the
reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the
reverberation sound begins. Increasing the value of
Rev.Delay allows you to create a reverberant sound in a
wider area for the same Rev.Time.
Parameter Adjustable range
Liveness
S.Liveness
SB Liveness
0 to 10
0 to 10
0 to 10
Parameter Adjustable range
Rev.Time
Rev.Delay
Rev.Level
1.0 to 5.0s
0 to 250ms
0 to 100%
Time
Level
Level
Time
Early reflections
Source sound
Sound source
Small = 0.1 Large = 2.0
Time
Level
Small = 0 Large = 10
Time
Level
Source sound
Live
Dead
Large reflected
sound
Small reflected
sound
Time Time
Small = 1.0s Large = 5.0s
Source sound
Rear reverberation
Rear
reverberation
Early reflections
Short
reverberation
Long
reverberation
Sound source
Rev.Time Rev.Time
60dB 60dB
Time
Level
Source sound
Reverberation
(dB)
Rev.Delay Rev.Time
60dB
49 En
Editing surround decoders/sound field programs
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Rev.Level parameter adjusts the reverberation sound level.
Increasing the value of Rev.Level makes the reverbration
sound level higher, which allows you to create more echo.
2ch Stereo only
Direct
Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control
circuit when an analog sound source is selected as the
input source. You can enjoy a higher quality sound.
7ch Stereo only
CT Level/SL Level/SR Level/
SB Level
Adjusts the volume ofthe center (CT), surround L (SL)
surround R (SR) and surround back (SB) channels in the
7ch Stereo program. The available parameters differ
depending on the setting of the speakers.
Straight Enhancer/7ch Enhancer only
Effect Level
Adjusts the Compressed Music Enhancer effect level.
When the high-frequency signals of the source is
emphasized too much, set the effect level to “Low.” To
reduce the effect, set this parameter to “Low.” To increase
the effect, set it to “High.”
You can customize decoder effects by setting the
following parameters. For kinds of decoders, see page 27.
When PLIIx Music/PLII Music is selected
Panorama
Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends
stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front
speakers for a wraparound effect.
Dimension
Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound
field and the surround sound field. You can adjust the
difference in level created by the software being played
back to obtain the preferred sound balance. The surround
sound gets stronger as you make the value more negative
and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value
more positive.
Center Width
You can spread the center sound toward left and right
according to your preference. Set this parameter to 0 for
outputting the center sound from the center speaker only,
or to 7 for outputting it from the front left/right speaker.
When Neo:6 Music is selected
C.Image
Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to
the center channel to make the center channel more or less
dominant as necessary.
Parameters only usable in certain sound
field programs
Choices: Auto*/Off
Auto Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and
tone control circuit when the “Bass” and “Treble”
tone controls are both set to 0 dB.
Off Do not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control.
Adjustable range: 0 to 100%
Choices: High*/Low
Time
Level
Source sound
Rev.Level
(dB)
Decoder parameters
Choices: Off*/On
Adjustable range: -3 to STD* to +3
Adjustable range: 0 to 3* to 7
Adjustable range: 0.0 to 0.3* to 1.0
50 En
You can call the setup menu using the remote control and change the settings of various menus.
You can change the following settings in the setup menu. For details, read “Basic operation of the setup menu” first, and
see the respective pages.
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
Menu/Submenu Function Page
Speaker Setup Sets items for speakers.
51
1 Auto Setup (YPAO) Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers.
51
2 Manual Setup Manually adjusts output characteristics of speakers.
51
A)Config Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of speaker and a size of the
connected speaker (sound reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening
environment.
51
B)Level Separately adjusts volume of each speaker.
53
C)Distance Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound based on distances between
speakers and the listening position.
53
D)Equalizer Selects an equalizer that adjusts speaker output characteristics.
53
E)Test Tone Generates test tones.
53
Sound Setup Sets various items for sound outputs.
53
1 Dynamic Range Adjusts dynamic ranges of speakers and headphones.
53
2 Lipsync Adjusts delay in output timing between video signals and audio signals.
54
HDMI Auto Sets on or off of automatic adjustments for delay between output timing between
video signals input from the HDMI jack and audio signals.
54
Auto Delay Fine adjusts a delay time of HDMI Auto.
54
Manual Delay Manually fine adjusts the delay of audio and visual output.
54
Function Setup Set various items for HDMI and display.
54
1 HDMI Sets various items for input sources.
54
Standby Through Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the HDMI IN jack to the
HDMI OUT jack when this unit is on standby.
54
Audio Output Selects this unit or a component connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT jack of
this unit for reproducing sound signals input from the HDMI IN jack.
54
Resolution Sets resolution of the HDMI output that is converted from analogy visual input
signals.
54
Aspect Set an aspect ratio of images reproduced by HDMI signals converted from analog
video input signals.
54
2 Display Set items for a monitor or the front panel display.
55
Dimmer Sets brightness of the front panel display.
55
FL Scroll Selects the way to display characters on the front panel display.
55
OSD Shift Adjusts top and bottom positions of the screen displayed on the video monitor.
55
3 Volume Sets items for volumes.
55
Adaptive DRC Adjusts the dynamic range (difference between the maximum volume and the
minimum volume) in conjunction with the volume level.
55
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally
increased.
55
Init. Volume Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on.
55
4 Input Rename Changes input source names to be displayed on a video monitor or the front panel
display.
55
5 Zone2 Sets the maximum volume level and initial volume level of Zone2.
56
Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally
increased.
56
Init. Volume Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on.
56
DSP Parameter Sets parameters for the sound field programs.
56
Memory Guard Protects some settings against accidental alteration.
56
51 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
The setup menu screen appears on both video display
(OSD) and front panel display.
Video display (OSD)
Front panel display
In this section, procedures of setting menus using the
video monitor are described.
1 Press mSETUP on the remote control.
The setup menu screen appears.
2 Select a menu using oCursor k / n, and
press oENTER.
Items of the selected menu are displayed. For
example, the following screen appears when you
select “Function Setup.”
y
• You can return to the previous screen by pressing oRETURN.
3 To display submenus, select a menu that you
want to set using oCursor k / n, and press
oENTER.
For example, the following screen appears when you
select “2 Display.”
4 Select an item using oCursor k / n, and
change the setting of the item using
oCursor l / h.
Some items in the Manual Setup menu of “Speaker
Setup” take up a full screen. To display other items in
the Manual Setup menu, press oCursor k / n.
“A)Config” display (example)
y
• You can change other items by repeating step 4.
5 To finish the setting, press mSETUP.
y
• When oCursor or other keys do not work after completing the menu,
select the input source again using hInput selection keys.
You can set various items for speakers. Two kinds of
adjustments are available. One is “Auto Setup (YPAO)”
for automatic adjustment and another is “Manual Setup”
for manual adjustment.
y
• The default settings are marked with “*.”
Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers to
obtain optimum balance for the output sound based on
positions and performances of the speakers and acoustic
characteristics or the room, which are automatically
measured. For details on operations, see page 19.
Adjusts output characteristics of speakers based on
manually set parameters.
After Auto Setup (YPAO) is performed, you can check
automatically adjusted parameters in the Manual Setup
menu. Fine adjust the parameters for your preference if
necessary.
■
A)Config
Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of
speaker and a size of the connected speaker (sound
reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening
environment.
y
• The speaker configuration includes items for defining a speaker size:
Large or Small. Large and Small refer to speakers with woofer diameters
16 cm or larger and smaller than 16 cm, respectively.
Extra SP Assign
Selects the application for EXTRA SP terminals.
Note
•
When setting “Extra SP Assign” to “Zone2” or “Presence,” the surround back
channel signals for main output is separately output from other channels.
Basic operation of the setup menu
SetupMenu
;SoundSetup
.;SpeakerSetup
[ENTER]:Enter
;FunctionSetup
;DSPParameter
;MemoryGuard
[]/[]:Up/Down
[
[
;SpeakerSetup
;FunctionSetup
2Display
. 1HDMI
[ENTER]:Enter
3Volume
4InputRename
[]/[]:Up/Down
[
[
5Zone2
2Display
FLScroll;;Continue
. Dimmer;;;;;;;;;;;;0
OSDShift;;;;;;;;;0
[]/[]:Up/Down
[
[
[]/[]:Adjust
[
[
Speaker Setup
1 Auto Setup
2 Manual Setup
Choices: Zone2/Presence/None*
Zone2 Assigns the EXTRA SP terminals for the
speakers in the second zone.
Presence Assigns the EXTRA SP terminals for the
Presence speaker.
None Disables the EXTRA SP terminals.
A)Config
Center SP
None >Small Large
52 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
LFE/Bass Out
Selects speaker(s) for outputting low-frequency
components of the LFE (low-frequency effect sound)
channel or other channels. The output status is as follows.
LFE channel signals
Low-frequency components of other channel
signals
Front SP
Sets the sizes of front left and right speakers.
Note
• When “LFE/Bass Out” is set to “Front,” you can only select “Large.” If
“LFE/Bass Out” is changed to “Front,” “Front SP” automatically
switches to “Large” even when it is set to “Small.”
Center SP
Sets the size of center speaker.
Sur. L/R SP
Sets sizes of left and right surround speakers.
y
• When “None” is selected, the sound field programs automatically enter
the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.
Sur.B L/R SP
Sets sizes of left and right surround back speakers.
y
• When “None” is selected, “PLIIx Movie,” “PLIIx Music,” and “PLIIx
Game” cannot be selected.
Choices: SWFR/Front/Both*
Parameter Subwoofer
Front
speakers
Other
speakers
Both Output Not output Not output
SWFR Output Not output Not output
Front Not output Output Not output
Parameter Subwoofer
Front
speakers
Other
speakers
Both [1] [2] [3]
SWFR [4] [3] [3]
Front Not output [1] [3]
[1] Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right
channels and the channel of speaker, the size of which is set to
“Small.”
[2] Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right
channels.
[3] Outputs low frequency components when the sizes of speakers
are set to “Large.”
[4] Outputs low-frequency components of the channel of speaker,
the size of which is set to “Small.”
Choices: Small/Large*
Small Select this when small speakers are
connected. Low-frequency components of the
front left and right channels are output from a
subwoofer.
Large Select this when large speakers are
connected.
Choices: None/Small*/Large
None Select this when no center speaker is
connected. Center channel signals are spread
to front left and right speakers.
Small Select this when a small center speaker is
connected. Low-frequency components of
center channel are output from a subwoofer.
If a subwoofer is not connected they are
output from front speakers.
Large Select this when a large center speaker is
connected.
Choices: None/Small*/Large
None Select this when no surround speakers are
connected. Surround channel signals are
spread to front left and right speakers. “Sur.B
L/R SP” automatically switches to “None”
when this is selected.
Small Select this when small surround speakers are
connected. Low-frequency components of
surround channels are output from a
subwoofer. If a subwoofer is not connected
they are output from front speakers.
Large Select this when large surround speakers are
connected.
Choices: None/SMLx1/SMLx2*/LRGx1/LRGx2
None Select this when no surround back speaker
are connected. Surround back channel signals
are output from the surround L/R speakers
and subwoofer. If the subwoofer is disabled,
they are output from the surround L/R
speakers and front speakers.
SMLx1 Select this when one small surround back
speaker is connected.
SMLx2 Select this when two small surround back
speakers are connected.
LRGx1 Select this when one large surround back
speaker is connected.
LRGx2 Select this when two large surround back
speakers are connected.
53 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Crossover Freq.
Sets the lower limit of the low frequency component
output from a speaker with a size set to “Small (SMLx1/
SMLx2).” Sound with a frequency below that limit is
output from a subwoofer or front speakers.
If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover
frequency control, set the volume to half or the crossover
frequency at the maximum.
Subwoofer Phase
Sets the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are
lacking or unclear.
■
B)Level
Separately adjusts volume of each speaker so that the
sounds form speakers are at the same volume at the
listening position. Items to be displayed vary depending
on the number of speakers connected.
y
• When only one surround back speaker is connected, “SB” appears
instead of “SBL” and “SBR.”
• You can adjust the volume listening to test tones when you set “Test
Tone” to “On” (see page 53).
• If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control,
set the volume to half or the crossover frequency at the maximum.
■ C)Distance
Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound so
that sounds from speakers reach the listening position at
the same time. Set unit (Unit) first and set the distance of
each speaker.
Unit
Front L
/ Front R / Center / Sur. L /
Sur. R / Sur.B L / Sur.B R / SWFR/ PRNS
L/ PRNS R
y
• Different items are displayed depending on settings of “A)Config” (see
page 51).
• When only one surround back speaker is connected, “Sur.B” appears
instead of “Sur.B L” and “Sur.B R.”
■ D)Equalizer
Adjusts sound quality and tone using a parametric graphic
equalizer.
EQ Type Select
Select an equalizer type.
GEQ
Adjusts sound quality of each speaker using a graphic
equalizer. The graphic equalizer of this unit can adjust
signal levels in 7 frequency ranges.
To adjust the signal level within each range, select the
desired speaker with oCursor l / h while “→” is
displayed next to “Channel,” then the desired frequency
band with oCursor k / n, and adjust the signal level
with oCursor l / h.
■
E)Test Tone
Switches between on and off of an oscillator that generates
test tones. To turn on the oscillator, select “On” using
oCursor l / h. When “On” is selected, you can adjust
the settings of “2 Manual Setup” while listening to a test
tone.
You can set various items for sound outputs.
■
1 Dynamic Range
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for
reproducing bitstream signals.
Choices: 40Hz/60Hz/80Hz*/90Hz/100Hz/110Hz/120Hz/
160Hz/200Hz
Choices: Normal*/Reverse
Normal Select this not to change the phase of your
subwoofer.
Reverse Select this to reverse the phase of your
subwoofer.
Adjustable range: -10.0dB to +10.0dB (0.5 dB step)
Defaults: “FR.L/FR.R/SWFR” 0dB
“CNTR/SUR.L/SUR.R/SBL/SBR” -1.0dB
Choices: meters (m)/feet (ft)*
meters (m) Displays the speaker distance in meters.
feet (ft) Displays the speaker distance in feet.
Adjustable range: 0.30m to 24.00m (1.0ft to 80.0ft)
Defaults: 3.00m (10.0ft) “Front L/Front R/
SWFR”
2.60m (8.5ft) “Center”
2.40m (8.0ft) “Sur. L/Sur. R/
Sur.B L/Sur.B R/PRNS L/PRNS R”
Choices: Auto PEQ/GEQ*/Off
Auto PEQ Uses a parametric equalizer selected in
“1 Auto Setup.” Characteristics of the
currently used parametric equalizer (see
page 19) are displayed below “Auto PEQ.”
If Auto Setup is not executed, this
parameter is not displayed.
GEQ Uses a graphic equalizer. Press oENTER
to adjust the characteristics of the graphic
equalizer.
Off Not use a graphic equalizer.
Choices: 63Hz/160Hz/400Hz/1kHz/2.5kHz/
6.3kHz/16kHz
Adjustable range: -6.0dB to 0dB* to +6.0dB (0.5 dB step)
Choices: Off*/On
Off Not generate test tones.
On Generates test tones.
Sound Setup
Choices: Min/Auto/STD/Max*
Min/Auto (Min) Sets the dynamic range suitable for
low volume or a quiet environment, such as
at night, for bitstream signals except for
Dolby TrueHD signals.
(Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby
TrueHD signals based on input signal
information.
STD Sets the standard dynamic range
recommended for regular home use.
54 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
■ 2 Lipsync
Adjusts delay between video output and audio output.
HDMI Auto
Automatically adjusts output timing of audio and video
signals when a monitor that supports an automatic lip-
sync function is connected to this unit.
Auto Delay
Fine adjust the correction time when “HDMI Auto” is set
to “On.” The actual correction time is displayed under in
“Auto Delay” field and an offset time set by the user in
“Offset” field.
Manual Delay
Manually fine adjusts the correction time. Select this when
the connected monitor does not support the automatic lip-
sync function or you set “HDMI Auto” to “Off.”
You can set various items for HDMI and display.
You can set items for HDMI.
■ Standby Through
Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the
HDMI IN jack to the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is on
standby. When this parameter is set to “On” signals input
from the HDMI 1-4 jacks can be output to a monitor
component.
y
• To enables pass-through output, any one of the input sources connected
to the HDMI1-4 must be selected before switching to standby.
• When “Standby Through” turns on, the HDMI THROUGH indicator on
the front panel display lights up. While the indicator lights up, it
consumes 1 to 3W of power depending on a condition of an HDMI signal
passing through this unit.
■ Audio Output
Selects this unit or a component connected to this unit via
the HDMI OUT jack of this unit for reproducing sound
signals input from the HDMI IN jack.
Note
• When “TV” or “Amp+TV” is selected, signal formats of audio and visual
signals output from this unit to the monitor vary depending on
specifications of the monitor.
■ Resolution
Upscales the resolution of HDMI output that is converted
from analog video input signals and output from the
HDMI OUT jack.
Notes
• Resolution of the HDMI output converted from 720p or 1080i analog
video signals cannot be upscaled.
• When a video monitor is connected to this unit via the HDMI jack, this
unit automatically detects a resolution that the monitor supports. An
asterisk (*) appears on the left of the detected resolution.
• If this unit cannot detect the resolution that the monitor supports, set
“MON.CHK” in the advanced setup menu to “SKIP” (see page 60) and
try it again.
■ Aspect
Set a horizontal to vertical ratio (aspect ratio) of images
reproduced by HDMI signals output from the HDMI OUT
jack when the HDMI signals are converted from analog
video input signals by a video conversion function.
Notes
• You cannot change the aspect ratio of the screen when “Resolution” is set
to “Thrgh.”
• The setting is not effective for inputs with the aspect ratio other than 4:3.
• You cannot obtain an effect of the aspect ratio when visual signals are
input from the HDMI IN jack or 720p, 1080i or 1080p signals are input.
Max Outputs sound without adjusting the
dynamic range of the input signals.
Choices: Off*/On
Off Select this when the connected monitor does
not support the automatic lip-sync function or
you do not use the automatic lip-sync
function. Set the correction time in “Manual
Delay.”
On Select this when the connected monitor
supports the automatic lip-sync function. Fine
adjust the correction time in “Auto Delay.”
Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step)
Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step)
Function Setup
1 HDMI
Choices: On/Off*
On Outputs the HDMI signals to the HDMI OUT
jack.
Off Not output the HDMI signals to the HDMI
OUT jack.
Choices: Amp*/TV/Amp+TV
Amp Outputs HDMI sound signals form the
speakers connected to this unit.
TV Outputs HDMI sound signals from the
speakers of a TV connected to this unit.
Sound output from the speakers connected to
this unit is muted.
Amp+TV Outputs HDMI sound signals from the
speakers connected to this unit and the
speakers of a TV connected to this unit.
Choices: Through*/480p/720p/1080i/1080p
Choices: Thrgh*/16:9/Smart
Thrgh Outputs the video signals without changing
the aspect ratio.
16:9 Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3
images on a 16:9 monitor with black bands
on the right and left sides of the monitor
screen.
Smart Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3
images on a 16:9 monitor by stretching right
and left of images to fit on the monitor
screen.
55 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can set items for a monitor or the front panel display.
■
Dimmer
Sets brightness of the front panel display. As the value is
lowered, the brightness of the front panel display is
darkened.
Note
• The brightness of display does not become bright in Pure Direct mode
even if the value is increased.
■ FL Scroll
Selects the way to scroll the screen when a total number of
characters exceed a display area of the front panel display.
■
OSD Shift
Adjusts top and bottom positions of the screen displayed
on the video monitor. To move up the screen, set this value
larger. To move down the screen, set it smaller.
You can set items for volumes.
■
Adaptive DRC
Adjust the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume
level. This feature is useful when you are listening at
lower volumes or at night. When this function is enabled,
the dynamic range is adjusted as follows.
If the VOLUME setting is low: the dynamic range is
narrow
If the VOLUME setting is high: the dynamic range is wide
y
• The Adaptive DRC setting is effective for headphones.
■ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will
not be accidentally increased. For example, you can adjust
the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB when you set
this parameter to “–5.0dB.” The volume increases to the
maximum level when this parameter is set to +16.5 dB
(default).
■
Init. Volume
Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. When
this parameter is set to “Off,” the volume is set to a level
that last time this unit is set to standby.
Note
• If the setting of “Max Volume” is lower than the setting of “Init.
Volume,” the setting of “Max Volume” becomes effective. For example,
when you set “Max Volume” to “–30.0dB” and “Init. Volume” to
“0.0dB,” the volume is automatically set to “–30.0dB” at the next time
this unit is turned on.
Changes input source names to be displayed on the front
panel display.
You can select an input source that you want to change the
name to be displayed using oCursor.
Selecting a name to be displayed from templates
Select an input source that you want to change the name,
and select a name from the following templates using
Cursor.
y
• If you change the display name of an input source to your original one
and select the input source, the current input source name and the
template name are displayed. This is convenient if you want to cancel
name change operation.
Entering an original name
Select an input source that you want to name, and press
oENTER. You can enter up to 9 characters by selecting
one character at a time with the following keys according
to the following operation.
The following characters are available for input.
A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) and space
2 Display
Adjustable range: -4 to 0*
Choices: Continue*/Once
Continue Repeatedly displays all characters by
scrolling.
Once Displays all characters by scrolling once,
halts scrolling, and then displays first 14
characters.
Adjustable range: -5 to 0* to +5
3 Volume
Choices: Auto/Off*
Auto Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.
Off Not adjust the dynamic range automatically.
VOLUME: highVOLUME: low
Input levelInput level
Output level
Output level
Auto
Off Off
Auto
Adjustable range: -30.0dB to +15.0dB/+16.5dB* (5.0 dB
step)
Choices: Off*/Mute/-80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step)
4 Input Rename
– Blu-ray – Satellite
– DVD – VCR
– SetTopBox – Tape
– Game – MD
– TV – PC
– DVR – iPod
– CD – HD DVD
– CD-R – “blank”
oCursor l / h For selecting characters that you
want to change
oCursor k / n For selecting characters to be
entered
oENTER For entering the selected characters
56 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
Sets the maximum volume level and initial volume level
of Zone2.
y
• This item is displayed only when “Extra SP Assign” is set to “Zone2.”
■ Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume level of Zone2, so that the
volume will not be accidentally increased. For example,
you can adjust the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB
when you set this parameter to “–5.0dB.”
■ Init. Volume
Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone2 when the
power of Zone2 unit is turned on.
Note
• If the setting of “Max Volume” is lower than the setting of “Init.
Volume,” the setting of “Max Volume” becomes effective. For example,
when you set “Max Volume” to “–30.0dB” and “Init. Volume” to
“0.0dB,” the volume is automatically set to “–30.0dB” at the next time
this unit is turned on.
You can set parameters for the sound field programs. For
details, see page 46.
Protects settings of setup menu against accidental
alteration.
Note
• When this parameter is switched to “On,” “G” appears while the setup
menu is displayed on the video monitor.
5 Zone2
Adjustable range: -30.0dB to +15.0dB / +16.5dB*
(5.0 dB step)
Choices: Off*/Mute/-80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step)
DSP Parameter
Memory Guard
Choices: Off*/On
Off Not protect settings.
On Protects the settings of the setup menu
(except for the Memory Guard setting).
57 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce
separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone2). You can control this unit from the second zone
using the supplied remote control.
You need the following additional equipment to use the
multi-zone functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone.
• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter
transmits infrared signals from the remote control to a
CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone via
the infrared signal receiver in the second zone.
• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone.
y
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a
multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your
nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone2
connections that best meet your requirements.
• Some Yamaha models can be directly connected to the REMOTE jacks
of this unit. You may not need use an infrared signal emitter for these
products. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below.
Connect the amplifier/receiver in the second zone and
other components to this unit as follows.
Note
• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone2 feature with CDs
encoded in DTS.
Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA
SP terminals and then set the “Extra SP Assign” to
“Zone2” (see page 51).
y
• You can use the speakers connected to EXTRA SP speaker terminals as
the front speaker system of another zone. Set “Extra SP Assign” to
“Zone2” (see page 51).
• When you use the internal amplifiers for the Zone2 speakers, you can
adjust the volume level and set the initial volume and maximum volume
of the Zone2 speakers (see page 56).
Using multi-zone configuration
Only analog signal can be sent to Zone2. If you want to output the sound from Zone2, connect an external component
to AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 by analog connection. For example, if you want to output sound from an HDMI DVD player
in Zone2, you must connect the component to this unit by both HDMI and analog connections.
Connecting Zone2
Using the external amplifier
OUT
IN
REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
OUT
REMOTE
This unit Yamaha
component
Infrared signal
receiver
To the REMOTE IN jack
Infrared signal
emitter
DVD player (etc.)
Amplifier
Remote control
Second zone
(Zone2)
Main zone
This unit
From the ZONE2 OUT jacks
Infrared signal
receiver
From the REMOTE OUT jack
Using the internal amplifier of this unit
Important safety notice
The EXTRA SP speaker terminals of this unit should
not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector
Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or
multiple speakers per channel could create an
abnormally low impedance load resulting in amplifier
damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance
information for all channels must be maintained at all
times. This information is found on the back panel of
your unit.
EXTRA SP
ZONE2/PRESENCE
Second zone
(Zone2)
This unit
Main zone
58 En
Using multi-zone configuration
You can select and control Zone2 by using the control
keys on the front panel or on the remote control. The
available operations are as follows:
• Selecting the input source (AV5-6, AUDIO1-2, V-AUX)
of Zone2.
• Adjusting the volume of Zone2 (when a Zone2 speaker
is connected to the EXTRA SP jack).
• Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as
the input source of Zone2 (see page 29).
• Tuning into XM Satellite Radio when “XM” is selected
as the input source of Zone2 (see page 31) (U.S.A.
model only).
• Tuning into SIRIUS Satellite Radio when “SIRIUS” is
selected as the input source of Zone2 (see page 35)
(U.S.A. model only).
• Playing back music stored on your iPod stationed in a
Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK terminal.
Note
• You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing on
the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone2 mode is automatically
canceled and this unit returns to the normal operation mode. In this case,
repeat the Zone2 selection procedure.
■ Turning on Zone2
Press
C
ZONE2 ON/OFF to turn on Zone2.
■ Activating the Zone2 operation mode
Press
D
ZONE2 CONTROL to control Zone2.
The ZONE2 indicator flashes on the front panel display
for approximately 10 seconds.
■ Operating Zone2
Press
O
INPUT l / h to select the desired input
source while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing on
the front panel display.
• When AV5-6, AUDIO1-2 or V-AUX is selected, you
can listening to the input source in Zone2.
• Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the TUNER
features in Zone2. For details about the TUNER
operations, see “FM/AM tuning” on page 29.
• Select “XM” as the input source to use the XM Satellite
Radio features in Zone2. For details about the XM
Satellite Radio operations, see “XM Satellite Radio
tuning” on page 31.
• Select “SIRIUS” as the input source to use the SIRIUS
Satellite Radio features in Zone2. For details about the
SIRIUS Satellite Radio operations, see “SIRIUS
Satellite Radio tuning” on page 35.
• Select “DOCK” as the input source to use iPod features
in Zone2. For details about the iPod operations, see
“Using iPod” on page 40.
• Select “DOCK” as the input source to use Bluetooth
component features in Zone2. For details about the
Bluetooth component operations, see “Using Bluetooth
components” on page 42.
■ Set Zone2 to the standby mode
Press
C
ZONE2 ON/OFF to set Zone2 to the
standby mode.
■ Turning on Zone2
Switches bMAIN/ZONE2 to ZONE2 position,
and press gPOWER.
■ Operating Zone2
Switches bMAIN/ZONE2 to ZONE2 position,
and press one of the input selection keys to
select the desired input source of Zone2.
Note
• r MUTE and p VOLUME +/– are available to control Zone2 with
same procedure as mentioned above.
■ Setting Zone2 to the standby mode
Switches bMAIN/ZONE2 to ZONE2 position,
and press gPOWER and to set ZONE2 to the
standby mode.
Controlling Zone2
Controlling Zone2 with the front panel
ZONE
2
Flashes
Controlling Zone2 with the remote control
59 En
English
INTRODUCTION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can control external components for a selected input source with the remote control. The keys available for
controlling external components are as follows:
eSOURCE POWER
Turns on and off an external component.
oCursor, ENTER, RETURN
Operates the menus of external components.
qDISPLAY
Switches between the screens of external components.
sExternal component operation keys
Function as a recording or playback key of an external
component, or a menu display key.
tNumeric keys
Function as numeric keys of an external component.
uTV control keys
y
• You need to set the remote control code first to control external
components.
• The remote control keys for controlling external components are
available only when the external components have corresponding control
keys.
The following remote control codes are assigned to input
sources as factory default settings. For a complete list of
available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote
control codes” at the end of this manual.
■ Default remote control code settings
“—” indicates no assignment
y
• An external component that is controlled by the remote control can be
automatically selected according to selection of the scenes (see page 22).
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of
available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote
control codes” at the end of this manual.
1 Press dCODE SET on the remote control
using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
cTRANSMIT on the remote control blinks twice.
2 Press hInput selection keys.
3 Enter a remote control code using
tNumeric keys.
Once the remote control code is registered,
cTRANSMIT on the remote control blinks twice.
If it fails, cTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat
from step 1.
You can clear all the remote control codes previously set,
and reset all of them to the initial factory settings.
1 Press dCODE SET on the remote control
using a pointed object such as a tip of a
ballpoint pen.
cTRANSMIT on the remote control blinks twice.
2 Press mSETUP on the remote control.
3 Enter “9981” using tNumeric keys.
Once the initialization is complete, cTRANSMIT
on the remote control blinks twice. If it fails,
cTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from
step 1.
Controlling other components with the remote control
INPUT Switches visual inputs of TV
MUTE Mute audio of TV
TV VOL +/– Controls the volume of TV
TV CH +/– Switches channels of TV
POWER Turns on and off TV
Input source Category Manufacturer
Default
code
[HDMI1] Blu-ray Disc Yamaha 2018
[HDMI2] — — —
[HDMI3] — — —
[HDMI4] — — —
[AV1] — — —
[AV2] — — —
[AV3] CD Yamaha 5013
[AV4] — — —
[AV5] — — —
[AV6] — — —
[AUDIO1] — — —
[AUDIO2] — — —
[V-AUX] — — —
[TUNER] Tuner Yamaha 5007
[DOCK] DOCK Yamaha 5011
[A]/[B] — — —
[XM] Tuner Yamaha 5017
[SIRIUS] Tuner Yamaha 5009
[MULTI CH] — — —
Setting remote control codes
Resetting all remote control codes
Input source Category Manufacturer
Default
code
60 En
In the advanced setup, you can set basic operations of this
unit, such as on and off of a bi-amp connection, or
initialize user settings. Perform the following steps to
change settings.
1 Set this unit to the standby mode.
2 Press AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF while
pressing and holding MSTRAIGHT on the
front panel.
The advanced setup menu appears on the front panel
display.
3 Press LPROGRAM l / h repeatedly to
select the parameter you want to change.
The default setting are marked with “*.”
y
• Set values are placed in XXX of the following parameters on an
actual display screen.
SP IMP. -XXX
Selects output impedance of this unit according to
connected speakers.
REMOTE ID -XXX
Sets a remote control ID. When using multiple
Yamaha AV receivers, you can operate them with a
single remote control by setting the receiver IDs to
the same setting.
SR PIN -XXX
Resets Parental lock cord when using SIRIUS
Satellite tuner.
BI AMP - XXX
Switches on and off of bi-amp connection of main
speakers. For bi-amp connection, see page 12.
SCENE IR -XXX
Selects whether or not to transmit the control signals
to an external component connected to the REMOTE
jacks on this unit when BD/DVD or CD SCENE
function is selected.
MON.CHK - XXXX
Adds upscaling limitation on output signals to a video
monitor connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT
jack.
INIT-XXXXXXXXX
Initializes various settings stored in this unit. You can
select an initialization method from the following.
DSP PARAM: All parameters of sound field
programs
VIDEO: Video conversion settings (resolution/
aspect) in the setup menu and the OSD
display position
ALL: Reset this unit to initial factory
settings
CANCEL: Cancellation of initialization
4 Press MSTRAIGHT a few times to select the
value you want to change.
The value selected here becomes effective when this
unit is turned on the next time. You can change
multiple settings by repeating steps 3 and 4.
5 Press AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF, turns off this
system, and press AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF
again.
The value set in step 3 becomes effective, and this
unit turns on. When you select initialization in step 3,
the initialization is performed.
Two IDs are provided for the remote control of this unit. If
another Yamaha amplifier is in the same room, setting a
different remote control ID to this unit prevents unwanted
operation of the other amplifier.
ID1 is set for both remote control and amplifier by default.
When you change the remote control ID, display
“Advance Setup” (see the previous section) and change the
ID for the amplifier too.
1 Press dCODE SET on the remote control
using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
cTRANSMIT blinks twice.
2 Press mSETUP on the remote control.
3 Enter the desired remote control ID code.
To switch to ID1:
Enter “5019” using tNumeric keys.
To switch to ID2:
Enter “5020” using tNumeric keys.
Once the remote control code is registered,
cTRANSMIT blinks twice.
If it fails, cTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat
from step 1.
y
• Initializing the remote control code (see page 59) returns it to ID1.
Advanced setup
Choices: 6ΩMIN/8ΩMIN*
Choices: ID1*/ID2
Choices: RESET/CANCEL
Choices: ON/OFF*
Choices: ON*/OFF
Choices: YES*/SKIP
ADVANCEDSETUP
Choices: DSP PARAM/VIDEO/ALL/CANCEL
Setting a remote control ID
61 En
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
APPENDIX
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
Troubleshooting
General
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable properly to an AC wall
outlet.
—
The speaker impedance setting is
incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 60
(When this unit is turned back on and
“CHECK SP WIRES!” is displayed.) The
protection circuitry has been activated
because this unit was turned on while a
speaker cable was shorted.
Make sure that all speaker cables between this unit
and speakers are connected properly.
12
This unit cannot be
turned off.
The internal microcomputer is frozen due
to an external electric shock (such as
lightning or excessive static electricity) or
by a drop in power supply voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet,
wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again.
—
No sound. “Audio Output” in “1 HDMI” Function
Setup is set to “TV.”
Select a choice for “Audio Output” (Function Setup
→ 1 HDMI → Audio Output) other than “TV.”
54
A proper audio decoder is not selected. Display the OPTION menu and set “Decoder Mode”
to “Auto.”
44
Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
14-17
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with OINPUT l
/ h or the hInput selection keys on the
remote control.
22
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 11
The volume is turned down or muted. Turn up the volume. —
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Display Signal info of the option menu and check the
input signal format.
If “No Signal” is displayed, check if the playback
component is properly connected to this unit (or a
proper input source is selected).
If “___” is displayed, the input signal in that format
cannot be reproduced by this unit.
—
The HDMI components connected to this
unit do not support the HDCP copy
protection standards.
Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP
copy protection standards.
74
62 En
Troubleshooting
No picture. An appropriate video input is not selected
on the monitor.
Select an appropriate video input on the monitor. —
The composite output terminals are used
to output a component video signal, or the
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks are used to
output a composite video signal.
If your monitor does not support the HDMI
connection, connect it to the COMPONENT OUT
jacks or the composite output terminals and select an
appropriate video input on the monitor.
14
This unit outputs the video signals are not
supported on the video monitor connected
to the HDMI OUT jack.
Displays the advanced setup menu and select
“VIDEO” in “INIT” to reset the video parameters.
60
Displays the advanced setup menu and set
“MON.CHK” to “YES.”
60
Non-standard video signals are input. Connect the monitor to this unit via the
COMPONENT OUT jacks or the composite output
terminals.
14
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 60
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. —
Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.
The playback component or speakers are
not connected properly.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
11
The speaker level settings are incorrect. Adjust “B)Level” settings. 53
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When a monaural source sound field
program is applied, sound of all channels
are output from the center speaker for
some surround decoders.
Try another sound field program. 25
No sound is output
from a specific
speaker.
Output from that speaker is disabled. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel
display. If the corresponding indicator is turned off,
try the following.
1) Change the input source to another one.
2) With the selected sound field program, sound is not
output from that speaker.
Select another sound field program.
3) “None” may have been selected for that speaker on
this unit. Display Speaker Setup in the Setup menu
and enables output of that speaker.
6, 22, 25,
52
The volume of that speaker is set to
minimum in Speaker Setup in the Setup
menu.
Display Speaker Setup in the Setup menu and adjust
the volume (2 Manual Setup → B)Level).
53
This unit or speaker is malfunction. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel
display. If the corresponding indicator lights up,
connect another speaker and check if sound is output.
If sound is not output, this unit may be malfunction.
6, 10
No sound is heard
from the presence
speakers.
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode. Press MSTRAIGHT or the kSTRAIGHT on the
remote control to turn off the “STRAIGHT” mode.
28
Sound may not be output from certain
channels depending on the input source or
sound field program.
Try another sound field program. 25
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
63 En
Troubleshooting
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode
and a monaural source is being played
back.
Press MSTRAIGHT or the kSTRAIGHT on the
remote control to turn off the “STRAIGHT” mode.
28
Sound may not be output from certain
channels depending on input sources or
sound field programs.
Try another sound field program. 25
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
“LFE/Bass Out” of “A)Config” in
“Speaker Setup” of the setup menu
(Speaker Setup→2 Manual
Setup→A)Config) is set to “Front” when
a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being
played.
Set “LFE/Bass Out” to “SWFR” or “Both.” 52
“LFE/Bass Out” of “A)Config” in
“Speaker Setup” of the setup menu
(Speaker Setup→2 Manual
Setup→A)Config) is set to “SWFR” or
“Front” when a 2-channel source is being
played.
Set “LFE/Bass Out” to “Both.” 52
The source does not contain low
frequency signals.
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speakers.
“Extended Surround” in the OPTION
menu is set to “Off,” or an input signal
does not contain a surround back flag with
“Extended Surround” set to “Auto.”
Set “Extended Surround” other than “Off” or “Auto.” 44
The audio input
sources cannot be
played in the desired
digital audio signal
format.
The connected component is not set to
output the desired digital audio signals.
Set the playback component properly referring to its
operating instructions.
—
Noise/hum noise is
heard.
Incorrect cable connection. Connect the audio cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
A DTS-CD is being played back. 1) When only noise is output
If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this
unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback
component to this unit by digital connection and play
back the DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved,
the problem may results from the playback
component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback
component.
2) When noise is output during playback or skip
operation
Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the option
menu after selecting the input source and set
“Decoder Mode” to “DTS.”
15, 44
“Memory Guard!” is
displayed and the
setting cannot be
changed.
“Memory Guard” in “Setup Menu” is set
to “On.”
Set “Memory Guard” to “Off.” 56
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer is frozen due
to an external electric shock (such as
lightning or excessive static electricity) or
by a drop in power supply voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet,
wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again.
—
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
64 En
Troubleshooting
“CHECK SP WIRES!”
appears on the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 12
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment.
This unit is too close to other digital or
radio frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment. —
The picture is
disturbed.
The video software is copy-protected.
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
HDMI™
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
No picture or sound. The number of the connected HDMI
components is over the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI components. —
The connected HDMI component does not
support high-bandwidth digital copyright
protection (HDCP).
Connect an HDMI component that supports HDCP. 15
Tuner (FM/AM)
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
You are too far from the station
transmitter or the input from the
antenna is weak.
Check the antenna connections. 18
Replace the outdoor antenna with a more
sensitive multi-element antenna.
—
Switch to monaural mode. 44
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or
place it in a different location.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
You are in an area far from a station or
an input from the antenna is weak.
Replace an outdoor antenna with more
sensitive multi element antenna.
—
Tune in manually or by direct frequency
tuning.
29
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
65 En
Troubleshooting
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear on the front panel
display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. 18
Use the manual tuning method. 29
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Supplied AM loop antenna is not
connected.
Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even
if you use an outdoor antenna.
18
The noises may be caused by lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise,
but it can be reduced by installing and
properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna.
18
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. —
XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
CHECK XM TUNER The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in the
XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM
Mini-Tuner Home Dock is not connected
to this unit.
Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the
dock and check the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock
cable is connected to this unit.
31
CHECK ANTENNA The XM antenna is not connected to the
XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM
antenna cable has become damaged.
Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to
the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock and check the
antenna cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna if
the cable is damaged.
31
LOADING XM The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or
program information from the XM
satellite signal. This message can also
occur in weak XM signal conditions. Note
that this unit may not respond to some
operations while this message is
displayed.
This message should disappear in a few seconds in
good signal conditions. If you see this message often,
reposition the XM antenna to get better signal
reception. Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information
on the front panel display or “XM Information”
screen in the video monitor to check the antenna
reception level.
34
NO SIGNAL The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the
XM satellite signal. Something may be
blocking the XM antenna’s view of the
satellites or the antenna is not properly
aimed.
Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the
XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the
“ANTENNA INFO” information on the front panel
display or “XM Information” screen in the video
monitor to check the antenna reception level. See
instructions supplied with the XM Mini-Tuner and
Dock for antenna installation information.
34
CH OFF AIR The XM channel you selected is not
currently broadcasting.
Check back at a later time; in the meantime, select
another channel.
—
CH UNAUTH You may be attempting to tune to an XM
channel that is blocked or that you cannot
receive with your XM subscription
package.
Consult the latest channel guide at
http://www.xmradio.com/ for the current list of
channels. For information on receiving this channel,
visit http://www.xmradio.com/ or contact XM
Satellite Radio at 1-800-967-2346.
31
66 En
Troubleshooting
If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear on the front panel
display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.
CH UNAVAIL The selected channel is not available. The
channel may have been reassigned to a
different channel number. This message
may occur initially with a new XM Mini-
Tuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not
received XM’s signal for an extended
period.
Consult the latest channel guide at
http://www.xmradio.com/ for the current list of
channels. For cases of a new XM Mini-Tuner or an
XM Mini-Tuner that has not received XM’s signal for
an extended period, allow the XM Mini-Tuner to
receive the XM satellite signal for at least 5 minutes
and then try to select the channel again.
—
UPGRADE XM TUNER This unit has detected a XM CNP1000
which is not compatible with this unit.
If you have connected the XM Mini-Tuner
(CNP2000) and see this message, set this unit to
standby, disconnect and reconnect the XM Mini-
Tuner Home Dock and re-install the Mini-Tuner in
the Home Dock and turn on this unit.
If you continue to see this message with the XM
Mini-Tuner, contact XM Satellite Radio at
http://xmradio.com/ or 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-
967-2346).
If you have an incompatible XM CNP1000, contact
XM for information on upgrading to the XM Mini-
Tuner.
—
- - - - No artist name or song title is available for
this selection.
No action required. —
SIRIUS Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
ANTENNA ERROR The antenna is not connected to the
SiriusConnect tuner properly.
Check the connection of the antenna and
SiriusConnect tuner.
35
SIRIUS LOADING This unit is communicating with the
SiriusConnect tuner.
The message disappears normally within several tens
of seconds.
—
CHECK SR TUNER The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected
to the SIRIUS jack of this unit correctly.
Check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and
this unit.
35
The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected
to the AC wall outlet.
Connect the power cable of the SiriusConnect tuner to
the AC wall outlet.
35
NOT SUPPORTED This unit does not support the connected
SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner.
Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that this unit
supports,
35
ACQUIRING The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the
SiriusConnect tuner. Use the “Antenna” information
on the front panel display or “SIRIUS Information”
screen in the video monitor to check the antenna
reception level.
39
UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the
channel list.
Wait until the updating is complete. —
The period of the subscription is end. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the
subscription.
35
F/W UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the
firmware.
Wait until the updating is complete. —
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
67 En
Troubleshooting
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
CALL SIRIUS
(CALL 888-539-
SIRIUS TO
SUBSCRIBE)
The selected channel is not subscribed. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe the
selected channel.
URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/
Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474)
35
Select another channel. 35
SUB UPDATED The subscription information is updated.
INVALID The selected channel is currently out of
service.
Select another channel. 35
Not Available The operation you made is not available.
Remote control
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees
offaxis from the front panel.
9
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, strobe
light, etc.) is striking the remote control
sensor of this unit.
Adjust the lighting angle or reposition this unit. —
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 9
The remote control ID of the remote
control and this unit do not match.
Match the remote control ID of this unit and the
remote control.
60
The remote control code is not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using “List of
remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
59
Try setting another code of the same manufacturer
using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this
manual.
59
If this unit does not work when you press oCursor,
do the following.
When the key does not work during DVD disc menu
operation: press the hInput selection keys on
the remote control again.
When the key does not work during OPTION menu/
Setup menu operation: press the key applicable for
the current menu operation again.
—
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
68 En
Troubleshooting
Note
• In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing on the front panel display and on the OSD, check the connection of your iPod (see
page 17).
iPod™
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
Loading... This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your iPod.
This unit is in the middle of acquiring
song lists from your iPod.
Connect error There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
17
Remove your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock
and then place it back in the dock.
17
Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by
this unit.
This unit supports iPod Touch, iPod (Click and
Wheel), iPod nano and iPod mini.
—
iPod Connected Your iPod is properly placed in the
Yamaha iPod universal dock.
Disconnected Your iPod is removed from the Yamaha
iPod universal dock.
Place your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. 17
Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your iPod.
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod
are playable.
—
Store some other playable music files on your iPod. —
Bluetooth™
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
Searching... The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and
the Bluetooth component are in the
middle of the pairing.
The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and
the Bluetooth component are in the
middle of establishing the connection.
Completed The pairing is completed.
Canceled The pairing is canceled.
BT Connected The connection between the Yamaha
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the
Bluetooth component is established.
Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected
from the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver.
69 En
Troubleshooting
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Notes
• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screen appears, resolve the problem and then run “Auto Setup” again.
• Warning message “W-2” or “W-3” indicates that the adjusted settings may not be optimal.
• Depending on the speakers, warning message “W-1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct.
• If error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center.
Auto Setup (YPAO)
Before Auto Setup
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
19
Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. —
Memory Guard! The parameters of this unit are protected. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off.” 56
During Auto Setup
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signals are not
detected.
Check the front L/R speaker connections. 11
E-2:NO SUR. SP Only a signal from one of the surround
channels are detected.
Check the surround L/R speaker connections. 11
E-3:NO PRNS SP Only signals from one of the presence L/
R channels are detected.
Check the presence L/R speaker connections. 11
E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal
is detected.
If you connect only one surround back speaker,
connect it to the L-side terminal.
11
E-5:NOISY Measurement cannot be performed
accurately due to loud ambient noise.
Try running “Auto Setup” in a quiet environment. —
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air
conditioners or move them away from the optimizer
microphone.
—
E-6:CHECK SUR. Surround back speakers are connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.
When using surround back speakers, you need to
connect surround L/R speakers.
11
E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was
unplugged during the “Auto Setup”
procedure.
Do not touch the optimizer microphone during “Auto
Setup.”
19
E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not
detect test tones.
Check whether the microphone is properly placed. 19
Check whether the speakers are properly placed and
connected.
11
The optimizer microphone or OPTIMIZER MIC
jack may be defective. Contact the nearest Yamaha
dealer or service center.
19
If a monitor such as a TV is connected to this unit
via HDMI connection, sound may not be output
from this unit due to the HDMI control function. In
such a case, change the monitor setting, for example,
change the sound output setting to an amplifier so
that sound is output from this unit.
—
70 En
Troubleshooting
E-9:USER CANCEL “Auto Setup” was cancelled due to an
inappropriate user operation.
Run “Auto Setup” again. 19
E-10:INTERNAL ERROR An internal error occurred. Run “Auto Setup” again. 19
After Auto Setup
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This
message may appear depending on the
speakers even when the speakers are
connected correctly.
Check the polarities (+, –) of the displayed speaker.
If they are correct, the speakers work properly even
when this message is displayed.
11
W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).
Bring the speaker within 24 m (80 ft) area around the
listening position.
—
W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among
speakers is excessive.
Recheck the speaker positions and make sure all
speakers are placed in a similar environment.
—
Check the polarities (+, –) of the speakers. 11
We recommended that you use speakers with the
same or similar specifications.
—
Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. —
W-4:CHECK PRNS Presence speakers were not detected
during measurement with “Extra SP
Assign” set to “Presence.”
Check the presence speaker connections and perform
measurement again.
If presence speakers are not connected, set the
“Extra SP Assign” to other than “Presence.”
51
If presence speakers are connected, set the “Extra SP
Assign” to “Presence,” and retry Auto Setup.
51
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
71 En
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Audio and video synchronization (lip sync)
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term
that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining audio and
video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission.
Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user
adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and
video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this
synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction.
■ Bi-amplification connection
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker.
One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker
while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section.
With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted
frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a
much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the
sound in some way.
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated
into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the
chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this
system because each of these signals is independent. The component
signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with
component input jacks is required in order to output component
signals.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed
of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and
synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component
transmits these three elements combined.
■ Deep Color
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up
from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification.
This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays go from
millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color
banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between
colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more
shades of gray between black and white. Also Deep Color increases
the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the
RGB or YCbCr color space.
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you
completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels
(front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital
provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel
especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the
system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By
using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate
moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible
than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum
to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the
precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing
provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-
channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
■ Dolby Digital Surround EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-
channel sources.
For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie
sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic
moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “fly-
around” effects.
■ Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for
high-definition programming and media including HD broadcasts,
and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray
Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete
channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital
Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously.
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc
players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus
also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio
systems that incorporate Dolby Digital.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast
numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology
enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right
channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels
instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music
sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources.
There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources,
“Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and
“Game mode” for game sources.
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser
discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. Dolby Surround
uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and
dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a
center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for
special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder
built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance
moving sound effects and directionality.
■ Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed
for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected
as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology
delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering
a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8
discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing
multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of
Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range
control.
Glossary
72 En
Glossary
■ DSD
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on
digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals
are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of
2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to
reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization
of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality
can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal
audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz and the
dynamic range is 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive DSD
signals via the HDMI jack.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-
channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with
all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to
the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length.
DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion
video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD
video.
■ DTS Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks
of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly
gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has
developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of
sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in
your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel
sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right,
and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This
unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel
reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-
channel format.
■ DTS Express
This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Blu-
ray discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming.
In the case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio,
enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the
Internet while playing the main program.
■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio
technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including
Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc,
this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from
the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96
kHz audio simultaneously.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with
the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital
Surround.
■ DTS-HD Master Audio
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology
developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray
Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this
technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio
master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD
Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz
audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed
for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,
DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital
Surround.
■ HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-
supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing
an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver)
and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI
supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-
channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC
HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with
bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and
requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface
that meets the security requirements of content providers and system
operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website
at “http://www.hdmi.org/.”
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range
of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as
0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the
full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
■ Neural Surround
Neural Surround represents the latest advancement in surround
technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital
radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround
sound. Neural Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency domain
processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with
superior channel separation and localization of audio elements.
System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multi-channel surround
playback.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel
playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-
range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal
playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music
sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is
digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression.
This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM
system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the
analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the
signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while
the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric
value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that
can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while
the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is
determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher
the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be
played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more
finely the sound level can be reproduced.
■ “x.v.Color”
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more
extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors
that could not be expressed before. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color
space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is
particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics.
73 En
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Elements of a sound field
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable
us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting. There are
two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to
make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound
coming straight to our ears from the playerfs instrument.
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface (for example, from the walls, and/or the ceiling) so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic afterglow. They are nondirectional and lessen the
clarity of the direct sound.
■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed
for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having
many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,
such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound
heard.
Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP
provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening
room of your own home by using the Yamaha original sound field
technology combined with various digital audio systems.
■ CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the
information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate
height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate
and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening
room.
■ SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm
for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each
sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows
you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any
surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even
possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker
system that does not include a center speaker.
■ Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your
listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a
compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss
of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of
low-frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance
of the overall sound system.
Sound field program information
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberations taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening
environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those
of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually
any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will
is exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound
field processor.
74 En
■ HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
y
• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources with the audio
commentaries mixed down by using the following connections:
– multi-channel analog audio input (see page 16)
– DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL)
• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately.
Notes
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the component outputs the bitstream audio signals
directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details.
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD
DVD. This unit does not play back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents.
Video signals
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• 480i/60 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
Information on HDMI™
Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media
2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.
DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SA-CD, etc.
Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc.
Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD
Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.
75 En
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit supports the HDMI control function.
When a TV that supports the HDMI control function is
connected with this unit via the HDMI connection, the
following operations of this unit can be controlled with the
TV remote control (except for some TVs).
• Switching between on and standby (linked to the TV)
• Volume control (up/down, mute)
• Switching the sound output between a TV and this unit.
y
• If you connect this unit to an HDMI control-compatible DVD player or
Blu-ray Disc player via HDMI, you can also control the connected
component in synchronization with this unit (except some models).
You can turn on or off the HDMI control function from the
following setup menu item.
Control
Selects on or off of HDMI control function when a
component that supports the HDMI control function is
connected with this unit.
y
• When the HDMI control function is enabled, display of the following
items in “1 HDMI” of the setup menu turns off.
– Standby Through
– Audio Output
• During standby, the HDMI THROUGH indicator on the front panel
display lights up under the following conditions:
– The HDMI control function is enabled.
– An HDMI signal input to this unit passes through this unit and output.
See “Standby Through” or “Standby” (Setup menu → Function setup
→ 1 HDMI) on the manual for the details on the pass-through output of
an HDMI signal.
• While this unit is on standby with the HDMI control turned on, it
consumes 1 to 3W of power depending on a condition of an HDMI signal
passing through this unit.
y
• The HDMI control-compatible components include Panasonic VIERA
Link compatible TV, DVD player/recorder and Blu-ray Disc player.
• When a DVD recorder/Blu-ray recorder/HD DVD recorder that supports
the HDMI control function is connected via the HDMI connection, its
operations are also linked to those of this unit. For details, refer to its
operating instructions.
• We recommend that you use a TV, DVD recorder, Blu-ray recorder and
HD DVD recorder of the same manufacturer.
1 Connect a TV that supports the HDMI control
function to this unit via the HDMI connection.
2 Turn on all components connected to this
unit via the HDMI connection.
For details on operations of external components,
refer to their operating instructions.
3 Check the settings of those components and
enable the HDMI control function.
Bring up to setup menu, and set “Control” to “On.”
For details on settings of the external components,
refer to their operating instructions.
y
• You do not need to do step 1 through 3 from the second time.
4 Turn off the TV.
5 Check if all components connected via the
HDMI connection except for the TV are
turned on.
If they are turned off, turn them on.
6 Turn on the TV.
7 Set the input of the TV according to the
component connected to this unit such as
[HDMI].
8 Set the input of this unit to the DVD recorder
or Blu-ray recorder, and check if images from
the recorder appear normal.
9 Perform operations with the TV remote
control, such as switching this unit between
on and standby, adjusting the volume and
switching the sound output components.
y
• If this unit does not work, check the following. It may also work
normally after turning it off and back on or unplugging it and plugging it
back in.
– “Control” is set to “On.”
– The HDMI control function is enabled in the TV settings (refer to the
operating instructions of the TV).
Note
• If your monitor supports the HDMI control function, the scene of this
unit is automatically set to “TV” according to switching of input on the
monitor when the HDMI control function of this unit and the monitor are
turned on. AV1 input is assigned to “TV” by default. By connecting an
audio output terminal of the monitor to an optical digital terminal of
AV1, you can watch a movie or a TV program right away. When the
audio output of the monitor is connected to AV2-6, AUDIO1-2, and V-
AUX assign the input source for that terminal to “TV” with the SCENE
function.
Additional information
About the HDMI™ control function
Setup menu
Function Setup → 1 HDMI → Control
Choices: On/Off*
On Enables the HDMI control function.
Off Disables the HDMI control function.
Using the HDMI™ control function
When you use the HDMI control function, do the
following referring to the operating instructions of the TV.
• Turn on the HDMI control function on the TV.
• Connect the TV to this unit following the instructions
for connecting the TV to an AV amplifier.
76 En
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................... 90 W
[Other models]
1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω .......................................................... 90 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω .................................. 95/110/130/150 W
[Other models]
Front Speakers 6/4/2 Ω .......................................... 100/110/125 W
• Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA)
[Australia, General and Asia models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω ......................................................... 115 W
• Maximum Output Power [Russia and Asia models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 105 W
• Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models]
8 Ω.......................................................................................0.23 dB
• IEC Output Power [Russia and Asia models]
Front Speakers 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω ................................. 90 W
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO [Russia, Australia, General and Asia models]
............................................................................... 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
AV5, etc................................................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Voltage
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD)
[Russia, Australia, General and Asia models]
..............................................................................60 mV or more
AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ...................................2.0 V or more
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
AUDIO OUT.......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo & FRONT: Small)
................................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE2 OUT.......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω)................................ 100 mV/470 Ω
• Frequency Response
AV5 to FRONT ..................................10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
[Russia, Australia, General and Asia models]
PHONO .......................................................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to AUDIO OUT
[Russia, Australia, General and Asia models]
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V)............................................0.02% or less
AV5, etc. to FRONT, Pure Direct
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
(1 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)..................................................0.06% or less
[Other models]
(1 kHz, 50 W, 6 Ω)..................................................0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO Input Shorted (5.0 mV to AUDIO OUT)
[General model]
............................................................................... 80 dB or more
PHONO Input Shorted (5.0 mV to AUDIO OUT)
[Russia, Australia and Asia models]
............................................................................... 86 dB or more
AV5, etc. Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers)
............................................................................. 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front Speakers..........................................................150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (Input Shorted)
[Russia, Australia, General and Asia models]
.................................................................... 60 dB/55 dB or more
AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened)......................... 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Volume Control ................................... MUTE / –80 dB to +16.5 dB
• Tone Control (Front Speakers)
BASS Boost/Cut ................................................... ±10 dB at 50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency.................................................. 350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ............................................ ±10 dB at 20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency............................................ 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back: Small)
..................................................................................... 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer).......................................................... 24 dB/oct.
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Signal Type (Gray Back)
[U.S.A., Canada and General models]...................................NTSC
[Other models]..........................................................................PAL
• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) ........................... NTSC/PAL
• Signal Level
Composite................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video [Russia models]
....................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
Component.................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (CB/CR)
• Maximum Input Level ............................................ 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio ...................................................50 dB or more
• Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]
Component................................................. 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models] ......... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models].............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)
Mono................................................................... 3.0 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ............................................................... 74 dB/69 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ..................................................................... 0.3/0.3%
• Antenna Input (unbalanced) .......................................................75 Ω
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................ 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ...................530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models]...................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model] .................AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
[Australia model]................................................. AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[Russia model]..................................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model] .................................... AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ...................................270 W/320 VA
[Other models]...................................................................... 280 W
• Standby Power Consumption
Standby through off ....................................................0.2 W or less
Standby through on........................................................3 W or less
• Maximum Power Consumption
[Asia and General models] ................................................... 490 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ...................................435 x 151 x 364 mm
(17-1/8 x 6 x 14-3/8 in)
• Weight...................................................................... 8.5 kg (18.7 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Specifications
77 En
English
INTRODUCTION
APPENDIX
PREPARATION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Numerics
1 Dynamic Range, sound setup ......................53
1 HDMI, function setup .................................54
2 Display, function setup ................................55
2 Lipsync, sound setup ...................................54
2ch Stereo, sound field program ....................26
3 Volume, function setup ...............................55
3D DSP, sound field parameter ......................47
4 Input Rename, function setup .....................55
5.1-channel speaker layout .............................10
6.1-channel speaker layout .............................10
7.1-channel speaker layout .............................10
7ch Enhancer, sound field program ...............27
7ch Stereo, sound field program ....................27
■ A
A)Config, speaker setup .................................51
Action Game, sound field program ................26
Adaptive DRC, 3 Volume, function setup .....55
Adjusting high frequency sound ....................23
Adjusting low frequency sound .....................23
Advanced setup ..............................................60
Adventure, sound field program ....................25
All Channel Search mode,
SIRIUS satellite radio ................................36
All Channel Search mode,
XM satellite radio ......................................32
AM antenna connection .................................18
AM tuning ......................................................29
ANTENNA jacks, rear panel ...........................5
Aspect, 1 HDMI, function setup ....................54
AUDIO 1/2 jacks, rear panel ............................5
Audio and video player connection ................15
AUDIO jack ...................................................13
Audio jack ......................................................13
AUDIO L/R jack, front panel ...........................4
AUDIO OUT jacks, rear panel .........................5
Audio Output, 1 HDMI, function setup .........54
Audio player connection ................................16
Auto Delay, 2 Lipsync, sound setup ..............54
Auto Preset, OPTION menu ..........................45
Auto Setup (YPAO), troubleshooting ............69
Automatic setup .............................................19
AV 1-6 jacks, rear panel ...................................5
AV OUT jacks, rear panel ................................5
■ B
B)Level, speaker setup ...................................53
Basic operation, setup menu ..........................51
BI-AMP connection switch,
advanced setup ..........................................60
Bluetooth component playback ......................42
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
connection .................................................17
Bluetooth, troubleshooting .............................68
■ C
C)Distance, speaker setup ..............................53
C.Image, decoder parameter ..........................49
Category Search mode,
SIRIUS satellite radio ................................36
Category Search mode, XM satellite radio ....32
Cellar Club, sound field program ...................26
Center SP, A)Config, speaker setup ...............52
Center speaker ................................................10
Center width, decoder parameter ...................49
Center, C)Distance, speaker setup .................53
Chamber, sound field program .......................26
Changing information on the front panel
display .......................................................24
CINEMA DSP 3D indicator,
front panel display .......................................6
CINEMA DSP basic parameter .....................46
CINEMA DSP indicator, front panel display ..6
Clear Preset, OPTION menu ..........................45
COAXIAL jack ..............................................13
CODE SET, remote control ............................. 7
COMPONENT VIDEO jack ......................... 13
Connect, OPTION menu ............................... 45
Connecting AM antenna ................................ 18
Connecting audio and video player ............... 15
Connecting audio player ................................ 16
Connecting Bluetooth wireless audio
Receiver .................................................... 17
Connecting external amplifier ....................... 16
Connecting external decoder ......................... 16
Connecting FM antenna ................................. 18
Connecting iPod universal dock .................... 17
Connecting multi-format player .................... 16
Connecting power cable ................................ 18
Connecting projector ..................................... 14
Connecting set-top box .................................. 15
Connecting speaker ........................................ 11
Connecting speaker cable .............................. 12
Connecting the SiriusConnect ....................... 35
Connecting the SiriusConnect tuner .............. 35
Connecting TV monitor ................................. 14
Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock .....31
Connecting Zone2 .......................................... 57
Connection ..................................................... 10
Controlling other component,
remote control ........................................... 59
Controlling Zone2 .......................................... 58
Crossover Freq., A)Config, speaker setup ..... 53
CT Level, sound field parameter ................... 49
Cursor indicator, front panel display ............... 6
Cursors k / n / l / h, remote control ........... 7
■ D
D)Equalizer, speaker setup ............................ 53
Decoder Mode, OPTION menu ..................... 44
Decoder parameter ......................................... 49
Dialog Lift, sound field parameter ................. 47
Dimension, decoder parameter ...................... 49
Dimmer, 2 Display, function setup ................ 55
Direct number access mode,
SIRIUS satellite radio ............................... 36
Direct number access mode,
XM satellite radio ..................................... 32
Direct, sound field parameter ........................ 49
Disconnect, OPTION menu ........................... 45
DISPLAY, remote control ............................... 7
Displaying input signal information .............. 24
Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
information ................................................ 39
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information ................................................ 34
DOCK terminal, rear panel .............................. 5
Drama, sound field program .......................... 26
DSP Level, sound field parameter ................. 46
DSP Parameter, setup menu .......................... 56
■ E
E)Test Tone, speaker setup ............................ 53
Editing sound field program .......................... 46
Editing surround decoder ............................... 46
Effect Level, sound field parameter ............... 49
ENTER, remote control ................................... 7
EQ Type Select, D)Equalizer,
speaker setup ............................................. 53
Extended Surround, OPTION menu .............. 44
External component operation key,
remote control ............................................. 7
Extra SP Assign, A)Config, speaker setup .... 51
■ F
FL Scroll, 2 Display, function setup .............. 55
FM antenna connection .................................. 18
FM Mode, OPTION menu ............................. 44
FM tuning ...................................................... 29
FM/AM (CATEGORY l / h), front panel ... 4
Frequency tuning ........................................... 29
Front L, C)Distance, speaker setup ................ 53
Front left speaker ........................................... 10
Front panel ....................................................... 4
Front panel display .......................................... 6
Front panel display, front panel ....................... 4
Front R, C)Distance, speaker setup ............... 53
Front right speaker ........................................ 10
Front SP, A)Config, speaker setup ................ 52
Function Setup, setup menu .......................... 54
■ H
Hall in Munich, sound field program ............ 26
Hall in Vienna, sound field program ............. 26
HDMI Auto, 2 Lipsync, sound setup ............ 54
HDMI indicator, front panel display ............... 6
HDMI information ........................................ 74
HDMI jack ..................................................... 13
HDMI OUT/HDMI 1-4 terminals,
rear panel .................................................... 5
HDMI THROUGH, front panel ...................... 4
HDMI, troubleshooting ................................. 64
Headphones using ......................................... 23
Hi-fi sound playback ..................................... 23
High frequency sound adjustment ................. 23
■ I
INFO, front panel ............................................ 4
INFO, remote control ...................................... 7
INIT, advanced setup .................................... 60
Init. Volume, 3 Volume, function setup ........ 55
Initialize setting, advanced setup .................. 60
INPUT l / h, front panel .............................. 4
Input selection key, remote control ................. 7
Input signal information displaying .............. 24
Input source registration ................................ 22
Installing batteries, remote control .................. 9
iPod playback ................................................ 40
iPod universal dock connection ..................... 17
iPod, troubleshooting .................................... 68
■ L
LFE/Bass Out, A)Config, speaker setup ....... 52
Low frequency sound adjustment ................. 23
■ M
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, front panel ................ 4
MAIN/ZONE2, remote control ....................... 7
Manual Delay, 2 Lipsync, sound setup ......... 54
Max Volume, 3 Volume, function setup ....... 55
Memory guard, setup menu ........................... 56
MEMORY, front panel ................................... 4
MON.CHK, advanced setup .......................... 60
MONITOR OUT jack, rear panel ................... 5
Mono Movie, sound field program ............... 26
MULTI CH INPUT jacks, rear panel .............. 5
Multi information display,
front panel display ...................................... 6
Multi-zone configuration ............................... 57
Music Video, sound field program ................ 26
MUTE indicator, front panel display .............. 6
MUTE, remote control .................................... 7
■ N
Numeric key, remote control ........................... 7
■ O
OPTICAL jack .............................................. 13
OPTIMIZER MIC jack, front panel ................ 4
OPTION menu .............................................. 43
OPTION, remote control ................................. 7
OSD Shift, 2 Display, function setup ............ 55
■ P
Pairing Bluetooth components ...................... 42
Pairing, OPTION menu ................................. 45
Panorama, decoder parameter ....................... 49
Index
Index
78 En
Parental Lock, OPTION menu ...................... 45
PHONES jack, front panel ............................... 4
Placing speaker .............................................. 10
PORTABLE jack, front panel ......................... 4
Power cable connection ................................. 18
Power Cable, rear panel ................................... 5
POWER, remote control .................................. 7
PRE OUT jacks, rear panel .............................. 5
Presence left speaker ..................................... 11
Presence right speaker ................................... 11
PRESET l / h, front panel ........................... 4
Preset Search mode,
SIRIUS satellite radio ............................... 37
Preset Search mode, XM satellite radio ......... 33
Preset tuning .................................................. 29
PRNS L, C)Distance, speaker setup .............. 53
PRNS R, C)Distance, speaker setup .............. 53
PROGRAM l / h, front panel ...................... 4
Projector connection ...................................... 14
PURE DIRECT, front panel ............................ 4
■ R
Registering input source ................................ 22
Registering sound field program ................... 22
Registering the SIRIUS Satellite Radio
channels .................................................... 37
Registering XM Satellite Radio channels ...... 33
Remote control ................................................ 7
Remote control code resetting ....................... 59
Remote control code setting .......................... 59
Remote control ID, advanced setup ............... 60
Remote control signal transmitter,
remote control ............................................. 7
Remote control, controlling other
component ................................................. 59
Remote control, preparation ............................ 9
Remote control, troubleshooting ................... 67
REMOTE ID, advanced setup ....................... 60
REMOTE IN/OUT jack, rear panel ................. 5
Repeat playback, iPod ................................... 41
Repeat, OPTION menu .................................. 45
Resetting Parental lock cord,
advanced setup .......................................... 60
Resetting remote control code ....................... 59
Resolution, 1 HDMI, function setup ............. 54
RETURN, remote control ................................ 7
Roleplaying Game, sound field program ....... 26
■ S
SB Level, sound field parameter ................... 49
SCENE function ............................................ 22
SCENE IR, advanced setup ........................... 60
SCENE, front panel ......................................... 4
SCENE, remote control ................................... 7
Sci-Fi, sound field program ........................... 25
Selecting SCENE ........................................... 22
Setting remote control code ........................... 59
Setting the Parental Lock,
SIRIUS satellite radio ............................... 38
Set-top box connection .................................. 15
Setup menu .................................................... 50
Setup menu basic operation ........................... 51
SETUP, remote control ................................... 7
Shuffle playback, iPod ................................... 41
Shuffle, OPTION menu ................................. 45
Signal Info parameter .................................... 44
Signal Info, OPTION menu ........................... 44
SILENT CINEMA ......................................... 28
SIRIUS indicator, front panel display ............. 6
SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning ....................... 35
SIRIUS Satellite Radio, troubleshooting ....... 66
SIRIUS terminal, rear panel ............................ 5
SL Level, sound field parameter .................... 49
SLEEP indicator, front panel display .............. 6
Sleep timer ..................................................... 24
SLEEP, remote control .................................... 7
Sound field parameter .................................... 46
Sound field program editing .......................... 46
Sound field program registration ................... 22
Sound selection key, remote control ................7
Sound Setup, setup menu ...............................53
SOURCE POWER, remote control .................7
SP IMP., advanced setup ................................60
Speaker cable connection ...............................12
Speaker connection ........................................11
Speaker impedance, advanced setup ..............60
Speaker indicator, front panel display ..............6
Speaker layout ................................................10
Speaker placement .........................................10
Speaker setup .................................................51
SPEAKERS terminals, rear panel ....................5
Specifications .................................................76
Spectacle, sound field program ......................25
Sports, sound field program ...........................26
SR Level, sound field parameter ....................49
SR PIN, advanced setup .................................60
Standard, sound field program .......................25
Standby Through, 1 HDMI, function setup ...54
Straight decoding mode .................................28
Straight Enhancer, sound field program .........27
STRAIGHT, front panel ..................................4
Subwoofer ......................................................10
Subwoofer Phase, A)Config, speaker setup ...53
Sur. L, C)Distance, speaker setup ..................53
Sur. L/R SP, A)Config, speaker setup ...........52
Sur. R, C)Distance, speaker setup ..................53
Sur.B L, C)Distance, speaker setup ...............53
Sur.B L/R SP, A)Config, speaker setup .........52
Sur.B R, C)Distance, speaker setup ...............53
Surround back left speaker .............................10
Surround back right speaker ...........................10
Surround back speaker ...................................10
Surround decoder editing ...............................46
Surround left speaker .....................................10
Surround right speaker ...................................10
SWFR, C)Distance, speaker setup .................53
■ T
The Bottom Line, sound field program ..........26
The Roxy Theatre, sound field program ........26
Tone control ...................................................23
TONE CONTROL, front panel ........................4
TRANSMIT, remote control ............................7
TRIGGER OUT jack, rear panel ......................5
Troubleshooting .............................................61
Tuner indicator, front panel display .................6
Tuner key, remote control ................................7
Tuner, troubleshooting ...................................64
Tuning, AM ....................................................29
Tuning, FM ....................................................29
TUNING/CH l / h, front panel ....................4
Turning off .....................................................18
Turning on ......................................................18
TV control key, remote control ........................7
TV monitor connection ..................................14
■ U
Using the remote control ..................................9
■ V
VIDEO jack ....................................................13
Video jack ......................................................13
VIDEO jack, front panel ..................................4
Video Out, OPTION menu ............................45
Video/audio jack ............................................13
Virtual CINEMA DSP ...................................28
VOLUME +/–, remote control .........................7
VOLUME control, front panel .........................4
VOLUME indicator, front panel display .........6
Volume Trim, OPTION menu .......................43
■ X
XM indicator, front panel display ....................6
XM Satellite Radio tuning .............................31
XM Satellite Radio, troubleshooting .............65
XM terminal, rear panel ...................................5
■ Y
YPAO ............................................................ 19
YPAO, troubleshooting ................................. 69
■ Z
ZONE2 CONTROL, front panel ..................... 4
ZONE2 indicator, front panel display ............. 6
ZONE2 ON/OFF, front panel .......................... 4
ZONE2 OUT jacks, rear panel ........................ 5
“AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or
“gPOWER” (example) indicates
the name of the parts on the front
panel or the remote control. Refer
to “Part names and functions” on
page 4.
i
List of remote control codes
TV
A.R. Systems 0274
Acme 0260
Acura 0261, 0273
ADC 0259
Admiral 0100, 0224, 0257,
0258, 0259, 0264,
0265
Advent 0204
Adventura 0107
Adyson 0260, 0327, 0328
Agashi 0327, 0328
Agazi 0259
Aiko 0260, 0261, 0273,
0274, 0327, 0328
Aim 0274
Aiwa 0028, 0297
Akai 0063, 0096, 0101,
0205, 0231, 0261,
0262, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0327,
0328
Akiba 0262, 0274
Akura 0259, 0262, 0273,
0274
Alaron 0327
Alba 0243, 0260, 0261,
0262, 0266, 0269,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0294, 0300, 0327
Albatron 0222
Alcyon 0249
Alleron 0105
Allorgan 0328
Allstar 0268, 0274
America Action
0225
AMOi 0326
Amplivision 0243, 0260, 0275,
0328
Amstrad 0259, 0261, 0262,
0273, 0274
Amtron 0104
Anam 0225, 0261
Anam National
0102, 0104
Anglo 0261, 0273
Anitech 0249, 0259, 0261,
0273, 0274
Ansonic 0243, 0250, 0261,
0263, 0273, 0274
AOC 0072, 0090, 0096,
0103
Apex 0061, 0117, 0139
Arcam 0327, 0328
Arcam Delta 0260
Aristona 0268, 0271, 0274
Arthur Martin 0275
ASA 0257, 0265
Asberg 0249, 0268, 0274
Astra 0261
Asuka 0259, 0260, 0262,
0327, 0328
Atlantic 0260, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0327
Atori 0261, 0273
Auchan 0275
Audiosonic 0243, 0260, 0261,
0262, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0328
AudioTon 0243, 0260, 0328
Audiovox 0104, 0144, 0225
Ausind 0249
Autovox 0249, 0257, 0259,
0260, 0328
Aventura 0097
Awa 0327, 0328
Axion 0206
Baird 0328
Bang & Olufsen
0230, 0257
Basic Line 0261, 0262, 0268,
0273, 0274, 0328
Bastide 0260, 0328
Baur 0271, 0274
Bazin 0328
Beko 0243, 0269, 0274,
0282, 0351, 0357,
0372, 0380
Belcor 0090
Bell & Howell
0065, 0100
Benq 0051, 0160, 0315
Beon 0268, 0271, 0274
Best 0243
Bestar 0243, 0268, 0274
Binatone 0260, 0328
Blue Sky 0262, 0274
Blue Star 0270
Boots 0260, 0328
BPL 0270, 0274
Bradford 0104, 0225
Brandt 0267, 0272
Brillian 0228
Brinkmann 0274
Brionvega 0257, 0268, 0271,
0274
Britannia 0260, 0327, 0328
Brockwood 0090
Broksonic 0063, 0225
Bruns 0257
BTC 0262
Bush 0261, 0262, 0264,
0266, 0268, 0270,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0282, 0286, 0294,
0300, 0328, 0329,
0351, 0388, 0394,
0413
Candle 0072, 0090, 0096,
0107
Capsonic 0259
Carena 0274
Carnivale 0096
Carrefour 0266
Carver 0088
Cascade 0261, 0273, 0274
Casio 0317
Cathay 0268, 0271, 0274
CCE 0229, 0328
Celebrity 0057, 0101
Celera 0117
Centurion 0268, 0271, 0274
Century 0257
CGE 0243, 0249
Changhong 0117
Chimei 0323
Cimline 0261, 0273
Citizen 0072, 0085, 0090,
0096, 0104
City 0261, 0273
Clarion 0225
Clarivox 0271
Clatronic 0243, 0249, 0259,
0260, 0261, 0262,
0268, 0269, 0273,
0274, 0328
CMS 0327
CMS Hightec 0328
Coby 0151
Colortyme 0072, 0090
Commercial Solutions
0071
Concerto 0072, 0090
Concorde 0261, 0273
Condor 0243, 0260, 0268,
0269, 0273, 0274,
0327
Contec 0225, 0260, 0261,
0266, 0273, 0327
Contec/Cony 0094, 0104
Continental Edison
0267
Cosmel 0261, 0273
Craig 0104, 0225
Crosley 0088, 0119, 0249,
0257
Crown 0104, 0225, 0243,
0249, 0261, 0268,
0269, 0271, 0273,
0274
CS Electronics
0260, 0262, 0327
CTC Clatronic
0263
CTX 0159
Curtis Mathes 0065, 0071, 0072,
0085, 0088, 0090,
0096, 0099, 0224
CXC 0104, 0225
Cybertron 0262
Cytron 0202
Daewoo 0072, 0085, 0090,
0103, 0119, 0245,
0260, 0261, 0268,
0273, 0274, 0281,
0285, 0303, 0321,
0327, 0328, 0344,
0361, 0387
Dainichi 0262, 0327
Dansai 0259, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0327, 0328
Dantax 0243, 0271
Dawa 0274
Daytron 0072, 0085, 0090,
0261, 0273
De Graaf 0264
Decca 0260, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0328
Dell 0167, 0195
Denver 0308, 0312
Desmet 0268, 0271, 0274
Diamant 0274
Diamond 0327
DiamondVision
0213, 0221
Dimensia 0099
Disney 0137
Dixi 0261, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0328
Dream Vision 0415, 0416
DTS 0261, 0273
Dual 0260, 0274, 0328
Dual-Tec 0260, 0261
Dumont 0076, 0090, 0108,
0257, 0260, 0263,
0328
Durabrand 0077, 0097, 0133,
0225
Dux 0271
Dwin 0224
Dynatron 0268, 0271, 0274
Dynex 0181, 0182
Elbe 0243, 0250, 0274,
0328
Elcit 0257
Electa 0270
ELECTRO TECH
0261
Electroband 0057, 0101
Electrograph 0226
Electrohome 0072, 0090, 0101,
0102
Element 0180
Elin 0260, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0327
Elite 0262, 0268, 0274
Elman 0263
Elta 0261, 0273, 0327
Emerson 0065, 0072, 0077,
0082, 0085, 0090,
0094, 0095, 0097,
0104, 0105, 0119,
0225, 0243, 0257,
0274
Emprex 0200
Envision 0072, 0090, 0096
Epson 0156, 0201, 0309
Erres 0268, 0271, 0274
ESA 0097
ESC 0328
Etron 0261
Eurofeel 0328
Euro-Feel 0259
Euroline 0271
Euroman 0243, 0327, 0328
Euromann 0259, 0260, 0268,
0274
Europhon 0260, 0263, 0268,
0274, 0327, 0328
Expert 0275
Exquisit 0274
Fenner 0261, 0273
Ferguson 0267, 0271, 0272
Fidelity 0260, 0264, 0274,
0327
Filsai 0328
Finlandia 0264
Finlux 0249, 0257, 0260,
0263, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0328
FIRST LINE 0260, 0261, 0268
Firstline 0273, 0274, 0327,
0328
Fisher 0065, 0243, 0257,
0260, 0266, 0269,
0328
Flint 0268, 0274
Formenti 0249, 0257, 0258,
0260, 0271, 0327
Formenti/Phoenix
0327
Fortress 0257, 0258
Fraba 0243, 0274
Friac 0243
Frontech 0259, 0261, 0264,
0265, 0273, 0328
Fujitsu 0023, 0024, 0025,
0105, 0328
Fujitsu General
0328
ii
Fujitsu Siemens
0425, 0426, 0427,
0428, 0429
Funai 0033, 0034, 0035,
0036, 0037, 0097,
0104, 0105, 0225,
0259
Futuretech 0104, 0225
Galaxi 0269, 0274
Galaxis 0243, 0274
Gateway 0163, 0226, 0227
GBC 0261, 0266, 0273
GE 0069, 0071, 0072,
0073, 0077, 0090,
0099, 0102, 0106,
0112, 0131
Geant Casino 0275
GEC 0260, 0265, 0268,
0271, 0274, 0328
Geloso 0261, 0264, 0273
General Technic
0261, 0273
Genexxa 0262, 0265, 0268,
0274
GFM 0177, 0210
Giant 0328
Gibralter 0076, 0090, 0096,
0108
GoldHand 0327
Goldline 0274
GoldStar 0072, 0077, 0085,
0090, 0094, 0096,
0103, 0243, 0260,
0261, 0264, 0268,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0327, 0328
Goodmans 0164, 0259, 0261,
0266, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0322,
0328, 0395, 0399,
0412
Gorenje 0243, 0269
GPM 0262
GPX 0211
Gradiente 0162
Graetz 0265
Granada 0249, 0260, 0264,
0266, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0275, 0328
Grandin 0261, 0262, 0270,
0271
Gronic 0328
Grundig 0242, 0243, 0249,
0274, 0356
Grunpy 0104, 0105, 0225
Haier 0187, 0207
Halifax 0259, 0260, 0327,
0328
Hallmark 0072, 0077, 0090
Hampton 0260, 0327, 0328
Hanseatic 0243, 0250, 0260,
0261, 0266, 0268,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0328
Hantarex 0261, 0273, 0274
Hantor 0274
Harman/Kardon
0088
Harvard 0104, 0225
Harwood 0273, 0274
Havermy 0224
HCM 0259, 0260, 0261,
0270, 0273, 0274,
0328
Hema 0273, 0328
Hewlett Packard
0146
Higashi 0327
HiLine 0274
Hinari 0261, 0262, 0266,
0268, 0271, 0273,
0274
Hisawa 0262, 0270, 0275
Hisense 0165
Hitachi 0006, 0014, 0015,
0016, 0042, 0072,
0090, 0094, 0173,
0254, 0255, 0256,
0260, 0264, 0265,
0266, 0274, 0285,
0300, 0319, 0328,
0348, 0349, 0385,
0402, 0410
Hornyphon 0268, 0274
Hoshai 0262
Huanyu 0260, 0327
Hygashi 0260, 0327, 0328
Hyper 0260, 0261, 0273,
0327, 0328
Hypson 0259, 0260, 0268,
0270, 0271, 0274,
0275, 0328
Hyundai 0223
Iberia 0274
ICE 0259, 0260, 0261,
0262, 0268, 0273,
0274, 0327, 0328
ICeS 0327
Ilo 0198, 0203
IMA 0104
Imperial 0243, 0249, 0265,
0268, 0269, 0274
Indiana 0268, 0271, 0274
Infinity 0088
InFocus 0168, 0277, 0313,
0397, 0430
Ingelen 0265
Ingersol 0261, 0273
Initial 0203
Inno Hit 0249, 0260, 0261,
0262, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0328
Innovation 0259, 0261
Insignia 0182, 0188, 0190,
0209
Inteq 0076
Interactive 0243
Interbuy 0261, 0273
Interfunk 0243, 0257, 0265,
0268, 0271, 0274
International 0327
Intervision 0243, 0259, 0260,
0263, 0274, 0328
Irradio 0249, 0261, 0262,
0268, 0271, 0273,
0274
Isukai 0262, 0274
ITC 0260, 0328
ITS 0262, 0268, 0270,
0274, 0327
ITT 0261, 0265
ITV 0261, 0271, 0274
Janeil 0107
JBL 0088
JC Penney 0072, 0073, 0085,
0090, 0099, 0103,
0106
JCB 0057, 0101
Jensen 0072, 0090
JVC 0017, 0018, 0019,
0092, 0093, 0094,
0106, 0251, 0252,
0266, 0268, 0293,
0360, 0379
Kaisui 0260, 0261, 0262,
0270, 0273, 0274,
0327, 0328
Kamosonic 0260
Kamp 0260, 0327
Kapsch 0265
Karcher 0243, 0260, 0261,
0271, 0274
Kawasho 0072, 0090, 0101,
0327
KEC 0225
Kendo 0243, 0263, 0264,
0274
Kenwood 0072, 0090, 0096
KIC 0328
Kingsley 0260, 0327
KLH 0117
Kloss Novabeam
0104, 0107
Kneissel 0243, 0250, 0274
Kolster 0268, 0274
Konka 0262
Korpel 0268, 0271, 0274
Korting 0243, 0257
Kosmos 0274
Koyoda 0261
KTV 0085, 0096, 0104,
0225, 0229, 0260,
0328
Kyoto 0327, 0328
Lasat 0243
Lenco 0261, 0273
Lenoir 0260, 0261, 0273
Leyco 0259, 0268, 0271,
0274
LG 0016, 0038, 0039,
0077, 0103, 0145,
0222, 0243, 0246,
0253, 0260, 0261,
0264, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0282,
0290, 0299, 0316,
0327, 0328, 0351,
0359, 0367, 0382,
0384, 0389, 0396
LG/GoldStar 0246
Liesenk 0271
Liesenkotter 0274
Life 0259, 0261
Lifetec 0259, 0261, 0273,
0274
Lloyds 0273
Loewe 0243, 0250, 0274,
0280, 0306, 0347
Loewe Opta 0257, 0268, 0271
Logik 0100
Luma 0264, 0271, 0273,
0274
Lumatron 0264, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0328
Lux May 0268
Luxman 0072, 0090
Luxor 0260, 0264, 0328
LXI 0061, 0065, 0071,
0072, 0073, 0077,
0088, 0099
M Electronic 0260, 0261, 0265,
0267, 0268, 0271
MAG 0050
Magnadyne 0257, 0263, 0271
Magnafon 0249, 0260, 0263,
0327
Magnavox 0072, 0088, 0090,
0091, 0095, 0096,
0098, 0114, 0115,
0129, 0134, 0176,
0178, 0189, 0210
Magnum 0259, 0261
Majestic 0100
Mandor 0259
Manesth 0259, 0260, 0268,
0271, 0274, 0328
Marantz 0072, 0088, 0090,
0096, 0158, 0268,
0271, 0274
Marelli 0257
Mark 0268, 0271, 0273,
0274, 0327, 0328
Masuda 0328
Matsui 0260, 0261, 0264,
0266, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0328,
0405
Matsushita 0067
Maxent 0193, 0226
Mediator 0268, 0271, 0274
Medion 0259, 0261, 0274
Megapower 0222
Megatron 0072, 0077
MElectronic 0273, 0274, 0327,
0328
Melvox 0275
Memorex 0065, 0072, 0077,
0100, 0103, 0133,
0219, 0261, 0273
Memphis 0261, 0273
Mercury 0273, 0274
Metz 0257
MGA 0072, 0077, 0090,
0096, 0103
Micromaxx 0259, 0261
Microstar 0259, 0261
Midland 0069, 0071, 0073,
0076, 0085, 0106,
0108
Minerva 0249
Minoka 0268, 0274
Mintek 0203
Mitsubishi 0006, 0015, 0016,
0048, 0072, 0077,
0090, 0103, 0196,
0224, 0257, 0266,
0268, 0274, 0298,
0371
Mivar 0243, 0249, 0250,
0260, 0327, 0328
Monivision 0222
Montgomery Ward
0100
Motion 0249
Motorola 0102, 0224
MTC 0072, 0090, 0096,
0103, 0243, 0327
Multi System 0271
Multitech 0104, 0225, 0229,
0243, 0260, 0261,
0263, 0264, 0266,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0327, 0328
Murphy 0260, 0327
NAD 0061, 0072, 0077
Naonis 0264
NEC 0026, 0053, 0072,
0090, 0096, 0102,
0103, 0266, 0328
iii
Neckermann 0243, 0257, 0260,
0264, 0268, 0269,
0271, 0274, 0328
NEI 0268, 0271, 0274
Net-TV 0226
Neufunk 0273, 0274
New Tech 0261, 0268
New World 0262
NewTech 0273, 0274, 0328
Nicamagic 0260, 0327
Nikkai 0259, 0260, 0262,
0268, 0271, 0273,
0274, 0327, 0328
Nikko 0072, 0077, 0096
Nobliko 0249, 0260, 0263,
0327
Nokia 0265
Norcent 0155
Nordic 0328
Nordmende 0257, 0265, 0267,
0268
Nordvision 0271
Novatronic 0274
Oceanic 0265, 0275
Okano 0243, 0269, 0274
Olevia 0052, 0140, 0149,
0154, 0157
ONCEAS 0260
Onwa 0104, 0225
Opera 0274
Oppo 0208
Optimus 0065, 0067
Optoma 0194
Optonica 0224
Orbit 0268, 0274
Orion 0121, 0192, 0261,
0268, 0271, 0273,
0274, 0282, 0329
Orline 0274
Osaki 0259, 0260, 0262,
0274, 0328
Oso 0262
Otto Versand 0258, 0260, 0266,
0268, 0270, 0271,
0274, 0328
Pael 0260, 0327
Palladium 0243, 0260, 0269,
0274, 0328
Palsonic 0328
Panama 0259, 0260, 0261,
0273, 0274, 0327,
0328
Panasonic 0006, 0007, 0066,
0067, 0068, 0069,
0070, 0102, 0106,
0113, 0147, 0215,
0241, 0265, 0274,
0279, 0310, 0332,
0334, 0368, 0374
Panavision 0274
Pathe Cinema 0243, 0250, 0260,
0275, 0327
Pausa 0261, 0273
Penney 0061, 0069, 0071,
0077, 0096
Perdio 0274, 0327
Perfekt 0274
Philco 0072, 0088, 0090,
0091, 0094, 0096,
0102, 0103, 0243,
0249, 0257, 0274
Philharmonic 0260, 0328
Philips 0040, 0088, 0089,
0090, 0091, 0094,
0098, 0099, 0102,
0114, 0135, 0143,
0176, 0178, 0189,
0210, 0212, 0232,
0233, 0257, 0260,
0268, 0271, 0274,
0278, 0287, 0301,
0302, 0307, 0311,
0314, 0330, 0331,
0333, 0337, 0338,
0339, 0341, 0343,
0345, 0355, 0363,
0365, 0377, 0378,
0381, 0383, 0406,
0409, 0414
Philips Magnavox
0089, 0114, 0115
Phoenix 0243, 0257, 0268,
0271, 0274, 0327
Phonola 0257, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0327
Pilot 0085, 0090, 0096
Pioneer 0012, 0013, 0072,
0090, 0243, 0265,
0267, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0408
Plantron 0259, 0268, 0273,
0274
Playsonic 0328
Polaroid 0117, 0152, 0184,
0220
Poppy 0261, 0273
Portland 0072, 0085, 0090,
0103
Prandoni-Prince
0249, 0264
Precision 0260, 0328
Prima 0161, 0207, 0261,
0265, 0273
Princeton 0222
Prism 0069, 0106
Profex 0261, 0273
Profi-Tronic 0268, 0274
Proline 0268, 0274
Proscan 0071, 0073, 0099
Prosonic 0243, 0260, 0271,
0274, 0327, 0328
Protech 0259, 0260, 0261,
0263, 0268, 0271,
0328
Proton 0072, 0077, 0090,
0094
Protron 0150
PROVIEW 0050, 0164
Provision 0271, 0274
Pulsar 0076, 0090, 0108
Pye 0268, 0271, 0274,
0296, 0338
Pymi 0261, 0273
Quandra Vision
0275
Quasar 0067, 0069, 0102,
0106
Quelle 0259, 0260, 0268,
0271, 0274, 0328
Questa 0266
Radialva 0274
RadioShack 0065, 0071, 0077,
0096, 0225, 0274
RadioShack/Realistic
0072, 0085, 0090,
0094, 0099, 0104
Radiola 0268, 0271, 0274,
0328
Radiomarelli 0257, 0274
Radiotone 0243, 0268, 0273,
0274
Rank 0266
RCA 0071, 0072, 0073,
0074, 0075, 0090,
0099, 0102, 0103,
0109, 0120, 0179,
0218
Realistic 0065, 0077, 0096,
0225
Recor 0274
Redstar 0274
Reflex 0274
Revox 0243, 0268, 0271,
0274
Rex 0259, 0264, 0265
RFT 0243, 0250, 0257
Rhapsody 0327
R-Line 0268, 0271, 0274
Roadstar 0259, 0261, 0262,
0273
Robotron 0257
Rowa 0327, 0328
Royal Lux 0243
RTF 0257
Runco 0076, 0096, 0108
Saba 0257, 0265, 0267,
0272, 0376
Saisho 0259, 0260, 0261,
0273, 0328
Salora 0264, 0265
Sambers 0249, 0263
Sampo 0072, 0085, 0090,
0096, 0226
Samsung 0029, 0030, 0031,
0032, 0044, 0045,
0046, 0047, 0072,
0077, 0084, 0085,
0086, 0087, 0090,
0094, 0096, 0103,
0118, 0217, 0229,
0235, 0236, 0237,
0243, 0259, 0260,
0261, 0268, 0269,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0284, 0295, 0327,
0328, 0336, 0346,
0390, 0407
Sandra 0260, 0327, 0328
Sansui 0063, 0121, 0268,
0274
Sanyo 0020, 0021, 0022,
0049, 0065, 0090,
0141, 0191, 0243,
0250, 0260, 0266,
0273, 0291, 0327,
0328, 0370, 0373,
0391
SBR 0271, 0274
Sceptre 0166, 0185
Schaub Lorenz
0265
Schneider 0260, 0262, 0268,
0271, 0274, 0287,
0300, 0328, 0364,
0366
Scotch 0072, 0077
Scott 0072, 0077, 0090,
0094, 0104, 0105,
0199, 0225
Sears 0061, 0065, 0071,
0072, 0073, 0077,
0088, 0090, 0097,
0099, 0105
SEG 0259, 0260, 0263,
0266, 0271, 0273,
0274, 0300, 0327,
0328
SEI 0274
SEI-Sinudyne 0257, 0263, 0265
Seleco 0264, 0265, 0266
Sencora 0261, 0273
Sentra 0273
Serino 0327
Sharp 0009, 0010, 0011,
0072, 0080, 0081,
0082, 0083, 0085,
0090, 0094, 0110,
0148, 0183, 0216,
0224, 0247, 0248,
0258, 0266, 0288,
0304, 0324, 0325,
0340, 0358, 0362,
0369, 0386, 0392,
0398, 0400, 0401,
0403
Sheng Chia 0224
Shogun 0090
Siarem 0257, 0263, 0274
Sierra 0268, 0274
Siesta 0243
Signature 0100
Silva 0327
Silver 0266
Singer 0257, 0263, 0275
Sinudyne 0257, 0263, 0271,
0274
Skantic 0265
Solavox 0265
Sonitron 0243, 0328
Sonoko 0259, 0260, 0261,
0268, 0271, 0273,
0274, 0328
Sonolor 0265, 0275
Sontec 0243, 0268, 0271,
0274
Sony 0041, 0057, 0058,
0059, 0060, 0101,
0116, 0125, 0126,
0127, 0142, 0169,
0170, 0171, 0172,
0174, 0234, 0261,
0266, 0276, 0289,
0292, 0393, 0411
Sound & Vision
0262, 0263
Soundesign 0072, 0077, 0090,
0104, 0105, 0225
Soundwave 0268, 0271, 0274
Squareview 0097
SSS 0090, 0104, 0225
Standard 0260, 0261, 0262,
0268, 0273, 0274,
0328
Starlite 0104, 0225, 0271,
0273, 0274
Stenway 0270
Stern 0264, 0265
Strato 0273, 0274
Stylandia 0328
Sunkai 0261
Sunstar 0273, 0274
Sunwood 0261, 0268, 0273,
0274
Superla 0260, 0327, 0328
Superscan 0095, 0224
SuperTech 0273, 0274, 0327
Supra 0261, 0273
Supre-Macy 0107
Supreme 0057, 0101
Susumu 0262
Sutron 0261, 0273
SVA 0197
Sydney 0260, 0327, 0328
iv
Sylvania 0072, 0088, 0089,
0090, 0091, 0095,
0096, 0097, 0098,
0175, 0177, 0210
Symphonic 0097, 0104, 0108,
0133, 0210, 0225
Syntax 0149
Syntax-Brillian
0149
Sysline 0271
Sytong 0327
Tandy 0224, 0258, 0260,
0262, 0265, 0328
Tashiko 0260, 0264, 0266,
0327, 0328
Tatung 0102, 0227, 0260,
0268, 0271, 0274,
0328
TCM 0259, 0261
Teac 0274, 0328
Tec 0260, 0261, 0273,
0328
Technics 0067, 0069, 0106
TechniSat 0320, 0417, 0418,
0419
Techwood 0069, 0072, 0090,
0106
TEDELEX 0328
Teknika 0072, 0085, 0088,
0090, 0094, 0100,
0103, 0104, 0105,
0225
Teleavia 0267
Telecor 0274, 0328
Telefunken 0267, 0268, 0272,
0274
Telegazi 0274
Telemeister 0274
Telesonic 0274
Telestar 0274
Teletech 0261, 0271, 0273,
0274
Teleton 0260, 0328
Televideon 0327
Televiso 0275
Tensai 0261, 0262, 0268,
0273, 0274, 0328
Tesmet 0268
Tevion 0259, 0261
Texet 0260, 0273, 0327,
0328
Thomson 0238, 0239, 0240,
0260, 0267, 0268,
0272, 0274, 0335
Thorn 0271, 0274
TMK 0072, 0077, 0090
TNCi 0076
Tokai 0268, 0274, 0328
Tokyo 0260, 0327
Tomashi 0270
Toshiba 0027, 0043, 0053,
0054, 0061, 0062,
0063, 0064, 0065,
0122, 0123, 0124,
0128, 0130, 0132,
0139, 0214, 0244,
0266, 0283, 0305,
0328, 0329, 0342,
0350, 0352, 0353,
0354, 0375, 0404
Totevision 0085
Towada 0265, 0328
Trakton 0328
Trans Continens
0274, 0328
Transtec 0327
Trident 0328
Triumph 0274
Uher 0243, 0249, 0265,
0268, 0274
Ultravox 0257, 0260, 0263,
0274, 0327
Unic Line 0274
United 0271
Universum 0243, 0249, 0259,
0268, 0269, 0271,
0274, 0328
Univox 0274
Vector Research
0096
Vestel 0264, 0265, 0268,
0269, 0271, 0274,
0328
Vexa 0261, 0271, 0273,
0274
Victor 0093, 0266, 0268
VIDEOLOGIC
0327
Videologique 0260, 0262, 0327,
0328
VideoSystem 0268, 0274
Videotechnic 0327, 0328
Vidikron 0088
Vidtech 0072, 0077, 0090,
0103
Viewsonic 0153, 0186, 0226,
0318
Viking 0107
Viore 0198
Visiola 0260, 0327
Vision 0268, 0274, 0328
Vizio 0090, 0136, 0160,
0227, 0420, 0421,
0422, 0423, 0424
Vortec 0268, 0271, 0274
Voxson 0249, 0257, 0264,
0265, 0268, 0274
Waltham 0260, 0274, 0328
Wards 0072, 0077, 0088,
0090, 0091, 0096,
0098, 0099, 0100,
0103, 0105
Watson 0268, 0271, 0274
Watt Radio 0260, 0263, 0327
Waycon 0061
Wega 0257, 0266, 0274
Wegavox 0273
Weltblick 0268, 0271, 0274,
0328
Westinghouse 0057, 0138, 0142
White Westinghouse
0008, 0119, 0260,
0263, 0271, 0274,
0327
Wincom 0055, 0056
Xrypton 0274
Yamaha 0000, 0001, 0002,
0003, 0004, 0005,
0072, 0090, 0096,
0103
Yamishi 0274, 0328
Yokan 0274
Yoko 0243, 0259, 0260,
0261, 0262, 0268,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0327, 0328
Yorx 0262
Zanussi 0264, 0328
Zenith 0076, 0077, 0078,
0079, 0090, 0100,
0108, 0111
VCR
ABS 1066
Adventura 1023
Adyson 1090
Aiwa 1023, 1072, 1073,
1074
Akai 1071, 1073
Akiba 1079, 1090
Akura 1073, 1079, 1090
Alba 1074, 1075, 1076,
1079, 1090, 1091
Alienware 1066
Ambassador 1076
American High
1022
Amstrad 1072, 1090, 1091
Anitech 1079, 1090
Apex 1010
ASA 1077, 1078
Asha 1020
Asuka 1072, 1077, 1078,
1079, 1090
Audio Dynamics
1018
Audiosonic 1091
Audiovox 1021
Baird 1072, 1073, 1075,
1091
Bang & Olufsen
1067
Basic Line 1074, 1075, 1076,
1079, 1090, 1091
Baur 1078
Beaumark 1020
Bell & Howell
1019
Bestar 1075, 1076, 1091
Black Panther Line
1075, 1091
Blaupunkt 1078
Bondstec 1076, 1090
Broksonic 1054
Bush 1074, 1075, 1079,
1090, 1091, 1097,
1099, 1109, 1139
Calix 1021
Candle 1020, 1021
Canon 1022
Cathay 1091
Catron 1076
CGE 1072, 1073
Cimline 1074, 1079, 1090
CineVision 1058
Citizen 1020, 1021
Clatronic 1076, 1090
Colortyme 1018
Condor 1075, 1076, 1091
Craig 1020, 1021
Crown 1075, 1076, 1079,
1090, 1091
Curtis Mathes 1018, 1020, 1022
Cybernex 1020
CyberPower 1066
Daewoo 1023, 1075, 1076,
1091, 1116, 1141
Dansai 1079, 1090, 1091
Dantax 1074
Daytron 1075, 1091
DBX 1018
De Graaf 1078
Decca 1072, 1073, 1078
Dell 1066
Denko 1090
DiamondVision
1050
DigiFusion 1092
DIRECTV 1035, 1038, 1040,
1059, 1060, 1061,
1065
Dish Network 1064
Dishpro 1064
Dual 1073, 1078, 1091
Dumont 1072, 1078
Durabrand 1032
Dynatech 1023
Echostar 1064
Elbe 1091
Elcatech 1090
Electrohome 1021
Electrophonic 1021
Elsay 1090
Elta 1079, 1090, 1091
Emerson 1021, 1022, 1023,
1070, 1090
ESC 1075, 1091
Etzuko 1079, 1090
Expressvu 1064
Ferguson 1073
Fidelity 1072, 1090
Finlandia 1078
Finlux 1072, 1073, 1078
Firstline 1074, 1077, 1079,
1090
Fisher 1019
Flint 1074
Formenti/Phoenix
1078
Frontech 1076
Fuji 1022
Fujitsu 1072
Funai 1023, 1072
Galaxy 1072
Garrard 1023
Gateway 1066
GBC 1076, 1079
GE 1020, 1022
GEC 1078
Geloso 1079
General 1076
General Technic
1074
GOI 1064
GoldHand 1079, 1090
Goldstar 1018, 1021, 1072,
1077
Goodmans 1072, 1075, 1076,
1077, 1079, 1090,
1091
Gradiente 1023
Graetz 1073
Granada 1078
Grandin 1072, 1075, 1076,
1077, 1079, 1090,
1091
Grundig 1078, 1079
Hanseatic 1077, 1078, 1091
Harley Davidson
1023
Harman/Kardon
1018
Harwood 1090
HCM 1079, 1090
Headquarter 1019
Hewlett Packard
1066
Hinari 1074, 1079, 1090,
1091
Hisawa 1074
Hitachi 1072, 1073, 1078,
1089, 1108, 1124
HNS 1060
Howard Computers
1066
HP 1066
HTS 1064
Hughes 1035, 1040, 1061
Hughes Network Systems
1038, 1060
Humax 1035, 1060, 1094
Hush 1066
Hypson 1074, 1079, 1090,
1091
v
iBUYPOWER 1066
Impego 1076
Imperial 1072
Inno Hit 1075, 1076, 1078,
1079, 1090, 1091
Innovation 1074
Instant Replay 1022
Interbuy 1077, 1090
Interfunk 1078
Intervision 1072, 1091
Irradio 1077, 1079, 1090
ITT 1073
ITV 1075, 1077, 1091
JC Penney 1018, 1019, 1020,
1021, 1022
JCL 1022
JVC 1011, 1012, 1013,
1014, 1015, 1016,
1017, 1018, 1019,
1028, 1035, 1064,
1073, 1085, 1117,
1130, 1131, 1133,
1134, 1135, 1136
Kaisui 1079, 1090
Karcher 1078
Kendo 1074, 1075, 1076,
1090
Kenwood 1018, 1019, 1073
Kodak 1021, 1022
Korpel 1079, 1090
Kyoto 1090
Lenco 1075
Leyco 1079, 1090
LG 1021, 1053, 1072,
1077, 1088, 1100,
1106, 1125, 1143
Lifetec 1074
Linksys 1066
Lloyd’s 1023
Loewe Opta 1077, 1078
Logik 1079, 1090
Lumatron 1075, 1091
Luxor 1090
LXI 1021
M Electronic 1072
Magnavox 1022, 1032, 1044,
1070
Magnin 1021
Manesth 1079, 1090
Marantz 1018, 1019, 1022,
1078
Mark 1091
Marta 1021
Matsui 1074, 1077
Matsushita 1022
Media Center PC
1066
Mediator 1078
Medion 1074
MEI 1022
Memorex 1019, 1020, 1021,
1022, 1023, 1032,
1048, 1069, 1072,
1077
Memphis 1079, 1090
MGN Technology
1020
Micromaxx 1074
Microsoft 1066
Microstar 1074
Migros 1072
Mind 1066
Mitsubishi 1029, 1072, 1078
Motorola 1022
MTC 1020
Multitech 1020, 1023, 1072,
1076, 1078, 1079,
1090
Murphy 1072
NEC 1018, 1019, 1073
Neckermann 1073, 1078
NEI 1078
Nesco 1079, 1090
Nikkai 1076, 1090, 1091
Nikko 1021
Niveus Media 1066
Noblex 1020
Nokia 1073, 1091
Nordmende 1073
Northgate 1066
Oceanic 1072, 1073
Okano 1074, 1090, 1091
Olympus 1022
Optimus 1021
Orion 1033, 1069, 1074,
1097, 1139
Orson 1072
Osaki 1072, 1077, 1079,
1090
Otto Versand 1078
Palladium 1073, 1077, 1079,
1090
Panasonic 1007, 1008, 1009,
1022, 1026, 1042,
1043, 1068, 1082,
1101, 1126, 1132
Pathe Marconi 1073
Perdio 1072
Philco 1022, 1090
Philips 1022, 1030, 1035,
1038, 1039, 1040,
1044, 1055, 1060,
1078, 1084, 1095,
1096, 1104, 1105,
1111, 1113, 1122,
1124, 1127, 1128,
1129
Philips Magnavox
1030
Phonola 1078
Pilot 1021
Pioneer 1078, 1118
Polaroid 1010, 1049
Portland 1075, 1076, 1091
Prinz 1072
Profex 1079
Proline 1072
Proscan 1065
Prosonic 1074, 1091
Pulsar 1032
Pye 1052, 1078
Quarter 1019
Quartz 1019
Quasar 1022
Quelle 1072, 1078
Radialva 1090
RadioShack 1021
RadioShack/Realistic
1019, 1020, 1021,
1022, 1023
Radiola 1078
Radix 1021
Randex 1021
RCA 1020, 1022, 1025,
1035, 1040, 1047,
1060, 1065
Realistic 1019, 1020, 1021,
1022, 1023
ReplayTV 1041, 1068
Rex 1073
RFT 1076, 1078, 1090
Ricavision 1066
Roadstar 1075, 1077, 1079,
1090, 1091
Royal 1090
Runco 1032
Saba 1073
Saisho 1074, 1079
Samsung 1006, 1020, 1038,
1040, 1046, 1060,
1080, 1107, 1110,
1112, 1121, 1123,
1140, 1142
Samurai 1076, 1090
Sanky 1032
Sansui 1033, 1056, 1069,
1073
Sanyo 1019, 1020, 1114
Saville 1091
SBR 1078
Schaub Lorenz
1072, 1073
Schneider 1072, 1074, 1075,
1076, 1077, 1078,
1079, 1090, 1091
Sears 1019, 1021, 1022
SEG 1079, 1090, 1091
SEI-Sinudyne 1078
Seleco 1073
Sentra 1076, 1090
Sentron 1079, 1090
Sharp 1031, 1045, 1057,
1081, 1115, 1137
Shintom 1079, 1090
Shivaki 1077
Shogun 1020
Siemens 1077
Silva 1077
Silver 1091
Singer 1022
Sinudyne 1078
Solavox 1076
Sonic Blue 1041, 1068
Sonneclair 1090
Sonoko 1075, 1091
Sontec 1077
Sony 1000, 1001, 1002,
1003, 1024, 1027,
1036, 1062, 1066,
1083, 1098, 1103,
1138
Stack 1066
Stack 9 1066
Standard 1075, 1091
Stern 1091
STS 1022
Sunkai 1074
Sunstar 1072
Suntronic 1072
Sunwood 1079, 1090
Superscan 1070
Sylvania 1022, 1023, 1044,
1052, 1070
Symphonic 1023, 1044, 1090
Systemax 1066
Tagar System s 1066
Taisho 1074
Tandberg 1091
Tandy 1019
Tashiko 1021, 1072
Tatung 1072, 1073, 1078
TCM 1074, 1093, 1120
Teac 1023, 1091
Tec 1076, 1090, 1091
Technics 1022
Teknika 1021, 1022, 1023
Teleavia 1073
Telefunken 1073
Teletech 1090, 1091
Tenosal 1079, 1090
Tensai 1072, 1077, 1079,
1090
Tevion 1074
Thomson 1073, 1087
Thorn 1073
Tivo 1035, 1036, 1037,
1039, 1040, 1060,
1061, 1062
TMK 1020
Tokai 1077, 1079, 1090
Tonsai 1079
Toshiba 1004, 1005, 1034,
1051, 1063, 1066,
1073, 1078, 1086,
1099, 1102, 1119,
1144
Totevision 1020, 1021
Touch 1066
Towada 1079, 1090
Towika 1079, 1090
TVA 1076
Uher 1077
UltimateTV 1065
Ultravox 1091
Unitech 1020
United Quick Star
1075, 1091
Universum 1072, 1077, 1078
Vector Research
1018
Video Concepts
1018
Videon 1074
Videosonic 1020
Viewsonic 1066
Voodoo 1066
Wards 1020, 1021, 1022,
1023
Weltblick 1077
XR-1000 1022, 1023
Yamaha 1018, 1019
Yamishi 1079, 1090
Yokan 1079, 1090
Yoko 1076, 1077, 1079,
1090
Zenith 1032
ZT Group 1066
DVD
4Kus 2097
Accurian 2220
Advent 2169, 2201
AEG 2312
Airis 2318
Aiwa 2272
Akai 2170, 2195, 2225,
2227
Akura 2310
Alba 2018, 2232, 2247,
2259, 2264
Alco 2199
Alize 2315
Allegro 2215
Amitech 2312
Amphion MediaWorks
2145
AMW 2145, 2313
Apex 2044, 2045, 2046,
2047, 2076, 2208,
2209
Apple 2163
Arrgo 2216
Asono 2318
Aspire 2140, 2202
Astar 2162
vi
ATACOM 2318
Audiovox 2111, 2199
Avious 2317
Awa 2313
Axion 2171
Bang & Olufsen
2210
Baze 2317
BBK 2318
Bellagio 2313
Best Buy 2309
Blaupunkt 2209
Blue Parade 2207
Boghe 2300
Brainwave 2312
Brandt 2198, 2238
Broksonic 2192, 2195
Bush 2018, 2060, 2248,
2264, 2301, 2308,
2317, 2350, 2368
California Audio Labs
2197
Cambridge Audio
2304
CAT 2306, 2307
CAVS 2146
Centrum 2307
CGV 2304, 2312
Changhong 2222
Cinetec 2313
CineVision 2191, 2215
Clatronic 2308, 2317
Coby 2077, 2124, 2314
Conia 2301
Continental Edison
2313
Crown 2312
C-Tech 2305
Curtis Mathes 2217
CVG 2299
CyberHome 2048, 2068, 2216,
2233, 2258
Cytron 2166
Daenyx 2313
Daewoo 2083, 2215, 2280,
2299, 2312, 2313,
2326, 2376
Daewoo International
2313
Dalton 2311
Dansai 2303, 2312
Daytek 2145, 2234, 2313
Dayton 2313
DEC 2308
Decca 2312
Denon 2105, 2147, 2197,
2286
Denver 2288, 2308, 2310,
2314
Denzel 2302
Desay 2159
Diamond 2304, 2305
DiamondVision
2179, 2186
Disney 2078, 2088
DK Digital 2257
Dmtech 2226
Dual 2302
Durabrand 2218
DVX 2305
Easy Home 2309
Eclipse 2304
E-Dem 2318
Electrohome 2312
Elin 2312
Elta 2263, 2312, 2315
Emerson 2196, 2211, 2219
Enterprise 2211
Enzer 2302
Epson 2165
ESA 2219
Finlux 2304, 2312, 2317
Fintec 2299
Fisher 2212
Funai 2219
Gateway 2097
GE 2079, 2206, 2209
Gericom 2269
GFM 2176
Giec 2300
Global Solutions
2305
Global Sphere 2305
Go Video 2135, 2215
Goodmans 2247, 2289, 2298,
2300, 2308, 2330,
2369
GPX 2177
Gradiente 2197
Graetz 2302
Greenhill 2209
Grundig 2271
Grunkel 2312, 2316
GVG 2299
H&B 2308
H_her 2318
Haaz 2304, 2305
Haier 2172
Harman/Kardon
2125, 2213
HiMAX 2309
Hitachi 2008, 2033, 2108,
2302, 2309, 2320,
2366
Hiteker 2208
Home Tech Industries
2318
Hyundai 2316
Ilo 2167
Initial 2167, 2209
Innovation 2228
Insignia 2080, 2175, 2219
Integra 2207
Irradio 2103
iSymphony 2164
JBL 2213
JVC 2049, 2050, 2051,
2052, 2053, 2054,
2055, 2056, 2057,
2070, 2242, 2261,
2275, 2276, 2277,
2278, 2339, 2340,
2341, 2342, 2386,
2387, 2389, 2390,
2391
Jwin 2148
Kansai 2314
Kawasaki 2199
Kennex 2312
Kenwood 2123, 2197, 2270
KeyPlug 2312
Kiiro 2312
Kingavon 2308
Kiss 2302
KLH 2199, 2209
Koda 2308
Koss 2095, 2198, 2204
KXD 2309
Landel 2221
Lasonic 2214
Lawson 2305
Lecson 2303
Lenco 2308, 2312, 2317
Lenoxx 2203, 2218
LG 2080, 2107, 2115,
2116, 2141, 2188,
2211, 2215, 2237,
2239, 2285, 2293,
2295, 2348, 2370
Life 2228
Lifetec 2228
Limit 2305
Liquid Video 2204
Liteon 2097, 2121, 2220
Loewe 2274
LogicLab 2305
Magnavox 2075, 2096, 2178,
2180, 2196, 2205,
2219, 2308
Magnex 2317
Majestic 2314
Marantz 2282
Marquant 2312
Matsui 2198, 2296
McIntosh 2149
Mecotek 2312
Medion 2228
Memorex 2078, 2184, 2195
MiCO 2300, 2304
Micromaxx 2228
Microsoft 2206
Microstar 2228
Minoka 2312
Minowa 2317
Mintek 2167, 2209
Mitsubishi 2081
Mizuda 2308, 2309
Monyka 2302
Mustek 2232
Mx Onda 2304
Mystral 2316
Naiko 2312
Nesa 2209
Neufunk 2302
Nevir 2312
Next Base 2221
Nexxtech 2161
NU-TEC 2301
Onkyo 2205, 2290
Oopla 2097
Oppo 2150, 2173
Optim 2303
Optimus 2230
Orava 2308
Orbit 2313
Orion 2027, 2060
Oritron 2198, 2204
P&B 2308
Pacific 2305
Panasonic 2015, 2016, 2017,
2036, 2037, 2038,
2039, 2040, 2041,
2042, 2043, 2074,
2089, 2104, 2108,
2112, 2120, 2131,
2132, 2197, 2205,
2244, 2245, 2246,
2253, 2254, 2255,
2292, 2321, 2324,
2327, 2328, 2329,
2331, 2383, 2388
Parasound 2151
peeKTON 2318
Philips 2026, 2061, 2062,
2075, 2090, 2094,
2096, 2097, 2103,
2110, 2126, 2180,
2193, 2205, 2231,
2235, 2241, 2251,
2252, 2256, 2260,
2268, 2282, 2332,
2333, 2343, 2344,
2345, 2367, 2371,
2373, 2380, 2382,
2385
Phonotrend 2317
Pioneer 2012, 2013, 2014,
2063, 2064, 2065,
2066, 2067, 2113,
2134, 2207, 2230,
2236, 2265, 2266,
2267, 2297, 2322,
2351, 2352, 2353,
2354, 2355, 2356,
2357, 2358, 2359,
2377
Pointer 2312
Polaroid 2047, 2133, 2185
Portland 2312
Powerpoint 2313
Prima 2174
Proceed 2208
Proscan 2206
Prosonic 2299, 2314
Protron 2152
Provision 2308
Pye 2194
Qwestar 2198
Raite 2302
RCA 2058, 2059, 2071,
2079, 2183, 2199,
2206, 2207, 2209
RedStar 2310, 2312, 2314
Regent 2203
Reoc 2305
Rimax 2315
Rio 2215
Roadstar 2281, 2308
Ronin 2313
Rotel 2153
Rowa 2200, 2301
Rownsonic 2307
Saba 2198, 2238
Sabaki 2305
Saivod 2312
Sampo 2223
Samsung 2031, 2032, 2033,
2034, 2035, 2082,
2127, 2137, 2138,
2154, 2182, 2197,
2283, 2319, 2325,
2346, 2347, 2349,
2372, 2381
Sansui 2027, 2195, 2304,
2305, 2312
Sanyo 2139, 2195, 2212,
2374
ScanMagic 2232
Schaub Lorenz
2312
Schneider 2226
Scientific Labs
2305
Scott 2243, 2311
Seeltech 2318
SEG 2240, 2302, 2305,
2313
Sharp 2009, 2010, 2084,
2122, 2142, 2143,
2144, 2181, 2190,
2228, 2262, 2375
Shinsonic 2167
Sigmatek 2309, 2318
Silva 2310
Singer 2304, 2305
Skymaster 2279, 2305
vii
Skyworth 2310
Slim Art 2312
SM Electronic 2305
Sonic Blue 2215
Sontech 2316
Sony 2005, 2006, 2007,
2020, 2021, 2022,
2023, 2024, 2025,
2069, 2072, 2073,
2085, 2086, 2087,
2091, 2092, 2093,
2102, 2128, 2129,
2130, 2249, 2250,
2323, 2334, 2335,
2336, 2360, 2361,
2362, 2363, 2364,
2365, 2384
Soundmaster 2305
Soundmax 2305
Spectra 2313
Spectroniq 2155
Standard 2305
Star Cluster 2305
Starmedia 2308, 2318
Sungale 2158
Sunkai 2312
Superscan 2196
Supervision 2305
Sylvania 2094, 2180, 2189,
2196, 2219, 2224
Symphonic 2062, 2180
Synn 2305
T.D. E. Systems
2316
Tatung 2083, 2312
TCM 2228, 2379
Teac 2199, 2287, 2301,
2305
Tec 2310
Technics 2197
Technika 2312, 2317
Telefunken 2307
Tensai 2312
Tevion 2228, 2305, 2311
Theta Digital 2207
Thomson 2229, 2238, 2284,
2294
Tokai 2302, 2310
Top Suxess 2318
Toshiba 2004, 2026, 2027,
2028, 2029, 2030,
2098, 2099, 2100,
2101, 2114, 2117,
2118, 2119, 2136,
2187, 2195, 2205,
2291, 2337, 2338,
2378
TRANScontinents
2313, 2317
Transonic 2317
Trio 2312
Trutech 2160
TruVision 2309
TSM 2318
Umax 2315
United 2317
Urban Concepts
2205
US Logic 2167
Venturer 2199
Viewmaster 2318
Vocopro 2156
VocoStar 2157
Waitec 2318
Welltech 2300
Westinghouse 2109, 2168
Wharfedale 2304, 2305
Woxter 2315, 2318
Xbox 2206, 2229
Xlogic 2305, 2312
XMS 2312
Xoro 2300
Yamada 2097, 2313, 2315
Yamaha 2000, 2001, 2002,
2003, 2011, 2018,
2019, 2036, 2106,
2197, 2273
Yamakawa 2302, 2313
Yukai 2232
Zenith 2080, 2141, 2205,
2211, 2215
Blu-ray Disc
LG 2115
Panasonic 2089, 2131, 2132
Pioneer 2134
Samsung 2035, 2127
Sharp 2142, 2143, 2144
Sony 2025
Yamaha 2018
DVR
Bush 2060
Panasonic 2037, 2038, 2039,
2040, 2041, 2042
Philips 2061, 2062
Pioneer 2063, 2064, 2065,
2066, 2067
RCA 2059
Samsung 2035
Yamaha 2036
DVD Recorder
Aspire 2140
Astar 2162
Broksonic 2192
Go Video 2135
Hitachi 2108
Insignia 2080
Irradio 2103
JVC 2054, 2055, 2056,
2057
LG 2107, 2115, 2141,
2188
Liteon 2121
Panasonic 2037, 2038, 2039,
2041, 2042, 2043,
2089, 2104, 2108,
2112
Philips 2090, 2096, 2097,
2126, 2193
Pioneer 2067, 2113
Pye 2194
Samsung 2034, 2082, 2138
Sansui 2027
Sanyo 2139
Sony 2022, 2023, 2024,
2085, 2086, 2087,
2102, 2128, 2129,
2130
Sylvania 2189
Toshiba 2030, 2099, 2100,
2101, 2114, 2117,
2118, 2119
Yamaha 2106
Cable
ABC 3004, 3015, 3016,
3017, 3037, 3040,
3067, 3080, 3081
ADB 3070
Adelphia 3003
Alcatel 3066
Americast 3046
Amstrad 3048, 3068
Antronix 3019, 3020
Archer 3020
Arcon 3048
AT&T 3013
Axis 3048
Bell South 3046
Cable Vision 3014
Cabletenna 3019
Cabletime 3058
Cableview 3005
Clearmaster 3045
ClearMax 3045
Clyde Cablevision
3059
Colour Voice 3022
Comcast 3006, 3010, 3039
Comcrypt 3057
Comtronics 3023
Contec 3024
Coolmax 3045
COX 3006
Cryptovision 3060
Director 3006
Eastern 3025
Everquest 3041
Fidelity 3048
Filmnet 3057
Filmnet Cablecrypt
3061
Filmnet Comcrypt
3061
Finlux 3051
Focus 3044
Foxtel 3068
France Telecom
3054, 3055
Freebox 3069
GC Electronics
3020
GE 3015, 3016
GEC 3059
Gemini 3026, 3041
General Instrument
3006, 3008, 3016,
3039, 3050, 3067,
3075
Goldstar 3042
Gooding 3049
Grundig 3048, 3049
Hamlin 3027, 3028
Hirschmann 3051
Hitachi 3016
HomeChoice 3056
Humax 3001, 3002, 3071
ITT Nokia 3051
Jasco 3041
Jerrold 3006, 3008, 3016,
3026, 3037, 3041,
3050, 3064, 3067,
3075
JVC 3049
Kabel Deutschland
3043, 3073, 3074
Macab 3055
Magnavox 3029
Maspro 3049
Matsui 3049
MegaCable 3039
Memorex 3030, 3040
Minerva 3049
Mnet 3057
Motorola 3006, 3008, 3010,
3013, 3039, 3072,
3075
Movie Time 3031, 3063
Mr Zapp 3055
Multichoice 3057
Multitech 3045
NEC 3018
NET Brazil 3007
Nokia 3051
Noos 3055
NSC 3031
Oak 3024
Pace 3011, 3043, 3084
Palladium 3049
Panasonic 3034, 3036, 3040
Paragon 3040
Philips 3021, 3022, 3029,
3049, 3053, 3054,
3055
Pioneer 3012, 3032, 3038,
3042, 3048, 3083,
3084
Popular Mechanics
3044
Proscan 3015, 3016
Pulsar 3040
PVP Stereo Visual Matrix
3064
Quasar 3040
RadioShack 3041, 3045
RCA 3005, 3036, 3076,
3077
Realistic 3020
Recoton 3044
Regal 3028
Regency 3025
Rembrandt 3016
Runco 3040
Sagem 3055
Samsung 3011, 3023, 3032,
3042
SAT 3048
Scientific Atlanta
3003, 3004, 3011,
3012, 3013, 3062,
3078, 3079, 3080,
3081, 3082, 3083,
3084
Signal 3026, 3041
Signature 3016
Sony 3014, 3047
Sprucer 3036
Standard Component
3033
Starcom 3026, 3037, 3041,
3067
Stargate 3026, 3041
Starquest 3026, 3041
Supercable 3008
Supermax 3045
Tele+1 3057, 3061
Telepiu 3057
Thomson 3000, 3009
TIME WARNER
3006
Tocom 3017
Torx 3067
Toshiba 3040
Tristar 3045
Tudi 3052
Tusa 3026, 3041
TV86 3031
Unika 3019, 3020
United Cable 3037, 3064
Universal 3019, 3020
Universum 3049, 3051
V2 3045
Videoway 3065
View Star 3024, 3029, 3031
viii
Viewmaster 3045
Vision 3045
Visiopass 3051, 3054, 3055
Vortex View 3045
Wittenberg 3048
Zenith 3035, 3040, 3046
Zentek 3044
Sattelite
AB Sat 4138, 4139
AccessHD 4058
ADB 4142
AGS 4138
Akai 4101, 4103
Alba 4083, 4084, 4085,
4086, 4108, 4139
Aldes 4085, 4087, 4088
Allsat 4098, 4101, 4103
Allsonic 4074, 4087, 4090
Alltech 4139
Alpha 4103
Alpha Digital 4058
Alphastar 4031
Amitronica 4139
Amstrad 4089, 4113, 4136,
4139
Anglo 4139
Ankaro 4074, 4087, 4090,
4139
Anttron 4083, 4086
Apollo 4083
Armstrong 4089, 4103
Artec 4054
Asat 4101, 4103
ASLF 4139
Astacom 4138
Astra 4089, 4091, 4100,
4137, 4139
Astro 4074, 4086, 4088,
4090, 4093, 4135,
4136, 4137
AudioTon 4086, 4098
Aurora 4140
Austar 4140
Axiel 4138
Axis 4074, 4090, 4091,
4096
Best 4074, 4090
Blaupunkt 4093
Blue Sky 4139
Boca 4089, 4100, 4105,
4139
Boston 4138
Brain Wave 4095
Broadcast 4094
Broco 4139
BSkyB 4113, 4123
BT 4138
Bubu Sat 4139
Bush 4084, 4127
Cambridge 4136
Canal Satellite 4135
Canal+ 4135
CaptiveWorks 4049
Channel Master
4060, 4085
Chaparral 4025
CHEROKEE 4138
Chess 4134, 4139
CityCom 4084, 4133, 4137
Clatronic 4095
CNT 4088
Comag 4000, 4001, 4002,
4003, 4004
Commlink 4087
Comtech 4096
Condor 4074, 4090, 4137
Connexions 4074, 4092
Conrad 4074, 4133, 4136,
4137
Conrad Electronic
4137, 4139
Contec 4096
Coolsat 4050
Cosat 4098
Coship 4063
Crown 4089
Daeryung 4092
Daewoo 4107, 4139
DDC 4085
Delega 4085
Dew 4096
Diamond 4097
Digiality 4137
Digital Stream 4059
DIRECTV 4017, 4018, 4020,
4021, 4022, 4024,
4037, 4038, 4040,
4041, 4043, 4045,
4057, 4106, 4143,
4144, 4145, 4146,
4147, 4148, 4149,
4150, 4151, 4152,
4153, 4154, 4155,
4156, 4157
Discoverer 4134
Discovery 4138
Diseqc 4138
Dish Network 4011, 4012, 4013,
4014, 4019, 4039,
4064
Dishpro 4039, 4064
Distrisat 4103
Ditristrad 4098
DNT 4092, 4101, 4103
Drake 4026
DStv 4140
Dune 4074
Echostar 4011, 4019, 4039,
4064, 4092, 4139
Einhell 4083, 4087, 4089,
4136, 4139
Elap 4138, 4139
Elekta 4088
Elsat 4139
Elta 4074, 4083, 4090,
4098, 4101, 4103
Emanon 4083
Emme Esse 4074, 4090
Engel 4139
Ep Sat 4084
EURIEULT 4077
Eurodec 4102
Europa 4103, 4136, 4137
Europhon 4137
Eurosat 4089
Eurosky 4074, 4089, 4090,
4133, 4136, 4137
Eurostar 4089, 4133, 4137
Eutelsat 4139
Exator 4083, 4086
Expressvu 4039
Fenner 4074, 4134, 4139
Ferguson 4084, 4102, 4132
Fidelity 4136
Finlandia 4084
Finlux 4084
FinnSat 4096, 4102
Flair Mate 4139
Foxtel 4140
Freecom 4083, 4099, 4136
FTEmaximal 4074, 4139
Fuba 4074, 4083, 4090,
4092, 4093, 4101,
4133
Galaxis 4074, 4087, 4090,
4091, 4096, 4098,
4133, 4140
GE 4015, 4016, 4061,
4151
General Instrument
4027, 4065
GMI 4089
GOI 4039
Goldbox 4135
GoldStar 4099
Goodmans 4079, 4080, 4084
Goodmind 4061
Grandin 4077
Grothusen 4083, 4099
Grundig 4084, 4086, 4093,
4113, 4129, 4136,
4140
Hänsel & Gretel
4137
Hantor 4083, 4095
Hanuri 4088
Hauppauge 4126
Heliocom 4137
Helium 4137
Hinari 4085
Hirschmann 4074, 4093, 4128,
4136, 4137, 4138
Hisawa 4095
Hisense 4066
Hitachi 4032, 4084, 4149,
4153
Homecast 4005, 4006, 4007
Houston 4098
HTS 4039
Hughes 4018, 4022, 4144,
4146, 4150, 4152
Hughes Network Systems
4021
Humax 4051, 4075, 4076,
4110
Huth 4087, 4089, 4094,
4095, 4096, 4098,
4137, 4141
Hypson 4077
Ilo 4066
Imex 4077
Innovation 4090
Insignia 4057
Intertronic 4089
Intervision 4098, 4137
ITT Nokia 4084
Jerrold 4065
Johansson 4095
JOK 4138
JSR 4098
JVC 4011, 4019, 4039,
4079
Kamm 4139
Kathrein 4093, 4101, 4103,
4109, 4112, 4120,
4133, 4138, 4139
Kathrein Eurostar
4133
Klap 4138
Konig 4137
Kosmos 4099
KR 4086
Kreiselmeyer 4093
K-SAT 4139
Kyostar 4083
L&S Electronic
4074
Lasat 4074, 4088, 4090,
4100, 4133, 4134,
4137
Lasonic 4062
Lenco 4074, 4083, 4099,
4133, 4137, 4139
Leng 4095
Lennox 4098
Lenson 4136
Lexus 4103
LG 4053, 4057, 4099
Lifesat 4074, 4090, 4134,
4139
Lifetec 4090
Lorenzen 4137
Lorraine 4099
Lupus 4074, 4090
Luxor 4136
Lyonnaise 4102
Macab 4102
Magnavox 4045, 4055
Manata 4077, 4138, 4139
Manhattan 4084, 4088, 4098,
4138
Marantz 4101
Mascom 4088
Maspro 4084, 4139
Matsui 4138
Max 4137
Mediabox 4135
Mediamarkt 4089
Mediasat 4091, 4135, 4136
Medion 4074, 4090, 4139
Medison 4139
Mega 4101, 4103
Memorex 4045
Metronic 4077, 4078, 4083,
4086, 4087, 4088,
4139
Metz 4093
Micro electronic
4136, 4137, 4139
Micro Technology
4139
MicroGem 4056
Micromaxx 4074, 4090
Microstar 4090
Microtec 4139
Minerva 4093
Mitsubishi 4084, 4093, 4152
Mitsumi 4100
Morgan’s 4089, 4100, 4101,
4103, 4139
Motorola 4008, 4009, 4010,
4065
Multichoice 4140
Multitec 4134
Muratto 4099
Mysat 4139
Navex 4095
Neuhaus 4091, 4098, 4136,
4137, 4139
Neusat 4139
Next Level 4065
NextWave 4141
Nikko 4089, 4139
Nokia 4084, 4122
Nordmende 4083, 4084, 4085,
4088, 4102
Nova 4140
Novis 4095
Oceanic 4097
Octagon 4083, 4086, 4096
Okano 4089
Optex 4098
Optus 4135, 4140, 4141
ix
Orbitech 4083, 4134, 4135,
4136
OSat 4086
Otto Versand 4093
Pace 4084, 4093, 4113,
4121, 4125, 4138
Pacific 4097
Packsat 4138
Palcom 4085
Palladium 4089, 4136
Palsat 4134, 4136
Panasat 4140
Panasonic 4043, 4044, 4046,
4084, 4113, 4118,
4143, 4148
Panda 4084, 4137
Pansat 4047
Patriot 4138
Paysat 4045
PCT 4060
Philco 4055
Philips 4021, 4022, 4045,
4084, 4101, 4103,
4111, 4115, 4135,
4138, 4150, 4152,
4153, 4155, 4156
Phoenix 4096
Phonotrend 4084, 4087, 4098
Pioneer 4124, 4135
Polsat 4102
Predki 4095
Premiere 4098, 4135
Priesner 4089
Primestar 4030
Profile 4138
Promax 4084
Prosat 4085, 4087
Proscan 4015, 4016, 4040,
4151
Protek 4097
Proton 4066
Provision 4088
Quadral 4074, 4085, 4087,
4090, 4138
Quelle 4093, 4133, 4137
Quiero 4102
RadioShack 4065
Radiola 4101, 4103
Radix 4092, 4119
Rainbow 4086
RCA 4015, 4016, 4034,
4035, 4036, 4037,
4038, 4040, 4151,
4157
Realistic 4028
Redpoint 4091
Redstar 4074, 4090
RFT 4087, 4101, 4103
Roadstar 4139
Roch 4077
Rover 4074, 4139
Saba 4088, 4133, 4137,
4138
Sabre 4084
Sagem 4069, 4102
Sakura 4096
Samsung 4018, 4021, 4023,
4041, 4042, 4081,
4082, 4083, 4114,
4150, 4154
SAT 4085, 4136
Sat Cruiser 4141
Sat Partner 4083, 4086, 4088,
4095, 4099, 4136
Sat Team 4139
Satcom 4094, 4137
Satec 4139
Satelco 4074
Satford 4094
Satmaster 4094
Satplus 4134
Schneider 4090, 4134, 4138
Schwaiger 4097, 4134, 4137
SCS 4133
Seemann 4089, 4091, 4092
SEG 4074, 4083, 4090,
4095
Seleco 4098
Servi Sat 4077, 4139
Siemens 4093
Silva 4099
Skantin 4139
Skardin 4091
Skinsat 4136
SKR 4139
Skymaster 4067, 4068, 4087,
4134, 4139
Skymax 4101, 4103
SkySat 4134, 4136, 4137,
4139
Skyvision 4098
SM Electronic 4134, 4139
Smart 4133, 4139
Sony 4017, 4020, 4135
SR 4089, 4100
Star Choice 4065
Starland 4139
Starring 4095
Start Trak 4083
Strong 4074, 4083, 4086,
4090, 4099, 4140
STS 4033
STVI 4077
Sumida 4089
Sunny Sound 4074
Sunsat 4139
Sunstar 4074, 4089, 4100
Supermax 4141
Tandberg 4102
Tandy 4086
Tantec 4084
TCM 4090
Techniland 4094
TechniSat 4071, 4072, 4073,
4092, 4103, 4116,
4117, 4134, 4135,
4136
Technology 4140
Technosat 4141
Technowelt 4137
Teco 4089, 4100
Telanor 4085
Telasat 4133, 4137
Telecom 4139
Telefunken 4067, 4083, 4138
Teleka 4086, 4089, 4092,
4136, 4137
Telemaster 4088
Telesat 4137
Telestar 4134, 4135, 4136
Televes 4084, 4136
Telewire 4098
Tempo 4141
Tevion 4090, 4139
Thomson 4070, 4084, 4102,
4104, 4130, 4133,
4135, 4137, 4138,
4139
Thorens 4097
Thorn 4084
Tivax 4058
Tivo 4150
Tokai 4103
Tonna 4084, 4094, 4098,
4136, 4139
Toshiba 4144, 4152, 4153
Triad 4099
Triasat 4136
Triax 4093, 4133, 4136,
4139
Turnsat 4139
Tvonics 4132
Twinner 4077, 4139
UEC 4140
Uher 4134
UltimateTV 4020
Uniden 4029, 4045
Unisat 4089, 4096, 4103
Unitor 4095
Universum 4093, 4133, 4137
US Digital 4066
Variosat 4093
Vega 4074
Ventana 4101, 4103
Viewsat 4048
Visiosat 4095, 4098, 4138,
4139
Voom 4065
Vortec 4083
Welltech 4134
WeTeKom 4134, 4136
Wevasat 4084
Wewa 4084
Winersat 4095
Wisi 4084, 4092, 4093,
4136, 4137
Woorisat 4088
Worldsat 4138
Xrypton 4074
XSat 4139
Zehnder 4074, 4088, 4090,
4131, 4133
Zenith 4052, 4057, 4145
Zodiac 4086
CD
Yamaha 5000, 5013
CD Recoder
Yamaha 5001
MD
Yamaha 5002, 5003, 5004
Tape
Yamaha 5005, 5006
Tuner
Yamaha 5007, 5008, 5009,
5010, 5014, 5015,
5016, 5017, 5018
USB
Yamaha 5012, 5021
DOCK
Yamaha 5011, 5022
LD
Yamaha 2002
© 2009 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved.
Printed in China WQ95420
The letters in circles and the numbers in squares correspond to those in the Owner's Manual.
■ Front panel
HTR-6260
U
MAIN
ZONE
ON/OFF
PHONES
SILENT
CINEMA
TONE
CONTROL
PROGRAM
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
INPUT
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VIDEO
AUDIO
PORTABLE
THROUGH
ZONE2
ON/OFF
INFO
MEMORY
VIDEO
AUX
VOLUME
ZONE2
CONTROL
HDMI
EFFECT
PRESET
l
h
l
h
l
h
l
h
BD/DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
SCENE
A
U D
K NC PL O
V QFE G I
J S TRMB
H
l
h
CATEGORY
FM AM
TUNING/CH
■ Remote control
WQ95440
Printed in China
MAIN
POWER
1234
1256
1234
7856
90
10
1234
POWER
SOURCE
V-AUX
[ A ] [ B ] DOCK
MULTI
XM
SIRIUS
TUNER
FM
MOVIE
BD
DVD
TOP
MENU
MUSIC
SCENE
TV
CD
OPTIONSETUP
RETURN
REC
ENT
POWER
TV
TV VOL
INPUT
MUTE
TV CH
ENTER
VOLUME
DISPLAY
MUTE
MENU
RADIO
STEREO
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
PURE DIRECT
STRAIGHT
INFO
MEMORY
AM
CATEGORY
PRESET
TUN./CH
SLEEP
HDMI
AV
AUDIO
ZONE2
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
f
g
n
p
q
r
c
d
a
b
e
h
k
l
m
o
s
t
u
i
j
Documenttranscriptie
U HTR-6260 AV Receiver OWNER’S MANUAL IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. 10 11 12 13 14 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. Caution-i En Caution: Read this before operating your unit. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. Caution-ii En 17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this unit to the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet in the main room and Zone2. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are: .......AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz (General model) .......................... AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz (Asia model) 20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or like. 21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing loss. 22 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the same type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are incorrectly replaced. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn off this unit by A MAIN ZONE ON/ OFF. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. Contents INTRODUCTION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Rear panel .................................................................. 5 Front panel display..................................................... 6 Remote control........................................................... 7 Quick start guide..................................................... 8 L Preparing remote control ....................................... 9 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 9 Using the remote control............................................ 9 Connections ...........................................................10 Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO) ..................................... 19 BASIC OPERATION Playback.................................................................22 Enjoy the sound field programs ..........................25 Selecting sound field programs................................ 25 Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decoding mode) .................................... 28 Enjoying sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ....................... 28 Enjoy sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA™) ........................................ 28 Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode ............................... 28 FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 29 Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station (Frequency tuning) .............................................. 29 Registering FM/AM stations and tuning in (Preset tuning)...................................................... 29 Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ............... 31 Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 31 XM Satellite Radio® operations ............................. 32 Registering XM Satellite Radio channels ............... 33 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio™ information .. 34 Setting the option menu for each input source (OPTION menu) ............................................... 43 OPTION menu items ............................................... 43 Outputting a video signal input from another input source during reproducing a multi-channel audio signal.......................................................... 45 Editing surround decoders/sound field programs ........................................................... 46 Selecting a decoder used with a sound field program................................................................ 46 Setting sound field parameters................................. 46 Sound field parameters ............................................ 46 Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) ..................................................... 50 Basic operation of the setup menu........................... 51 Speaker Setup .......................................................... 51 Sound Setup ............................................................. 53 Function Setup ......................................................... 54 DSP Parameter......................................................... 56 Memory Guard......................................................... 56 Using multi-zone configuration ........................... 57 Connecting Zone2.................................................... 57 Controlling Zone2.................................................... 58 Controlling other components with the remote control................................................................ 59 Setting remote control codes.................................... 59 Resetting all remote control codes........................... 59 Advanced setup..................................................... 60 APPENDIX Troubleshooting.................................................... 61 General..................................................................... 61 HDMI™................................................................... 64 Tuner (FM/AM)....................................................... 64 XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only)................ 65 SIRIUS Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only) .......... 66 Remote control......................................................... 67 iPod™ ...................................................................... 68 Bluetooth™.............................................................. 68 Auto Setup (YPAO)................................................. 69 Glossary ................................................................. 71 Sound field program information ....................... 73 Information on HDMI™...................................... 74 Additional information ........................................ 75 About the HDMI™ control function ....................... 75 Using the HDMI™ control function........................ 75 Specifications......................................................... 76 Index ...................................................................... 77 (at the end of this manual) List of remote control codes...................................i 1 En English XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only) ...........................................31 ADVANCED OPERATION APPENDIX Basic procedure........................................................ 22 Using the SCENE function ...................................... 22 Muting audio output temporarily (MUTE) .............. 23 Adjusting high/low frequency sound (tone control) ....................................................... 23 Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 23 Using your headphones............................................ 23 Displaying input signal information ........................ 24 Changing information on the front panel display .... 24 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 24 Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth™ component........................ 42 Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 42 ADVANCED OPERATION Using Auto Setup..................................................... 19 When an error message is displayed during measurement........................................................ 21 When a warning message is displayed after measurement........................................................ 21 Controlling iPod™................................................... 40 Using Bluetooth™ components ........................... 42 BASIC OPERATION Placing speakers....................................................... 10 Connecting speakers ................................................ 11 Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 13 Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 14 Connecting other components ................................. 15 Connecting an external amplifier............................. 16 Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks............................... 17 Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver.................... 17 Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .... 17 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 18 Connecting the power cable..................................... 18 Turning this unit on and off ..................................... 18 Using iPod™.......................................................... 40 PREPARATION PREPARATION Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner .................... 35 Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription.. 35 SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations...................... 35 Registering the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ channels ............................................................... 37 Setting the Parental Lock ......................................... 38 Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ information .......................................................... 39 INTRODUCTION Features.................................................................... 2 About this manual................................................... 3 Supplied accessories................................................ 3 Part names and functions....................................... 4 SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only)........................................... 35 INTRODUCTION Features ■ Built-in 7-channel power amplifier • Minimum RMS Output Power (1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω) • FRONT L/R: 90 W + 90 W • CENTER: 90 W • SURROUND L/R: 90 W + 90 W • SURROUND BACK L/R: 90 W + 90 W ■ Speaker/Preout outputs • Speaker jacks (7-channel), preout output jacks (7.1channel) ■ Input/Output terminals Input terminals • HDMI input x 4 • Audio/Visual input [Audio] Digital input (coaxial) x 2, digital input (optical) x 2, analog input x 2 [Video] Component video x 2, composite video x 4 • Audio input (analog) x 2 • Dock input x 1 • V-AUX input [Audio] Analog x 1, stereo mini jack x 1 [Video] Composite video x 1 Output terminals • Monitor output [Audio/Video] HDMI x 1 [Video] Component video x 1, composite video x 1 • Audio/Visual output [Audio] Analog x 1 [Video] Composite video x 1 • Audio output Analog x 1 • Zone2 output Analog x 1 Other terminals Remote input x 1, Remote output x 1 Trigger output x 1 ■ • • • • Proprietary Yamaha technology for the creation of sound fields CINEMA DSP 3D Compressed Music Enhancer mode Virtual CINEMA DSP SILENT CINEMA ■ Digital audio decoders • Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus • DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express • Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital EX • DTS, DTS 96/24, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 • Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Pro Logic II, Dolby Pro Logic IIx • DTS NEO:6 • Neural Surround (U.S.A. model only) • DSD 2 En ■ Radio tuners • FM/AM tuning capability • XM Satellite Radio tuning capability, using XM MiniTuner and Home Dock, sold separately (U.S.A. model only) • SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning capability, using SiriusConnect tuner, sold separately (U.S.A. model only) ■ HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) • HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or highdefinition video as well as multi-channel digital audio – Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync) information capability – Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission capability – “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability – High refresh rate and high resolution video signals capability – High definition digital audio format signals capability • Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion (composite video → HDMI, component video → HDMI) capability for monitor out • Analog video input up-scaling for HDMI digital video output 480i or 480p → 720p, 1080i or 1080p ■ DOCK terminal • DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) ■ Automatic speaker setup features • “YPAO” (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for automatically optimizing speaker outputs suitable for listening environments ■ Other features • 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter • OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system • Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources • Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability • Scene function that allows you to change input sources and sound field programs with one key • Sleep timer • Multi-zone function About this manual Bluetooth™ Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG and is used by Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement. PREPARATION Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “HDMI,” the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. x.v.Color™ “x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation. BASIC OPERATION Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s: 5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTSHD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. INTRODUCTION • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the keys on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the key names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the key name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • “AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or “hHDMI 1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the attached sheet or “Part names and functions” on page 4 for the information about each position of the parts. • ☞ indicates the page describing the related information. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation. “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii. ADVANCED OPERATION iPod™ Supplied accessories ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Check that you received all of the following parts. • Remote control • Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) • Optimizer microphone • AM loop antenna • Indoor FM antenna APPENDIX English 3 En Part names and functions Front panel V U D E F G H I Q VOLUME HDMI THROUGH ZONE2 ON/OFF ZONE2 CONTROL INFO l MEMORY FM l h PRESET AM CATEGORY h l TUNING/CH h SCENE BD/DVD TV CD STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT RADIO MAIN ZONE PHONES TONE CONTROL PROGRAM l ON/OFF A VIDEO B C K L MAIN ZONE ON/OFF MN N Switches this unit between on and off (see page 18). B PHONES jack C ZONE2 ON/OFF For plugging headphones (see page 23). Switches the zone function on and off (see page 58). D E I OPTIMIZER MIC jack VOLUME control INFO R VIDEO (VIDEO AUX) jack PRESET l / h Controls the volume of this unit (see page 22). For connecting the video output cable of a camcorder or game console (see page 17). S AUDIO L/R (VIDEO AUX) jack For connecting the audio output cable of a camcorder or game console (see page 17). T PORTABLE (VIDEO AUX) jack For connecting the audio output cable of a portable music player (see page 17). FM/AM (CATEGORY l / h) U Front panel display Changes the tuner bands between FM and AM. Select a channel category for a XM/SIRIUS. V HDMI THROUGH TUNING/CH l / h SCENE TONE CONTROL Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers/ headphones (see page 22). L PROGRAM l / h M STRAIGHT Changes sound field programs (see page 25). Changes a sound field program to straight decoding mode (see page 28). 4 En T For connecting the supplied optimizer microphone and adjusting output characteristics of speakers (see page 19). Q MEMORY S Selects an input source (see page 22). Enables operation of a receiver set in Zone2, including input source switching, volume control and tuner operation, with the main amplifier or remote control after this key is pressed. Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field programs (see page 22). K R PORTABLE PURE DIRECT P ZONE2 CONTROL Changes FM/AM frequencies or XM/SIRIUS tuner channels. J J INPUT l / h Selects an FM/AM preset station (see page 30) or an XM/ SIRIUS preset channel (see page 33). H P O Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (see page 30) or XM/SIRIUS channels as preset channels (see page 33). G O AUDIO Changes mode to Pure Direct mode (see page 23). This key lights up when Pure Direct mode is on. Changes information display screens on the front panel display (see page 24). F VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC h EFFECT SILENT CINEMA A INPUT l h Displays information on this unit (see page 6). Lights up during pass-through output of an HDMI signal input to this unit while this unit is on standby (see page 54). Part names and functions Rear panel b c e dg h f q SPEAKERS INTRODUCTION a EXTRA SP ZONE2/PRESENCE (BD/DVD) SIRIUS DOCK XM HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI OUT HDMI 3 HDMI 4 ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO REMOTE UNBAL. PR PR PB IN OUT GND AM PB VIDEO VIDEO Y 12V 0.1A MAX. Y FRONT MONITOR OUT CENTER SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP SURROUND TRIGGER OUT CENTER CENTER OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 ( TV ) AV 1 OPTICAL (CD) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT j FRONT AUDIO1 SURROUND AUDIO2 k l SUR.BACK SUBWOOFER MULTI CH INPUT m SIRIUS terminal AUDIO OUT n o l For connecting a SiriusConnect tuner (separately sold) (see page 35). b DOCK terminal c d n For connecting front right and left, center, surround and surround back speakers (see page 11). Connect the presence speakers (see page 11) or the speakers for Zone2 (see page 57) to EXTRA SP terminals. g p MONITOR OUT jack MULTI CH INPUT jacks AUDIO OUT jacks Output audio signals from a selected analog input source to an external component (see page 16). o ZONE2 OUT jacks Output sound of this unit to an external amplifier set in a different zone. p ANTENNA jacks SPEAKERS terminals 1 SUBWOOFER 2 For connecting a player that supports a multi-channel output (see page 16). PRE OUT jacks Output multi-channel signals from up to 7.1 channels to an external amplifier (see page 16). For connecting supplied FM and AM antennas (see page 18). f SUR. BACK PRE OUT q Power Cable Connect this cable to an AC wall outlet (see page 18). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION e m HDMI OUT/HDMI 1-4 terminals For connecting an HDMI-compatible video monitor or external components for HDMI inputs 1-4 (see page 15). SURROUND Outputs visual signals from this unit to a video monitor, such as a TV (see page 14). XM terminal For connecting XM Mini-Tuner in XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock (separately sold) (see page 31). FRONT ADVANCED OPERATION For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS11) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) (see page 17). ZONE2 OUT BASIC OPERATION i a PREPARATION FM REMOTE IN/OUT jack For connecting an external component that supports the remote control function (see page 17). h TRIGGER OUT jack i APPENDIX For connecting an external terminal with a trigger input terminal to operate it linked with operation of this unit. For example, when an electric screen that supports a trigger input is connected, it opens and closes linked with operation of an input source selected in this unit. AV 1-6 jacks For connecting external components for audio/visual inputs 1-6 (see page 15). j AV OUT jacks k English Output audio/visual signals from a selected analog input source to an external component (see page 16). AUDIO 1/2 jacks For connecting external components for audio inputs 1-2 (see page 16). 5 En Part names and functions Front panel display cb a d e SIRIUS XM f STEREO 3 TUNED h g SLEEP ZONE 2 j i VOL. MUTE SW PL PR C L R SL SR SBL SB SBR k a l SIRIUS indicator Lights up when a SiriusConnect tuner is selected as an input source. b XM indicator c HDMI indicator Lights up when an XM tuner is selected as an input source. Lights up during normal communication when HDMI is selected as an input source. d CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when a sound field program that uses CINEMA DSP is selected. e CINEMA DSP 3D indicator f Tuner indicator Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D is activated. Lights up during receiving radio broadcast signals from an FM/ AM station (see page 29). g SLEEP indicator h ZONE2 indicator i VOLUME indicator j MUTE indicator k Cursor indicators Lights up when the sleep timer is activated (see page 24). Lights up when the zone functions are turned on. Displays volume levels. Flashes when audio is muted. Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are available for operations. l Multi information display m Speaker indicators Displays menu items and settings for the current operation. Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are currently output. Subwoofer Presence L Front L Surround L Surround back L SW PL PR C L R SL SR SBL SB SBR Center Presence R Front R Surround R Surround back R Surround back 6 En k m Part names and functions Remote control a c ZONE2 e CODE SET TRANSMIT d POWER SOURCE POWER SLEEP f HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 Input selection keys HDMI 1-4 Selects HDMI inputs 1 through 4. Selects AV inputs 1 through 6. AV 1-6 AUDIO 1/2 Selects AUDIO inputs 1 and 2. Selects the V-AUX jack on the front panel of this V-AUX g [A]/[B] AV 1 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK TUNER SIRIUS XM MULTI PRESET TUN./CH i CATEGORY FM AM j INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC DOCK TUNER SIRIUS XM MULTI i ENHANCER SUR. DECODE STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT Tuner keys FM AM (CATEGORY l / h) SCENE l m BD DVD TV CD SETUP o p j MUTE r k Sound selection keys l SCENE Selects sound field programs (see page 25). REC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field programs (see page 22). m SETUP n OPTION o Cursors k / n / l / h/ENTER/RETURN Cursors k / n / l / h Select menu items displayed on the Displays the setup menu (see page 51). Displays the option menu (see page 43). TV INPUT POWER TV VOL TV CH MUTE ENTER RETURN a Remote control signal transmitter Transmits infrared signals. MAIN/ZONE2 Switches amplifiers (Main or Zone2) to be operated by the remote control (see page 58). c TRANSMIT d CODE SET VOLUME +/– q DISPLAY Adjust the volume of this unit (see page 22). Displays or not display the OSD on the video monitor. When an iPod is connected: Changes the operation mode of the iPod connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock (see page 40). Lights up when a signal is output from the remote control. r SOURCE POWER s Switches the sleep timer operations (see page 24). g POWER Switches this unit on and standby. t Numeric keys u TV control keys English SLEEP External component operation keys Operate recording, playback etc. of external components (see page 59). Switches an external component on and off. f MUTE Turns the mute function of the sound output on and off (see page 23). Sets remote control codes for external component operations (see page 59). e APPENDIX b p front panel display or on a video monitor, or change settings. Confirms a selected item. Returns to the previous screen or ends the menu display. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 u INFO ADVANCED OPERATION MENU q Select a channel category for a XM/ SIRIUS. Presets radio stations. Selects a preset station. Changes FM/AM frequencies or XM/SIRIUS tuner channels. Changes the information shown on the front panel display (see page 24). DISPLAY TOP MENU t MEMORY PRESET k / n TUN./CH k / n n VOLUME ENTER RETURN s RADIO OPTION Switches a band between FM and AM. BASIC OPERATION k STEREO PREPARATION h 2 unit. To control external components using the sExternal component operation keys separately from operations of this unit (see page 59). Selects a Yamaha iPod universal dock/Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connected to the DOCK terminal. Selects the FM/AM tuner. Selects a SiriusConnect tuner as an input source. Selects an XM tuner as an input source. Selects a signal input from the MULTI CH INPUT jack on the rear panel as an input source. INTRODUCTION MAIN b h Enter numbers. Enables operations of a monitor such as a TV and a projector. 7 En Quick start guide When you use this product for the first time, perform setup following the steps below. See the related pages for details on operations and settings. Step 1: Prepare items for setup Step 2: Set up your speakers Prepare speakers, DVD player, cables, and other items necessary for setup. For example, prepare the following items for setting up a 5.1-channel sound system. Front right speaker Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this unit. • Placing speakers • Connecting speakers ☞P. 10 ☞P. 11 y • This unit has a YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) that automatically optimizes this unit based on room acoustic characteristics (audio characteristics of the speakers, speaker positions, and room acoustics, etc.). You can enjoy good balanced sound without special knowledge by using the YPAO technology (see page 19). Video monitor Subwoofer Front left speaker Step 3: Connect your components Connect your TV, DVD player, or other components. Center speaker Components (such as DVD player) Surround right speaker Surround left speaker Requirements Speakers qty. Front speaker 2 Center speaker 1 Surround speaker 2 Active subwoofer 1 Speaker cable 5 Subwoofer cable 1 Reproduction component such as DVD player 1 Video monitor such as TV 1 Video cable or HDMI cable 2 Audio cable 2 y • Prepare two magnetically shielded speakers (for front). The priority of the requirement of other speakers is as follows: 1 Two surround speakers 2 One center speaker 3 One (or two) surround back speaker(s) • If your video monitor is a CRT, we recommend that you use magnetically shielded speakers. 8 En • Connecting a TV monitor or projector • Connecting other components • Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder • Connecting an external amplifier • Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver • Connecting the FM and AM antennas • Connecting an XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock • Connecting a SiriusConnect tuner ☞P. 14 ☞P. 15 ☞P. 16 ☞P. 16 ☞P. 17 ☞P. 18 ☞P. 31 ☞P. 35 Step 4: Turn on the power Connect the power cable and turn on this unit. • Connecting the power cable • Turning this unit on and off ☞P. 18 ☞P. 18 Step 5: Select the input source and start playback Select the component connected in the step 3 as an input source and start playback. • Basic procedure • Selecting sound field programs ☞P. 22 ☞P. 25 y • This unit supports the SCENE function that changes the input source and sound field program at one time. Four scenes are preset for different purposes for Blu-ray disc, DVD and CD, and you can select from a scene from those just by pressing a remote control key. See page 22 for details. PREPARATION Preparing remote control 1 Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. 3 Remote control sensor window PREPARATION 2 30 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. Notes Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places y • You can operate external components with this remote control by setting the remote control code. See page 59 for details. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX • Change all batteries if you notice the following conditions: – the operation range of the remote control narrows – the transmit indicator does not flash or is dim • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. This may shorten the life of the new batteries or cause old batteries to leak. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Specification of batteries may be different even though they look the same. • If you find leaking batteries, discard the batteries immediately, taking care not to touch the leaked material. If the leaked material comes into contact with your skin or gets into your eyes or mouth, rinse it away immediately and consult a doctor. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Dispose of the old batteries correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. In such a case, install new batteries and set the remote control code. within 6 m (20 ft) ADVANCED OPERATION Take off the battery compartment cover. 30 BASIC OPERATION 1 3 INTRODUCTION Installing batteries in the remote control English 9 En Connections Placing speakers This unit supports up to 7.1-channel surround. We recommend the following speaker layout in order to obtain the optimum surround effect. 7.1-channel speaker layout Speaker channels C FR FL SW SW 30˚ SL SR 60˚ 80˚ SL SR SBL SBR 30 cm (12 in) or more 6.1-channel speaker layout C FR FL SW SW 30˚ ■ Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds (stereo sound) and effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. When using a screen, the appropriate top positions of the speakers are about 1/4 of the screen from the bottom. ■ Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). Place it halfway between the left and right speakers. When using a TV, place the speaker just above or just under the center of the TV with the front surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned. When using a screen, place it just under the center of the screen. ■ Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place them at the rear left and rear right facing the listening position. To obtain a natural sound flow in the 5.1-channel speaker layout, place them slightly further back than in the 7.1channel speaker layout. ■ SL SR 60˚ SL 80˚ SR SB 5.1-channel speaker layout C FR FL SW SW 30˚ SL SR 60˚ SL 10 En 80˚ SR Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR) / Surround back speaker (SB) The surround back left and right speakers are used for rear effect sounds. Place them at the rear of the room facing the listening position at least 30 cm away from each other, ideally at the same distance as that between the front left and right speakers. In the 6.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and right channel sound signals are mixed down and output from the single surround back speaker. In the 5.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and right channel sound signals are output from the surround left and right speakers. ■ Subwoofer (SW) The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and lowfrequency effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Use a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System. Place it exterior to the front left and right speakers facing slightly inward to reduce reflections from a wall. Connections 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) PL PR FL FR 1.8 m (6 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) C INTRODUCTION ■ Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR) The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the sound field programs (see page 25). We recommend that you use the presence speakers especially for the CINEMA DSP sound field programs. To use the presence speakers, connect the speakers to EXTRA SP terminals and then set “Extra SP Assign” to “Presence” (see page 51). Connecting speakers y • Connect optional presence speakers or Zone2 speakers (see page 57) to the EXTRA SP jacks. • You can connect up to two subwoofers. When two subwoofers are connected, the same sound is output from them. b a j k c ■ 6.1-channel (when using the Multi-zone function) SPEAKERS DMI 3 EXTRA SP ZONE2/PRESENCE HDMI 4 FRONT CENTER SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP SURROUND CENTER CENTER R.BACK SUBWOOFER e ■ AUDIO OUT FRONT ZONE2 OUT d SURROUND SUR. BACK 1 SUBWOOFER 2 FRONT (L) b Front speaker R FRONT (R) c Center speaker CENTER d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L) e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R) f Surround back speaker SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP (L) h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1 i Subwoofer 2 (optional) SUBWOOFER 2 j Zone2 speaker L (optional) EXTRA SP (L) k Zone2 speaker R (optional) EXTRA SP (R) PRE OUT g ■ f h i 7.1-channel (with presence speakers) Speakers Jacks on this unit FRONT (L) b Front speaker R FRONT (R) c Center speaker CENTER d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L) e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R) f Surround back speaker L SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP (L) SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP (R) h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1 i Subwoofer 2 (optional) SUBWOOFER 2 j Presence speaker L (optional) EXTRA SP (L) k Presence speaker R (optional) EXTRA SP (R) Jacks on this unit a Front speaker L FRONT (L) b Front speaker R FRONT (R) c Center speaker CENTER d Surround speaker L SURROUND (L) e Surround speaker R SURROUND (R) h Subwoofer 1 SUBWOOFER 1 i Subwoofer 2 (optional) SUBWOOFER 2 j Zone2 speaker L (optional) EXTRA SP (L) k Zone2 speaker R (optional) EXTRA SP (R) English g Surround back speaker R Speakers APPENDIX a Front speaker L 5.1-channel (when using the Multi-zone function) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION NPUT a Front speaker L ADVANCED OPERATION X. Jacks on this unit BASIC OPERATION Speakers PREPARATION When you connect speakers, connect them to the respective terminals as follows, according to your speaker layout. 11 En Connections Connecting the speaker cable Caution • A speaker cable is a pair of insulated cables running side by side in general. One of the cables is colored differently or striped to indicate a polarity. Connect one end of the colored/striped cable to the “+” (red) terminal of this unit and the other end to that of your speaker, and connect one end of the other cable to the “–” (black) terminal of this unit and the other end to that of your speaker. • Before connecting the speakers, be sure to disconnect the power cable. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. If the circuit shorts out, “CHECK SP WIRES!” appears on the front panel display when this unit is turned on. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If images on the monitor are still distorted even when you use the magnetically shielded speakers, place the speakers away from the monitor. • Use speakers with an impedance of 6-ohm or larger. Set speaker impedance in “ADVANCED SETUP” before connecting the speakers (see page 60). ■ 1 Connecting to the FRONT, CENTER, SURROUND and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP terminals ■ Connecting to the EXTRA SP terminals 1 Press down the tab and insert the bare end of the speaker cable into the hole in the terminal. Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist bare wires of the cable together so that they will not cause a short circuits. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) y 10 mm (0.4 in) • You can connect the presence speakers (see page 11) or the speakers in the second zone (Zone2) (see page 57) to EXTRA SP terminals. 2 2 Loosen the knob, insert the twisted bare wires into the hole, and then tighten the knob. 2 Red: positive (+) 1 Black: negative (–) 3 Release the tab to secure the wire. Using bi-amplification connections You can connect speakers that support bi-amplification connections to this unit. To connect the speakers via a biamp connection, connect them to the FRONT jacks and SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP terminals as illustrated. To enable the bi-amp connection, connect the power cable to the wall outlet, display the ADVANCED SETUP menu and set “BI AMP” to “ON” (see page 60). Front speakers Right Left Connecting the banana plug (Except Russia and Asia models) Tighten the knob, and then insert the banana plug into the end of the terminal. This unit FRONT SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP Banana plug Caution Before making bi-amplification connections, remove any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a tweeter. Refer to the instruction manuals of speakers for details. When not making bi-amplification connections, make sure that the brackets or cables are connected before connecting the speaker cables. 12 En Connections Information on jacks and cable plugs ■ ■ Audio jacks Jack and cables AUDIO jacks (white) L Description R (red) To transmit coaxial digital audio signals. Use pin cables for digital audio signals. (orange) C O To transmit optical digital audio signals. Use optical fiber cables for optical digital audio signals. OPTICAL Video jacks Jack and cables VIDEO jacks VIDEO V HDMI Description • We recommend that you use a commercially available 19-pin HDMI cable no longer than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • When you connect this unit to a component with a DVI jack, an HDMI/ DVI-D cable is required. • You can check error information on HDMI connections (see page 74). A video signal input to this unit is output from the output terminals in MONITOR OUT for the same kind of signal as the input signal. For example, if a VCR with a composite output signal and a DVD player with a COMPONENT VIDEO output signal are connected, connect both VIDEO jack and COMPONENT VIDEO jack in MONITOR OUT to the video monitor. If an HDMI input compatible monitor is connected, this unit automatically converts an analog signal that is input from a video input terminal to a digital video signal, and then output it from the HDMI OUT jack. Input To transmit conventional composite video signals. Use video pin cables. Output HDMI HDMI COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR COMPONENT VIDEO PR PR To transmit component video signals that include luminance (Y), chrominance blue (PB) and chrominance red (PR) components. Use component video cables. PB PR Y VIDEO PB Y VIDEO Repeat Converted ADDITIONAL INFORMATION (yellow) COMPONENT VIDEO jacks ADVANCED OPERATION ■ HDMI To transmit digital video and digital audio signals. Use HDMI cables. BASIC OPERATION COAXIAL OPTICAL jacks HDMI jacks Description y AUDIO COAXIAL jacks Jack and cables PREPARATION To transmit conventional analog left and right audio signals. Use stereo pin cables. Connect red plugs to red jacks (R) and white plugs to white jacks (L). Video/audio jacks INTRODUCTION This unit has the following input and output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for components that you are connecting. (red) PB PB (blue) Y APPENDIX Y (green) English 13 En Connections Connecting a TV monitor or projector Connect a video monitor such as a TV or projector to an output terminal of this unit. You can select one of the following three types according to the input signal format supported by the video monitor. Note • Make sure that this unit and video monitor are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Outputting sound of a TV from this unit TV, or projector c a To output sound of a TV from this unit, make connection between the AV input 1-6 and an audio output terminal. If the TV supports an optical digital output, we recommend that you use the AV input 1. Connecting to the AV input 1 allows you to switch an input source to the AV input 1 with a just a single key operation using the SCENE function (see page 22). b Y HDMI PB V PR TV, or projector Digital output (optical) (BD/DVD) HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI OUT HDM ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO REMOTE UNBAL. PR FM GND AM IN OUT PB UNBAL. VIDEO PR PR 12V 0.1A MAX. Y MONITOR OUT TRIGGER OUT FM PB GND AM PB VIDEO Y ■ Y M To connect an HDMI video monitor Jacks on components O Jacks on this unit OPTICAL a HDMI input ■ HDMI OUT To connect component video monitor Note • Only video signals input from this unit via the component input terminal are output from the component output terminal. Jacks on components b Component video output ■ Jacks on this unit MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO) To connect composite video monitor Note • Only video signals input from this unit via the composite video input terminal are output from the composite video output terminal. Jacks on components c Video input (composite) 14 En Jacks on this unit MONITOR OUT (VIDEO) COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 ( TV ) AV 1 OPTICAL (CD) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT AUDIO1 AUD Connections Connecting other components Note • Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets. Audio / video input (AV 1-6) Audio / video output (AV OUT) PREPARATION HDMI input (HDMI 1-4) (BD/DVD) SIRIUS DOCK XM HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI OUT HDMI 3 HDMI 4 ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO REMOTE UNBAL. PR PR FM PB GND AM INTRODUCTION This unit has input and output terminals for respective input and output sources. You can reproduce sound and movies from input sources selected with the front panel display or remote control. IN OUT PB VIDEO VIDEO Y 12V 0.1A MAX. Y FRONT MONITOR OUT BASIC OPERATION TRIGGER OUT CENTER Audio output (AUDIO OUT) OPTICAL COAXIAL COAXIAL AV 2 AV 3 ( TV ) AV 1 OPTICAL (CD) AV 4 AV 5 AV 6 AV OUT FRONT AUDIO1 AUDIO2 Audio input (AUDIO 1-2) SUR.BACK MULTI CH INPUT SUBWOOFER AUDIO OUT ZO O Multi channel audio input (MULTI CH) ADVANCED OPERATION ■ SURROUND Audio and video player / Set-top box Output jacks on the connected external component External components External component with component video output HDMI output Audio Optical digital output Video Component video output Audio Coaxial digital output Video Component video output Audio Coaxial digital output Video Composite output Audio Optical digital output Video Composite output Audio Analog audio output Composite output Audio Analog audio output Video Composite output HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 HDMI 4 AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL COMPONENT VIDEO AV 2 COAXIAL COMPONENT VIDEO AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL AV 4 OPTICAL VIDEO VIDEO AV 5 AUDIO AV 6 AUDIO VIDEO VIDEO y • Input sources in parentheses are recommended to connect to the respective jacks. If a component is compatible with the SCENE function, you can switch the input source to that component with a single key operation using the SCENE function (see page 22). • You can change the name of the input source displayed on the front panel display or the OSD on the video monitor as necessary (see page 55). • See page 57 on how to use ZONE2 OUT jacks. 15 En English Video HDMI 1 (BD/DVD) APPENDIX External component with composite video output Audio/Video Output jacks ADDITIONAL INFORMATION External component with HDMI output Input sources/jacks of this unit Signals Connections ■ Audio player Output jacks on the connected external component External components Input sources/jacks of this unit Output jacks External component with optical digital output Optical digital output External component with coaxial digital output Coaxial digital output External component with analog audio output Analog audio output AV 1 (TV) OPTICAL AV 4 OPTICAL AV 2 COAXIAL AV 3 (CD) COAXIAL AV 5 AUDIO AV 6 AUDIO AUDIO 1 AUDIO AUDIO 2 AUDIO y • We recommend connecting the coaxial digital output terminal of a CD player to the AV3 jack. About audio/video output terminals Among the analog audio and analog video signals input to this unit via input terminals, the audio/video signals of the selected input sources are output from the AV OUT jack and AUDIO OUT jack. An HDMI input signal, COMPONENT VIDEO input signal or digital audio input signal cannot be output. When using the AV OUT jack: connect an external component to the composite or analog audio terminal. When using the AUDIO OUT jack: connect an external component to the analog audio terminal. Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder This unit has 8 sets of input jacks (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R, SUR. BACK and SUBWOOFER) to input multi-channel analog sound signals. If your playback component, such as a DVD player or SACD player, has multi-channel analog output capability, you can enjoy up to 7.1-channel multi-channel sound. To output multi-channel sound, connect the audio output jacks of your playback component to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit, and set the input source of this unit to “MULTI CH.” For details on how to change input sources, see page 22. Connecting an external amplifier This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Note • When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make any connections to the SPEAKERS terminals. a b c d CENTER Notes • When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital sound field processor is automatically disabled. • Since this unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, connect at least a 5.1channel speaker system when using this feature. • When the input source is switched to “MULTI CH,” images input from a component connected to “AV1-6” or “V-AUX” (see page 45). If your DVD player does not support multi-channel digital output, connect it to these input jacks. CENTER FRONT SURROUND SUR. BACK 1 SUBWOOFER 2 PRE OUT e a FRONT PRE OUT jacks b SURROUND PRE OUT jacks c SUR. BACK PRE OUT jacks Front channel output jacks. Surround channel output jacks. FRONT SURROUND SUR.BACK Surround back output jacks. When you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the single SUR. BACK jack. SUBWOOFER MULTI CH INPUT L R L R L R y Center out Subwoofer out Surround back out Surround out Front out • To output surround back channel signals at these jacks, set “Sur. Back” to any parameter except “None” (see page 52). d CENTER PRE OUT jack e SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1/2 jacks Center channel output jack. Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. Multi-format player/External decoder (7.1-channel output) 16 En Connections Using REMOTE IN/OUT jacks Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. Be sure to turn down the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. VOLUME INTRODUCTION When the components are the Yamaha products and have the capability of the transmission of the remote control signals, connect the REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks to the remote control input and output jack with the monaural analog mini cable as follows. Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel BD/DVD) HDMI 1 HDMI 2 HDMI 3 HDMI 4 REMOTE l EMORY FM l h PRESET AM CATEGORY h l TUNING/CH PREPARATION COMPONENT VIDEO PR h IN SCENE OUT PB BD/DVD TV CD RADIO STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT INPUT VIDEO OGRAM 12V Y l h VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC h EFFECT VIDEO Remote control out Remote control in DOCK XM Game console/Camcorder Music player Note • When external components are connected both the PORTABLE jack and AUDIO jack, sound input from the PORTABLE jack is output. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION SIRIUS R PORTABLE ADVANCED OPERATION This unit has the DOCK terminal, to which you can connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11, sold separately) or a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA10, sold separately). You can play an iPod or a Bluetooth component with this unit by connecting it to the DOCK terminal. Use a dedicated cable for connection between the dock/ receiver and this unit. L R BASIC OPERATION Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver V AUDIO PORTABLE Analog audio output Yamaha component (CD or DVD player, etc.) L Analog audio output Video output Infrared signal receiver or Yamaha component VIDEO AUDIO HDMI OUT ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO UNBAL. PR FM PB GND A APPENDIX VIDEO Y Yamaha iPod universal dock/Bluetooth wireless audio receiver English 17 En Connections Connecting the FM and AM antennas Connecting the power cable An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are supplied with this unit. Connect these antennas properly to the respective jacks. Indoor FM antenna After all connections are complete, plug the AC power cable of this unit into an AC wall outlet. AM loop antenna Outdoor AM antenna Connect a 5 to 10 m (16 to 33 ft) vinyl-covered wire, and extend it outdoors (use the AM loop antenna together with this antenna). To the AC wall outlet Power cable (BD/DVD) US DOCK XM HDMI 2 HDMI 1 HDMI OUT HDMI 3 H ANTENNA COMPONENT VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO REMOTE UNBAL. PR PR FM PB GND AM IN OUT PB VIDEO VIDEO Y 12V 0.1A MAX. Y FRO MONITOR OUT TRIGGER OUT CENTER Ground (GND terminal) The GND terminal is not for earth grounding. To reduce noises, connect a ground bar or a vinyl-covered wire with a copper plate at its tip, and place it in the moist ground. Turning this unit on and off y • The supplied antennas are normally sensitive enough to obtain good reception. • Position the AM loop antenna away from this unit. • If you cannot get good reception, we recommend that you use an outdoor antenna. For more details, consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. • Always use the AM loop antenna even when the outdoor antenna is connected. Assembling the AM loop antenna 1 Press AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or gPOWER) to turn on this unit. 2 Press AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or gPOWER) again to turn off this unit (standby mode). y • The unit needs a few seconds until ready to play back. • You can also turn on this unit by pressing JSCENE (or lSCENE). • This unit consumes a small amount of electricity even in the standby mode. We recommend disconnecting the power cable from the AC wall outlet. Caution Do not unplug this unit while it is turned on. Doing so may damage this unit or cause the settings of this unit to be saved incorrectly. Connecting the AM loop antenna The wires of the AM loop antenna have no polarity. You can connect either wire to the AM terminal and the other to the GND terminal. Press and hold 18 En Insert Release Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO) 1 AutoSetup EQ Type;;;;Natural . Start []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Start y • See page 51 for the “Manual Setup” procedure. • You can bring up the above menu screen from the setup menu (see page 51). Using Auto Setup 3 y • It is recommended that you use a tripod or something similar to fix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when seated in your listening position. You can fix the optimizer microphone to the tripod with the attaching screw of the tripod. 4 MIN MIN MAX MAX Subwoofer 2 UT VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC APPENDIX Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. When the speakers are connected to EXTRA SP terminals, press oCursor k repeatedly to select “Extra SP Assign,” and then press oCursor l / h to select how to use EXTRA SP terminals from “Zone2,” “Presence” or “None.” If this unit does not work when you press oCursor, press mSETUP once and then operate this unit. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT VOLUME Optimizer microphone ADVANCED OPERATION Check the following points. Before starting the automatic setup, check the following. • All speakers and subwoofer are connected properly. • Headphones are disconnected from this unit. • The video monitor is connected properly. • This unit and the video monitor are turned on. • This unit is selected as the video input source of the video monitor. • The connected subwoofer is turned on and the volume level is set to about half way (or slightly less). • The crossover frequency controls of the connected subwoofer are set to the maximum. BASIC OPERATION 1 Place the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone heading upward. PREPARATION ExtraSPAssign >Zone2Presence None [ y “MIC ON. View OSD MENU” appears on the front panel display. The following menu screen appears on the video monitor. [ Notes • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the “Auto Setup” procedure. Do not allow small children to enter the room during the procedure. • To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible while the “Auto Setup” procedure is in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. INTRODUCTION This unit has a Yamaha Parametric Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO). With the YPAO, this unit automatically adjusts the output characteristics of your speakers based on speaker position, speaker performance, and the acoustic characteristics of the room. We recommend that you first adjust the output characteristics with the YPAO when you use this unit. h VIDEO AUDIO PORTABLE English Optimizer microphone 19 En Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO) 5 To select a sound character for adjustment, press oCursor n to select “EQ Type” and then press oCursor l / h. If this unit does not work when you press oCursor, press mSETUP once and then operate this unit. This unit has a parametric equalizer that adjusts the output levels for each frequency range. The equalizer is adjusted to produce a cohesive sound field based on automatically measured speaker characteristics. In “EQ Type,” you can select the following parametric equalizer characteristics suitable for the desired sound characteristics. Natural This adjusts all speakers to achieve natural sound. Select this if sounds in the high frequency range seem too strong when “EQ Type” is set to “Flat.” Flat This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same characteristics. Select this if your speakers have similar qualities. Front This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same characteristics as the front left and right speakers. Select this if your front left and right speakers have significantly better qualities than the other speakers. 6 Press oCursor n to select “Start” and then press oENTER to start the setup procedure. A countdown starts and a measurement starts in 10 seconds. A loud test tone is output during measurement. Notes • During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any operation on this unit. • Press oCursor k to cancel the automatic setup procedure. Measurement takes about 3 minutes. To obtain precise results, stay where you will not disturb the measurement, such as to the side of or behind the speakers or outside the room. When measurement is successfully completed, “YPAO Complete” appears on the front panel display and the results appear on the monitor. 1 AutoSetup RESULT SP:3/4/0.1 DIST:8.0/8.5ft LVL:-3.5/+4.5dB . >Set Cancel []/[]:Select p [ [ENTER]:Finish SP Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in the following order: Total of Front and Center/Total of Surround and Surround Back/Subwoofer 20 En DIST Displays the speaker distance from the listening position in the following order: Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance LVL Displays the speaker output levels in the following order: Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level Notes • If “ERROR” appears on the video monitor during “Auto Setup,” measurement is canceled and the type of error is displayed. For details, see “When an error message is displayed during measurement” (page 21). • If problems occur during measurement, “WARNING (XX)” (xx indicates the number of warning) appears above “RESULT” (see page 21). 7 Press oENTER to confirm the settings. The speaker characteristics are adjusted according to measurement results. To cancel the operation, press oCursor l / h to select “Cancel” and press oENTER. When the following screen appears, remove the optimizer microphone. “Auto Setup” is now complete. 1 AutoSetup AUTOSETUPComplete DisconnectMicrophone PRESS[ENTER] [SETUP]:Exit The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Store it in a cool place and away from direct sunlight after measurement. Do not leave it in a place where it will be subjected to high temperatures such on an AV component. y • If you do not want to apply the measurement results, select “Cancel.” • Perform “Auto Setup” again if you change the number or positions of speakers. • If you press oENTER before removing the optimizer microphone, “1 Auto Setup” of “Speaker Setup” in the setup menu (see page 51) is displayed. Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO) When an error message is displayed during measurement If a problem occurs during measurement, “WARNING” is displayed on the result display screen. Check the error and solve the problems. WARNING ERROR >RetryExit p [ []/[]:Select [ENTER]:Return Retry Performs “Auto Setup” again. Exit Terminates the measurement and “Auto Setup.” y • See page 70 for details on warning messages. • Optimization will not be performed while a warning message is displayed. We recommend that you solve the problem and perform “Auto Setup” again. Check if “→” is displayed on the left of “WARNING” and press oENTER. Details of the warning message are displayed. If there are multiple warning messages, you can display the next message using oCursor h. 2 To return to the top result display, press oENTER again. y • See page 69 for details on error messages. • When “E-5:NOISY” appears, you can continue measurement. To continue measurement, select “Proceed.” However, we recommend that you solve the problem first and then perform measurement again. BASIC OPERATION 1 PREPARATION W-1:OUTOFPHASE Reversechannel FL--CENTER SL--SBL-- []/[]:Select p [ [ENTER]:Return .E-9:USER CANCEL Don'toperate any function INTRODUCTION Press oCursor n once, and select “Retry” or “Exit” using oCursor l / h and then press oENTER. When a warning message is displayed after measurement ADVANCED OPERATION ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX English 21 En BASIC OPERATION Playback Basic procedure Using the SCENE function 1 Turn on external components (TV, DVD player, etc.) connected to this unit. 2 Press OINPUT l / h (or hInput selection keys) to select an input source. The name of the selected input source is displayed for a few seconds. Input source name VOL. AV1 • You can change the input source name displayed on the front panel display or the OSD on the video monitor as necessary (see page 55). 4 Play the external component that you have selected as the source input, or select a radio station on the tuner. Refer to the operating instructions of the external component for details on playback. For selecting radio stations or playback of an iPod or Bluetooth component using this unit, see the following. • FM/AM radio tuning (see page 29) • Bluetooth component playback (see page 42) • iPod playback (see page 40) Turn the QVOLUME control to adjust the volume (or press pVOLUME +/–). Volume VOL. Volume-18.5dB L SL SW C R SR Note When you play back a DTS-CD, noise may be output in some conditions, which may cause a speaker malfunction. Make sure that the volume is set to low before starting playback. If noise is output, do the following. 1) When only noise is output If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this unit by digital connection and play back the DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved, the problem may results from the playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback component. 2) When noise is output during playback or skip operation Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the option menu after selecting the input source and set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS” (see page 44). 22 En Input source Sound field program BD/DVD HDMI 1 Straight TV AV 1 Straight CD AV 3 Straight RADIO TUNER 7ch Enhancer y y 3 This unit has a SCENE function that allows you to change input sources and sound field programs with one key. Four scenes are available for different usages, such as playing movies or music. The following input sources and sound field programs are provided as the initial factory settings. • When this unit is on standby, you can turn on this unit by pressing the SCENE key. • If a Yamaha DVD player that can receive SCENE control signals is connected to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, the DVD player automatically turns on and starts playback when JSCENE (or lSCENE) is pressed. For details, refer to the instruction manual of the DVD player. Selecting a SCENE Press JSCENE (or lSCENE). Registering input source/sound field program Select the desired input source/sound field program, and press down JSCENE (or lSCENE) until “SET Complete” appears on the front panel display. When the OSD is shown on the video monitor, “SCENE Setting Complete” appears on the video monitor (OSD). Switching remotely controlled external components linked to scene selections You can operate an external component with the remote control of this unit by setting a remote control code for the external component for each input source. Setting remote control codes for desired input sources allows you to switch between external components linked to scene selections. 1 Register the remote control code of an external component to the desired input source (see page 59). Note • Remote control codes cannot be registered to TUNER, SIRIUS, or XM input sources. Playback 2 Press rMUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. The MUTE indicator on the front panel display flashes while audio output is muted. 2 Press rMUTE again to resume audio output. Adjusting high/low frequency sound (tone control) y • The tone control of the speakers or headphones can be set separately. Set the headphone tone control with the headphones connected. Plug your headphones in the BPHONES jack on the front panel. When you select a sound field program while using the headphones, the mode is automatically set to SILENT CINEMA mode. Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • When multi-channel signals are processed, sounds in all channels are divided to left and right channels. When the input source is set to “MULTI CH,” only front L/R sound is output from the headphones. Press KTONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass.” The current setting is displayed on the front panel display. Treble 2 Using your headphones ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 1 The following features are disabled in Pure Direct mode. – sound field program, tone control – display and operation of the option menu and setup menu – multi-zone function ADVANCED OPERATION You can adjust the balance of the high frequency range (Treble) and low frequency range (Bass) of sounds output from the front left and right speakers to obtain desired tone. Press NPURE DIRECT (or kPURE DIRECT) to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off. NPURE DIRECT lights up when you set Pure Direct mode on. The front panel display turns off while the Pure Direct mode is on. It turns on temporarily when you control this unit (such as volume control). The front panel display turns on again once you set the Pure Direct mode to off. BASIC OPERATION 1 Use Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity sound of the selected source. When Pure Direct mode is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. PREPARATION Muting audio output temporarily (MUTE) Enjoying pure hi-fi sound INTRODUCTION Press hInput selection keys on the remote control for the input source whose remote control code was registered in step 1 for about 3 seconds while pressing down lSCENE key whose assignment you want to change. The external component can now be controlled remotely just by selecting a scene. From now on the external component can be remotely controllable just by selecting a scene. 0.0dB APPENDIX Adjust the frequency range using LPROGRAM l / h. Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB The display returns to the previous screen soon after you release the key. Notes • The tone control settings are not effective during playback in Pure Direct mode. • If you set the balance extremely off, sounds may not match those from other channels well. English 23 En Playback Displaying input signal information When HDMI1-4 or AV1-4 is selected as the input source, you can display audio/video signal information. y • Input signal information is displayed on both a video monitor and the front panel display. 1 Select the desired input source, and press nOPTION. The option menu for the selected input source is displayed (see page 43). 2 Press oCursor k / n to select “Signal Info,” and press oENTER. Information on input signals is displayed. See page 44 on information displayed on the screen. Changing information on the front panel display Information displayed on the front panel display can be changed by pressing EINFO (or jINFO). The following information can be displayed according to the input source. For example, if you select HDMI1 input and display “DSP Program,” the following screen appears on the front panel display. Input source Straight Sound field program (DSP program) Notes • You can change items of information displayed on the front panel display using oCursor k / n. • If an HDMI related error occurs, error information is displayed at the bottom of the screen. 3 To end the information display, press nOPTION. HDMI1-4: AV1-6: AUDIO1-2: MULTI CH: V-AUX: FM/AM: Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder Input Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder Frequency, DSP Program, Audio Decoder XM: Channel, Category, Song, Antenna, DSP Program, Audio Decoder SIRIUS: Channel, Category, Artist / Song, Composer, Antenna, DSP Program, Audio Decoder iPod (Simple remote mode): Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder iPod (Menu browse mode): (in PlayInfo displayed) Artist, Album, Song, DSP Program, Audio Decoder (in Play menu displayed) List Bluetooth: Input, DSP Program, Audio Decoder Using the sleep timer The sleep timer is useful if you want to go to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. Press fSLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press fSLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. Sleep 120min. Sleep Off Sleep 90min. Sleep 30min. Sleep 60min. When the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator on the front panel display lights up. Press fSLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “Sleep Off” appears on the front panel display. 24 En Enjoy the sound field programs This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. You can enjoy multi-channel sounds for almost all input sources using various sound field programs stored on the chip and a variety of surround decoders. ■ Selecting a sound field program on the front panel Press LPROGRAM l / h repeatedly to select a desired sound field program. PREPARATION ■ Selecting a sound field program with the remote control Perform the following operations depending on the category of the sound field programs. Sound field programs for movies/TV programs............................... Press kMOVIE repeatedly. Sound field programs for music ....................................................... Press kMUSIC repeatedly. Stereo reproduction .......................................................................... Press kSTEREO repeatedly. Multi-channel stereo reproduction ................................................... Press kSTEREO repeatedly. Compressed music enhancer ............................................................ Press kSTEREO repeatedly. Surround decoder ............................................................................. Press kSUR.DECODE repeatedly. For example, if you select “Sci-Fi” in “movie/TV program,” the following screen appears on the front panel display. INTRODUCTION Selecting sound field programs Sound field program category BASIC OPERATION Sci-Fi Program name Notes Sound field program descriptions ADVANCED OPERATION • Sound field programs are stored for each input source. When you change the input source, the sound field program previously selected for that input source is applied again. • When you play back the Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby TrueHD, DTS Express, DTS-HD Master Audio, or DTS-HD High Resolution Audio sources, this unit does not apply any sound field program other than the surround decoder and they are played back in straight decode mode. • If the sampling frequency of an input source is higher than 96 kHz, this unit does not apply any sound field programs. This unit provides sound field programs for multiple categories including music, movies and stereo reproduction. Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION y • You can check what speakers are currently outputting signals with the speaker indicators on the front panel display (see page 6). • Each program can adjust sound field elements (sound field parameters). For details, see page 46. • in the table indicates the sound field program with CINEMA DSP. For movie/TV program sources Program Descriptions Spectacle This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions. It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound. Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effectsfeaturing movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear separation between dialog, sound effects and background music. Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies. The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio channels and the clarity of the sound. 25 En English This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater,” in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear. APPENDIX Standard Enjoy the sound field programs Program Descriptions Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing. Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth. Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium. Action Game This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions. Roleplaying Game This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game. For audio music sources Program Descriptions Hall in Munich This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly, creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena. Hall in Vienna This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very full, rich sound. Chamber This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. Cellar Club This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage. The Roxy Theatre This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the hall. The Bottom Line This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz club once. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. Music Video This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. For stereo reproduction Program 2ch Stereo Descriptions Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. y • When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. 26 En Enjoy the sound field programs For Multi-channel stereo reproduction Program Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2 channels, and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. The Compressed Music Enhancer Program INTRODUCTION 7ch Stereo Descriptions Descriptions Use this program to enhance the sound nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel compression artifacts. 7ch Enhancer Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo. Surround decode mode Decoder Descriptions PLIIx Movie / PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for movies. If your listening environment is as follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder. • When the surround back speakers are not connected • When headphones are connected PLIIx Music / PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for music. If your listening environment is as follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder. • When the surround back speakers are not connected • When headphones are connected PLIIx Game / PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for games. If your listening environment is as follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder. • When the surround back speakers are not connected • When headphones are connected Neo:6 Cinema DTS decoder suitable for movies. Neo:6 Music DTS decoder suitable for music. Neural Sur. (U.S.A. model only) Neural Surround processing for any sources. The Neural Surround decoder supports PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS Digital Surround, DSD and analog 2-channel input sources. When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surround-incompatible PCM signals are reproduced in stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround program of XM Satellite Radio. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all kinds of sources. ADVANCED OPERATION Pro Logic BASIC OPERATION Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sources on multi-channels. See page 45 for details. PREPARATION Straight Enhancer APPENDIX y • An input source is played back in straight decode mode (see page 28) when multi-channel audio signal is input. English 27 En Enjoy the sound field programs Enjoying unprocessed input sources (Straight decoding mode) In straight decoding mode, sounds are reproduced without sound field effect. 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel input sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels and multi-channel sounds are reproduced without a sound field effect. 1 2 To enable straight decoding mode, press MSTRAIGHT (or kSTRAIGHT). “Straight” appears on the front panel display. To cancel straight decoding mode, press MSTRAIGHT (or kSTRAIGHT) again. A sound field program name appears on the front panel display, and sound is reproduced with that sound field effect. Enjoying sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. You can even enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. When “Sur. L/R SP” in the setup menu is set to “None” (see page 52), this unit operates in Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. Note • Virtual CINEMA DSP is not available in the following conditions even if you set “Sur. L/R SP” to “None” (see page 52). – headphone plug is connected to the PHONES jack. – 7ch Stereo of the field sound program is selected. – Pure Direct mode or straight decoding mode is used. 28 En Enjoy sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA™) SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel sources with your headphones. SILENT CINEMA mode is automatically selected when you connect the headphone plug to the PHONES jack. Note • SILENT CINEMA mode is not available in the following conditions. – 2ch Stereo of the sound field program is selected. – Pure Direct mode or straight decoding mode is selected. Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates the intensive and accurate stereoscopic sound field in the listening room. To use this unit in CINEMA DSP 3D mode, presence speakers are required. Connect the presence speakers to the EXTRA SP jacks, perform the following settings and select a CINEMA DSP related sound field program. • Set the “Extra SP Assign” to “Presence” (see page 51). • Enables the CINEMA DSP 3D in the setup menu (see page 47). • Disconnect the headphones from the PHONES jack. When the sound field program runs in CINEMA DSP 3D mode, the 3D indicator on the front panel lights up. FM/AM tuning The FM/AM tuner of this unit provides the following two modes for tuning. Frequency tuning mode (Auto tuning/Manual tuning) You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by searching or specifying its frequency. • You can switch between stereo and monaural for FM broadcast in the option menu (see page 44). 4 Notes • When you press tNumeric keys during preset tuning, a preset number is selected. Set tuning mode to normal tuning mode using ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n) prior to the operation. • “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that the entered frequency is correct. Note • Adjust the FM/AM antennas connected to this unit for the best reception. Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station (Frequency tuning) 2 Press HFM (iFM) or HAM (iAM) to select a band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display according to the band that you have selected. You can register up to 40 FM/AM stations (Preset) using “Automatic station preset” or “Manual station preset.” Registering stations by automatic station preset The tuner automatically detects FM stations with strong signals and registers up to 40 stations. AM stations cannot be automatically registered. Use manual station preset. 1 Press OINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press hTUNER) to switch the input source to “TUNER.” 2 Press nOPTION on the remote control. The option menu screen for setting options of tuner input appears on the front panel display. STEREO TUNED y FM92.5MHz The frequency changes in the following manner according to how you press ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./ CH k / n). 3 Select “Auto Preset,” and press oENTER. Auto Preset Automatic station preset starts about 5 seconds later from the lowest frequency upwards. y APPENDIX When you press the key more than 1 second The tuner searches the frequency of a station that is detectable around the current frequency. This is effective when the tuner can receive strong signals without any interference. Once the search starts, release the key. When you keep holding the key, the search continues even when a station is detected. This is useful when you want to tune in to a specific station. • For details on the option menu, see page 43. • The option menu is displayed on monitor components. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n) to specify the frequency. To adjust the frequency to a higher range, press h (or k). To adjust it to the lower range, press l (or n). The TUNED indicator on the front panel display lights up when the tuner is tuned in to a station. The STEREO indicator also lights up if the program being broadcasted is in stereo. Registering FM/AM stations and tuning in (Preset tuning) ADVANCED OPERATION 3 Press OINPUT l / h (or hTUNER) repeatedly and switch the input source to “TUNER.” BASIC OPERATION 1 PREPARATION ■ Preset tuning mode (Preset tuning) You can preset the frequencies of FM/AM stations by registering them to specific numbers, and later just select those numbers to tune in. To tune in by direct frequency tuning, enter the frequency of the desired station using the numeric keys on the remote control. Enter only integers. For example, if you want to set the frequency to 88.9 MHz, enter “889” using tNumeric keys. INTRODUCTION ■ y • You can select the preset number at which the preset starts by pressing iPRESET k / n or oCursor k / n while the front panel display is in the state as shown in the below figure. • To cancel registration, press oRETURN on the remote control. English When you press and release the key The tuner increases or decreases the frequency in steps. Use this method when the tuner cannot receive strong signals and stations are skipped during the search. You can listen to better quality sound even when the tuner cannot receive a strong signal. 29 En FM/AM tuning Status Calling a preset station (Preset tuning) 01:FM87.5MHz Preset number Frequency During the automatic station preset, the upper area of the screen changes as follows: READY → SEARCH → MEMORY each time a station is registered. When registration is complete, “FINISH” appears and the option menu screen automatically reappears. When you press nOPTION on the remote control, the screen returns to the original state. Registering stations by manual station preset You can manually register AM stations or FM stations with weak signals. 1 Tune in to a station referring to “Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station (Frequency tuning)” (see page 29). 2 Press FMEMORY (or iMEMORY). “Manual Preset” appears on the front panel display, followed soon by the preset number to which the station will be registered. y You can call preset stations registered by automatic station preset or manual station preset. Press GPRESET l / h (or iPRESET k / n) to select a preset number. y • Preset numbers to which no stations are registered will be skipped. • When “No Presets” or “No Presets in Memory” is displayed it means that no stations are registered. See page 29 and register stations. • You can directly select a preset number by pressing a tNumeric keys while calling a preset station. “Empty” appears on the display if you enter a preset number to which no station is registered. “Wrong Num.” appears if you enter an invalid number. • When you press tNumeric keys during normal tuning, a preset number is selected. Set tuning mode to preset tuning mode using GPRESET l / h (or iPRESET k / n) prior to the operation. Clearing the preset station 1 Press OINPUT l / h repeatedly (or press hTUNER) to switch the input source to “TUNER.” 2 Press nOPTION on the remote control. The option menu screen for setting options of tuner input appears on the front panel display. 3 Display “Clear Preset” using the oCursor k / n and press oENTER. The following screen appears on the display. • By pressing down FMEMORY (or iMEMORY) for more than 2 seconds, you can skip step 3 and register the preset number to be one higher than the last preset number. 3 Press GPRESET l / h (or iPRESET k / n) on the remote control to select the preset number to which the station will be registered. When you select a preset number to which no station is registered, “Empty” appears on the display. When you select a registered preset number, a registered frequency is displayed on the right of the preset number. New registered frequency 01:Empty Flashing Preset number Empty (or frequency that is currently registered to the preset number) y • You can select a preset number using the tNumeric keys. 4 Press FMEMORY (or iMEMORY) again to register. When registration is complete, the screen returns to the original state. y • To cancel registration, press oRETURN on the remote control or leave the tuner without any operations for about 30 seconds. 30 En 01:FM92.5MHz Preset number of the registered station you want to clear. y • You can cancel the operation and return to the option menu screen by pressing oRETURN on the remote control. 4 Select the preset number of the registered station you want to clear using the oCursor k / n and press oENTER. The preset station registered to the selected preset number is cleared. To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers, repeat the above steps. To end the operation, press nOPTION. XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only) Satellite Radio delivers a variety of commercial-free music from categories ranging from Pop, Rock, Country, R&B, Dance, Jazz, Classical and many more plus coverage of all the top professional and college sports including play by play games from select leagues and teams. Additional programming includes expert sports talk, uncensored entertainment, comedy, family programming, local traffic and weather and news from your most trusted sources. To subscribe to XM, U.S. customers should visit xmradio.com or call 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346). PREPARATION Whether you purchase a SIRIUS or XM tuner, you’ll need to activate and subscribe to begin enjoying the service. Easy to follow installation and setup instructions are provided with the satellite tuners. Whichever service you choose, there are a variety of programming packages available, including the option of adding “The Best of SIRIUS” programming to your XM tuner or “The Best of XM” programming to your SIRIUS tuner, enabling you to enjoy the most popular programming among both services. The “Best of” packages are not available to SIRIUS or XM Canada subscribers at this time. Family friendly packages are also available to restrict channels featuring content that may be inappropriate for children. INTRODUCTION Listening to Satellite Radio To listen to Satellite Radio, you’ll need to connect either a SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio tuner (sold separately) to your satellite-ready receiver. Satellite Radio is available to residents of the US (except Alaska and Hawaii). To subscribe to SIRIUS, U.S. customers can call 1-888-539-SIRI (1-888-539-7474) or visit sirius.com (US). Activating XM Satellite Radio SIRIUS DOCK XM COMPONENT VIDEO PR y Note • The XM Radio ID does not use the letters “I,” “O,” “S” or “F.” Activate your XM Satellite Radio service in the U.S. online at http:// activate.xmradio.com/ or call 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346). You will need a major credit card. XM will send a signal from the satellites to activate the full channel lineup. Activation normally takes 10 to 15 minutes, but during peak busy periods you may need to keep your XM Ready home audio system on for up to an hour. When you can access the full lineup on your XM Ready home audio system you are done. 31 En English • To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock must be placed at or near a southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. Use the “Antenna” information on the front panel display or on the OSD screen (see page 34) to check the antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of the antenna. APPENDIX XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock (sold separately) Once you have installed the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, inserted the XM Mini-Tuner, connected the XM MiniTuner Home Dock to your XM Ready® home audio system, and installed the antenna, you are ready to subscribe and begin receiving XM programming. There are three places to find your eight character XM Radio ID: on the XM Mini-Tuner, on the XM Mini-Tuner package, and on XM Channel 0. Record the XM Radio ID in the following eight squares for reference. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Connect XM Mini-Tuner and XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock. Notes • If “CHECK ANTENNA,” “CHECK XM TUNER” or “NO SIGNAL” appears on the front panel display, the connection and setting of the antenna, XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock, or XM Mini-Tuner may not be correct. • When “UPGRADE XM TUNER” is displayed, it means that the connected antenna is old. See page 65 for details. ADVANCED OPERATION Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock BASIC OPERATION SIRIUS XM Radio Legal SIRIUS, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. SIRIUS and XM subscriptions sold separately. Taxes and a one-time activation fee may apply. XM tuners and home docks or SIRIUS tuners (each sold separately) are required to receive the SIRIUS or XM satellite radio service. All programming and fees subject to change. It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate or otherwise make available any technology or software incorporated in receivers compatible with the SIRIUS or XM Satellite Radio Systems. Service not available in Alaska and Hawaii. XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only) XM Satellite Radio® operations 1 ■ Category Search mode 1 Press HCATEGORY l / h (or iCATEGORY l / h) to select the channel category. “CAT” is displayed on the front panel display during the channel category selection. When you select the category, the first channel in the category is selected. Press the OINPUT l / h (or press hXM) to select “XM” as the input source. The XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel appears on the front panel display and video monitor (see page 34). Category search mode Search mode The first channel in the category XM XM Pop 001Preview Category name Channel number Channel name Note y • If you don’t operate within 10 seconds, the category search mode returns to “ALL (All Channel Search).” • When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. Note 2 • If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display or on the OSD, see “XM Satellite Radio” (see page 65). 2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. • To select a channel from the all channel list, see “All Channel Search mode” on this page. • To select a channel by category, see “Category Search mode” on this page. • To select the desired channel directly by entering the channel number, see “Direct number access mode” on this page. • To select a channel from the preset channels, see “Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)” (page 33). y • You can display the XM Satellite Radio information on the front panel display or in the video monitor (see page 34). • You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see page 33). ■ All Channel Search mode Press ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. XM 00880's y • You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n). • You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing HCATEGORY l / h (or iCATEGORY l / h). 32 En While “CAT” is displayed on the front panel display, press ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. y • You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n). Note • This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is not malfunction of this unit): – the channel is out of service. – you do not subscribe to the channel. ■ Direct number access mode Press the tNumeric keys to enter the desired three-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the tNumeric keys as “1,” “2” and “3.” y • To display the Radio ID number displayed on the front panel display, select channel “0.” • To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the tNumeric keys on the remote control and then press tENT to confirm the input number. • Instead of pressing tENT to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel number. • If no key is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel number. • If the selected channel is not available, an advisory message may appear. For details, see “XM satellite radio” on page 65. • If you operate tNumeric keys in preset search mode (see next page), a preset number is selected. If you want to directly select a channel number, press ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n) to switch to All Channel Search mode and enter the number. XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only) Registering XM Satellite Radio channels Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset XM channels. For details, see “Registering preset channels” on this page. Preset channel number XM Registering preset channels Search a channel you want to set as a preset channel in one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. For details, see “XM Satellite Radio operations” (see page 32). y • You can directly select a preset number by pressing a tNumeric keys while calling a preset channel. XM 00880's Clearing preset channels Press FMEMORY (or iMEMORY). The indicator on the front panel display changes as follows. You can clear the assignments of preset XM Satellite Radio channels. Press nOPTION on the remote control. The option menu is displayed on the front panel display. XM 2 Press oCursor n repeatedly to select “Clear Preset” and then press oENTER. 3 Press oCursor k / n to select the preset station number that you want to clear. P01:---<<008 Preset number to which new channel number is registered Channel number to be registered y • To store the selected channel under an empty preset number automatically, press and hold FMEMORY (or iMEMORY) for more than 2 seconds instead of step 2. In this case, the following steps are unnecessary. • To cancel the preset operation, press oRETURN. Press GPRESET l / h (or iPRESET k / n) to select the stored preset station number. Note • You can also select a preset number by pressing the tNumeric keys. 4 XM 008 80's 4 Press oENTER to execute the clearing of the selected preset channel. To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers, repeat the above steps. To end the operation, press nOPTION. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 3 ADVANCED OPERATION 1 Currently registered channel number (or “---” if empty) BASIC OPERATION 2 Press GPRESET l / h (or iPRESET k / n) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 40). PREPARATION 1 00880's INTRODUCTION You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels. You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel as described in “Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)” on this page. Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode) Press FMEMORY (or iMEMORY). APPENDIX English 33 En XM® Satellite Radio tuning (U.S.A. model only) Displaying the XM Satellite Radio™ information Use this feature to display the XM Satellite Radio information on the front panel display or on the OSD. ■ Video monitor (OSD) Press qDISPLAY on the remote control to turn on or off the information display. The following information is displayed on the OSD. XMANT: Note • If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display or video monitor, see “XM Satellite Radio” (see page 65). a ■ b Front panel display c Press EINFO (or jINFO) repeatedly to toggle the following XM Satellite Radio information display modes. AllCHSearch 008:'80s :Decades :Sanumemo :RoadtoIndia a Search mode (see page 32) b Channel category c Song title d Antenna reception level e Channel number/name Category f Artist name Channel category, channel number y Channel Channel number, channel name Artist / Song Artist name, song title, channel number Antenna Antenna reception level, channel number DSP Program Current sound field program (see page 25) Audio Decoder Current Audio Decoder (see page 27) Back to “Channel” Front Panel Display (example) XM Antenna y • If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space. • When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears. 34 En d e f • To turn off the OSD, press qDISPLAY. • You can hold the music information screen or release it by oENTER. SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only) Connecting the SiriusConnect™ tuner SiriusConnect Tuner and the antenna (sold separately) Press the OINPUT l / h (or press hSIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input source. 2 Press t0 and then tENT to display the Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner. “000 Sirius ID” and “xxxxxxxxxxxx” (“xxxxxxxxxxxx” indicates the 12-digit Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner) appears alternately on the front panel display. Write the Sirius ID below. SIRIUS T AN DC 5V ID:________________________________________ PREPARATION 1 INTRODUCTION Connect the SiriusConnect tuner (sold separately) to the SIRIUS jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with the SiriusConnect tuner. Displaying the Sirius ID of your SiriusConnect tuner To the AC wall outlet 3 SIRIUS Satellite Radio online information Contact for activation URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/ Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474) y • Status messages appear on the front panel display or OSD during the activation. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (see page 66). Once the activation is finished, “SUB UPDATED” appears. Notes • If “CHECK SR TUNER” or “ANTENNA ERROR” appears on the front panel display, the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner or antenna is incorrect. In such cases, check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and the antenna. • If “NOT SUPPORTED” appears on the front panel display, this unit does not support the connected SiriusConnect tuner. 1 Press the OINPUT l / h (or press hSIRIUS) to select “SIRIUS” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the SIRIUS indicator lights up on the front panel display and the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel appears on the front panel display. Search mode APPENDIX Before using the SIRIUS Satellite Radio feature, you need to activate your SIRIUS Satellite Radio subscription. To activate the subscription you need the Sirius ID which is uniquely assigned to the SiriusConnect tuner. Sirius ID is 12-digit number and it appears on the package of the SiriusConnect tuner, on the label of the SiriusConnect tuner, and when you tune into the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel “0” (see below). SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ operations ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Activating SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ subscription Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to activate your subscription. ADVANCED OPERATION • To ensure optimal reception of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio signals, the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner must be placed at or near a window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. The orientation of the antenna for the best reception differs depending on the area. Refer to the instruction manuals supplied with the SiriusConnect tuner for the installation of the antenna. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. • Use the “Antenna” information in the front panel or “SIRIUS Information” screen in the video monitor (see page 39) to check the antenna reception level and adjust the orientation of the antenna. • You need to connect the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet. BASIC OPERATION y SIRIUS 184Weather Channel number Channel name y • When you select “SIRIUS” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. 35 En English Notes • When you have not activated your subscription yet, you can only select “184” or “000.” • If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display or on the OSD, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (see page 66). SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only) 2 Search for a channel by using one of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes. • To select a channel from the all channel list, see “All Channel Search mode” on this page. • To select a channel by category, see “Category Search mode” on this page. • To select the desired channel directly by entering the channel number, see “Direct number access mode” on this page. • To select a channel from the preset channels, see “Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)” (page 37). y • You can display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information on the front panel display or in the video monitor (see page 39). • If you tune into a channel that you do not subscribe, “CALL SIRIUS on the front panel display” or “CALL 888-539-SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE on the OSD” appears. • You can set the SIRIUS Satellite Radio preset channels (see page 37). ■ All Channel Search mode Press ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. SIRIUS 001Hits1 y • You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n). • You can skip channels to the previous or next category by pressing HCATEGORY l / h (or iCATEGORY l / h). ■ Category Search mode 1 Press HCATEGORY l / h (or iCATEGORY l / h) to select the channel category. “CAT” is displayed on the front panel display during channel category selection. When you select the category, the first channel in the category is selected. Category search mode The first channel in the category SIRIUS Pop Category name Note • If you don’t operate within 10 seconds, the category search mode returns to “ALL (All Channel Search).” 2 While “CAT” is displayed on the front panel display, press ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n) repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. 36 En y • You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n). Note • This unit skips the channels when this unit is in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode in the following cases (it is not malfunction of this unit): – the channel is locked (see page 38). – the channel is out of service. – you do not subscribe to the channel. ■ Direct number access mode Press the tNumeric keys to enter the desired three-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the tNumeric keys as “1,” “2” and “3.” y • To display the Sirius ID number displayed on the front panel display, select channel “0.” • To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the tNumeric keys on the remote control and then press tENT to confirm the input number. • Instead of pressing tENT to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel number. • If no key is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel number. • If the selected channel is locked, “PIN:___” appears on the front panel display. Enter the four-digit Parental Lock code number by using the tNumeric keys or press tENT to cancel (see page 38). • If the selected channel is not available, an advisory message may appear. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” on page 66. • If you operate tNumeric keys in preset search mode (see next page), a preset number is selected. If you want to directly select a channel number, press ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n) to switch to All Channel Search mode and enter the number. SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only) Registering the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ channels Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset SIRIUS channels. For details, see “Registering preset channels” on this page. SIRIUS 001Hits1 Registering preset channels Search a channel you want to set as a preset channel in one of the SIRIUS Satellite Radio search modes. For details, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio operations” (see page 35). SIRIUS 2 Press FMEMORY (or iMEMORY). The indicator on the front panel display changes as follows. Currently registered channel number (or “---” if empty) Clearing preset channels You can clear the assignments of preset SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels. Press nOPTION on the remote control. The option menu is displayed on the front panel display. 2 Press oCursor n repeatedly to select “Clear Preset” and then press oENTER. 3 Press oCursor k / n to select the preset station number that you want to clear. SIRIUS P01:---<<001 Preset number to which new channel number is registered 001 Hits 1 Channel number to be registered y Press GPRESET l / h (or iPRESET k / n) to select the stored preset station number. 4 Press oENTER to execute the clearing of the selected preset channel. To clear the registration of multiple preset numbers, repeat the above steps. To end the operation, press nOPTION. Notes ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • To store the selected channel under an empty preset number automatically, press and hold FMEMORY (or iMEMORY) for more than 2 seconds instead of step 2. In this case, the following steps are unnecessary. • To cancel the preset operation, press oRETURN. 3 SIRIUS ADVANCED OPERATION 1 BASIC OPERATION 001Hits1 Press GPRESET l / h (or iPRESET k / n) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 40). PREPARATION 1 INTRODUCTION You can use this feature to store up to 40 SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels. You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as described in “Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode)” on this page. Calling a preset channel (Preset Search mode) • You can also select a preset number by pressing the tNumeric keys. • If you select a preset number being used (“*” appears next to the preset number), the current preset channel will be overwritten. Press FMEMORY (or iMEMORY). The selected channel is stored as a preset channel. APPENDIX 4 English 37 En SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only) Setting the Parental Lock You can use the Parental Lock feature to limit the access to the desired SIRIUS Satellite channels. This unit automatically skips the locked channels when this unit is in the All Channel Search mode or Category Search mode and you search a channel by pressing ITUNING/CH l / h (or iTUN./CH k / n). Notes • You can also select a channel by using iCATEGORY l / h or iTUN./CH k / n. • While the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list screen is displayed, sound of the selected channel is output even the channel is locked. 7 Setting the code number and the locking channels Press oENTER to lock the selected channel. A check mark appears next to the locked channel on the video monitor. You can toggle channel lock and unlock as you press oENTER. Locked channel Use this feature to set the Parental Lock code number (PIN) and select the channels to be locked. 2 Press oCursor n repeatedly to select “Parental Lock” and then press oENTER. 3 Enter the desired 4-digit code number by using the oCursor k / n l / h. If you have entered a code number before, enter the same code number. The entered code number is needed for tuning in the channel or unlocking the channel. Write it down the space provided below. Code number: ________________________________ 4 Press oENTER twice to confirm the code number. A confirmation screen appears with the first press. When you press again, “OK” and then the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channel list appears. Note • If a code number is already registered and you enter the different number, “Wrong” appears and the screen returns to step 3. Enter the correct code number. 5 PARENTALLOCK Channel category [ CAT:Pop1/3 001:SiriusHits1 002:TheBlend 003:SiriusXMLove 004:The40son4 005:The50son5 []/[]:Channel []/[]:Category p [ [ENTER]:Lock/Unlock [ 6 8 Repeat steps 5 through 7 to lock all the desired channels. 9 Press oRETURN repeatedly to exit the “PARENTAL LOCK” screen. This unit is tuned into the last channel you select in the “PARENTAL LOCK” screen. If the channel is locked, this unit is tuned into “184 SIRIUS Weather & Emergency” or “000 Sirius ID.” y • If you forget the Parental lock code or want to change it, reset it using “SR PIN” (see page 60). Tuning into the locked channels If you want to tune in the locked channels, set this unit to Direct number access mode or preset tuning mode. When you tune into the locked channel, “LOCKED” appears on the front panel display and video monitor, followed by the following message. Enter the set Parental lock code by using the tNumeric keys. To cancel this operation, press tENT. Press oCursor l / h to select a category of that channel and a channel you want to lock. Page number in the category Press oCursor k / n to select a channel you want to lock. 38 En [ Press nOPTION on the remote control. The option menu is displayed on the front panel display and video monitor. CAT:Pop1/3 001:SiriusHits1 002:TheBlend 003:SiriusXMLove 004:The40son4 005:The50son5 []/[]:Channel []/[]:Category p [ [ENTER]:Lock/Unlock [ 1 PARENTALLOCK PIN: Note • If an incorrect number is entered, “Wrong” appears on the front panel display or the video monitor and this unit is tuned into the previously selected channel. SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ tuning (U.S.A. model only) Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio™ information Note • If a status message or an error message appears on the front panel display or video monitor, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio” (see page 66). ■ Front panel display Channel Antenna y • If the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space. • When the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner cannot receive the signals, “ACQUIRING” appears on the front panel display. • When an information is unavailable, “––––” appears. ■ Video monitor (OSD) Press qDISPLAY on the remote control to turn on or off the information display. The following information is displayed on the OSD. SIRIUS Channel number, channel name a c Channel category, channel number AllCHSearch 001:SIRIUSHits1 :Pop :Sanumemo :RoadtoIndia C:FrankieZipper a Search mode (see page 35) Artist name, song title, channel number b Channel category c Song title d Antenna reception level Composer e Channel number/name f Artist name Composer name, channel number g Composer name e f g ADVANCED OPERATION Artist/Song d BASIC OPERATION b Category ANT: PREPARATION Press EINFO (or jINFO) repeatedly to toggle the following SIRIUS Satellite Radio information display modes. SIRIUS INTRODUCTION Use this feature to display the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information on the front panel display or on the OSD. Front Panel Display (example) y Antenna Antenna reception level, channel number ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • To turn off the OSD, press qDISPLAY. • You can hold the music information screen or release it by oENTER. DSP Program Current sound field program (see page 25) APPENDIX Audio Decoder Current Audio Decoder (see page 27) English Back to “Channel” 39 En Using iPod™ Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-11, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit (see page 17), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control or the menu displayed on the video monitor. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 27). Notes • iPod touch, iPod (Click and Wheel including iPod classic), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. • Some features may not be available depending on the model of Yamaha iPod universal dock. The following sections describe the procedure when using the YDS-11. y • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears on the front panel display. • For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display and on the video monitor, see the “iPod” section on page 68. Controlling iPod in menu browse mode Controlling iPod™ You can control your iPod when you set it in the iPod universal dock and switch the input source to DOCK. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the video display (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode). When you connect your iPod to this unit, you can perform the following operations with the remote control. Key ENTER o s q Function Menu up n Menu down l Previous menu h Subsequent menu w Search backward (Press and hold) f Search forward (Press and hold) a Skip forward b Skip backward s Stop e Pause (Menu browse mode) Play/Pause (Simple remote mode) p Play (Menu browse mode) Play/Pause (Simple remote mode) Switch between Menu browse mode and Simple remote mode Controlling iPod in simple remote mode You can perform basic iPod operations (play, stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without displaying the menu on the video monitor. You can also directly control your iPod in this mode. 40 En y • “_”(underscore) is displayed for characters that this unit cannot display. 1 Change the input source to “iPod (DOCK)” using OINPUT l / h (or hDOCK). 2 Press qDISPLAY on the remote control. The following screen appears on the video monitor. Subsequent menu k DISPLAY You can perform advanced iPod operations using the remote control while looking at the menu displayed on the video monitor. You can browse the song files or video files stored on your iPod and displayed on the monitor. You cannot directly control your iPod in this mode. iPodTop Music> Videos> 3 Press oCursor k / n to select “Music” or “Videos” and press oCursor h. • Select “Music” to browse music files. • Select “Videos” to browse video files. Note • “Videos” will not be displayed when your iPod or Yamaha iPod universal dock do not support the browser function for browsing video files. Using iPod™ 4 Press oCursor k / n / l / h to select a menu item and then oENTER to start playback. Shuffle/repeat playback Press qDISPLAY to switch to menu browse mode while “DOCK” is selected as the input source. The option menu can be displayed only in menu browse mode. Press qDISPLAY to switch to menu browse mode before starting shuffle or repeat playback. Menu items of “Videos” Menu items vary depending on the files stored on your iPod. 2 Press nOPTION. The option menu is displayed. 3 Press oCursor k / n to select the desired playback function, Shuffle or Repeat, then press oENTER. The following playback styles are available depending on the playback function selected. ■ Description of the play information display g b c d e f Shuffle: Plays back songs or albums in random order (Choices: Off, Songs, Albums). • Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in random order. • Select “Songs” to play back songs in random order. • Select “Albums” to play back albums in random order. i Repeat: Plays back songs or albums repeatedly (Choices: Off, One, All). • Select “Off” if you do not want to play back repeatedly. • Select “One” to repeat each song. • Select “All” to repeat all songs. (search forward) and 4 y • You can change information screens on the front panel display using EINFO (or jINFO) (see page 24). Items displayed on the front panel display vary depending on mode that is currently selected. Select the desired style using oCursor l / h. The style is selected. Playback starts with the function selected in step 2. To return to the previous screen, press oRETURN. To return to the previous playback function, redo the above steps. APPENDIX y • When the shuffle function is on, “ ” appears on the video monitor. • When “Repeat” is set to “One” or “All,” “ 1 ” or “ All ” appears on the video monitor. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION a Track number/total tracks b Artist name c Album title d Song title e Progress bar f Elapsed time g Shuffle and repeat icons h (playback), (pausing), (search backward) i Remaining time h ADVANCED OPERATION iPod[Play] 1/9 FrankieZipper Made-to-order RoadtoIndia |||||;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; 0:51-7:44 All a BASIC OPERATION 1 PREPARATION Menu items of “Music” Playlists, Artists, Albums, Songs, Genres, Composers • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs INTRODUCTION You can use a special playback function such as shuffle playback and repeat playback by setting the option menu. English 41 En Using Bluetooth™ components You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of this unit and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without wiring between this unit and the Bluetooth component. You need to perform “Pairing” the connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth component in advance. Note • This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of the Bluetooth profile. Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth™ component “Pairing” refers to the operation of registering a Bluetooth component for Bluetooth communications. Pairing must be performed when using a Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connected to this unit for the first time or if the pairing data has been deleted. 5 Make sure the Bluetooth component recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. If the Bluetooth have recognized the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver, “YBA-10 YAMAHA,” for instance, is displayed in the Bluetooth device list. 6 Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from the Bluetooth device list, and enter a path key “0000” into the Bluetooth component. When pairing is complete, “Completed” appears on the front panel display. y • You only need the pairing operation for the first time that you use the Bluetooth component with the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. • Pairing requires operations on this unit and on the other component with which Bluetooth communications are to be established. If necessary, refer to the other component’s operating instructions. ■ Pairing the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth component To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for the pairing operation. You are recommended to read and fully understand all the instructions before starting. y • The Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver can be paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. When pairing is conducted successfully with a ninth component and the pairing data is registered, the pairing data for the least recently used other component is cleared. Playback of the Bluetooth™ component 1 Change the input source to “DOCK” using OINPUT l / h (or hDOCK). 1 Change the input source to “DOCK” using OINPUT l / h (or hDOCK). 2 Turn on the Bluetooth component you want to pair with and set it to pairing mode. For details on operation of the Bluetooth component, refer to its operating instructions. 2 Press nOPTION. 3 Press oCursor n repeatedly to select “Connect” and press oENTER. After you execute “Connect,” communication with the Bluetooth component is established. When the connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver recognizes the Bluetooth component, “BT Connected” appears on the front panel display. 3 Press nOPTION. The option menu for DOCK input appears on the video monitor. DOCKOPTION y .VolumeTrim Connect Pairing • When you press oENTER on the remote control, the connected Bluetooth wireless audio receiver searches and connects to the last connected Bluetooth component. If the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver cannot find the Bluetooth component, “Not found” appears on the front panel display. • To disconnect the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from the Bluetooth component, display the option menu again, select “Disconnect,” and press oENTER. 4 [ [ []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Select Press oCursor n to select “Pairing” and press oENTER. “Searching” appears on the front panel display and the pairing operation starts. y • To cancel pairing, press oRETURN. • You can also start pairing operation by pressing and holding FMEMORY on the front panel. 42 En 4 Start playback of the Bluetooth component. ADVANCED OPERATION Setting the option menu for each input source (OPTION menu) Select an input source using OINPUT l / h (or hInput selection keys). 2 Press nOPTION on the remote control. The OPTION menu appears. The displayed OPTION menu items differ depending on the input source. For details, see the following section. OPTION menu items The following menu items are provided for each input source. Input Source Volume Trim Decoder Mode Extended Surround Signal Info AV1-4 Volume Trim Decoder Mode Extended Surround Signal Info AV5-6 Volume Trim AUDIO1-2 Volume Trim V-AUX Volume Trim TUNER Volume Trim FM Mode Auto Preset Clear Preset XM Volume Trim Clear Preset SIRIUS Volume Trim Parental Lock Clear Preset iPod (DOCK) Volume Trim Shuffle Repeat Bluetooth (DOCK) Volume Trim Connect/ Disconnect Pairing MULTI CH Volume Trim Video Out 3 4 Select the desired menu item using oCursor k / n, and press oENTER. Parameters of the selected menu item are displayed. Change the setting of the selected menu item (or enable a function) using oCursor k / n / l / h and oENTER. Details of the selected menu item are displayed. Parameters you can set differ depending on the menu items. y • When oCursor or other keys do not work after completing the menu, select the input source again using hInput selection keys. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To close the OPTION menu, press nOPTION. You can also use oRETURN to return to the previous screen or close the OPTION menu. ADVANCED OPERATION 5 [ [ []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Select BASIC OPERATION HDMI1-4 HDMI1OPTION .VolumeTrim DecoderMode ExtendedSurround SignalInfo Menu item PREPARATION 1 INTRODUCTION This unit has an OPTION menu of frequently used menu items for input sources compatible with this unit. The procedure for setting the OPTION menu items is described below. Details of the menu items are as follows: y • The default settings are marked with “*.” ■ Volume Trim Reduces any change in volume when switching input sources by correcting volume differences between input sources. You can set this parameter for each input source. APPENDIX Input source: All Adjustable range: -6.0 dB to 0.0 dB* to +6.0 dB (in 0.5 dB steps) English 43 En Setting the option menu for each input source (OPTION menu) ■ Decoder Mode Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 Choices: Auto*/DTS Selects DTS digital audio signals for reproduction. Auto DTS ■ Automatically selects audio input signals. Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals are not reproduced. Extended Surround Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 Choices: Auto*/PLIIxMovie/PLIIxMusic/EX/ES/ Off Selects whether to reproduce multi-channel input signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel when surround back speakers are used. Auto PLIIx Movie PLIIx Music EX/ES Off Automatically selects the most suitable decoder according to whether a flag for reproducing surround back channel is present, and reproduces the signals in 6.1- or 7.1channel. Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1channel using the PLIIxMovie decoder whether or not surround back channel signals are contained. You can select this parameter when one or two speakers are connected. Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1channel using the PLIIxMusic decoder whether or not surround back channel signals are contained. You can select this parameter when one or two speakers are connected. Automatically selects the most suitable decoder for input signals whether or not the flag for reproducing surround back channel is present, and always reproduces signals in 6.1channel. Always reproduces signals in 5.1-channel whether or not the flag for reproducing surround back channel is present. ■ Signal Info Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4 Displays information on audio and video signals on the video monitor and front panel display. You can change items to be displayed using oCursor k / n. Signal Info parameters ■ Audio information Information Description Format Format of digital audio signals. Channel The number of input signal channels (front/ surround/LFE). For example, if input signal channels are 3 front channels, 2 surrounds and LFE, “3/2/ 0.1” is displayed. If a channel that cannot be expressed as the above, a total number of channels such as “5.1ch” may be displayed. Sampling The sampling frequency of digital input signal. Bitrate The bit rate of input signal per second. Notes • “No Signal” is displayed when no signals are input and “---” is displayed when signals that this unit cannot recognize are input. • The bit rate may vary during playback. ■ Video information Information Description In Format and resolution of video input signal. Out Format and resolution of video output signal. Message Error messages about HDMI signals and HDMI components. See the following for details of the error messages. HDMI error message (appears only when an error has occurred) HDCP authentication failed. HDCP Error Device Over The number of HDMI components connected is Out of Res. ■ over the limit. The connected monitor is not compatible with the video input signal. FM Mode Input source: TUNER Choices: Stereo*/Mono Sets FM broadcasting receiving mode. Stereo Receives in stereo mode. Mono Receives in monaural mode. You can get a better reception in Mono mode. 44 En Setting the option menu for each input source (OPTION menu) ■ Auto Preset Input source: TUNER ■ Clear Preset Input source: TUNER, XM, SIRIUS 1 Press OINPUT l / h (or hMULTI) to change the input source to “MULTI CH.” 2 Press nOPTION on the remote control. The OPTION menu appears. 3 Press oCursor k / n to display “Video,” and press oENTER. Parental Lock Input source: SIRIUS Shuffle Input source: iPod (DOCK) Choices: Off*/Songs/Albums Changes the shuffle playback style (see page 41). ■ Repeat Input source: iPod (DOCK) Choices: Off*/One/All Changes the repeat playback style (see page 41). ■ Connect / Disconnect Input source: Bluetooth (DOCK) Video;;;;;;AV1 Switches communication with a Bluetooth component on and off (see page 42). Pairing Press oCursor l / h to select a video input terminal from the following to input a video signal that is output to the video monitor during reproducing a multi-channel audio signal. – AV1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO terminal) – AV3-6 (COMPOSIT terminal) – V-AUX (COMPOSIT terminal) – Off (no video output) 5 To end the setting, press nOPTION. Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component (see page 42). ■ Video Out Input source: MULTI CH Choices: AV1 to 6/V-AUX/Off* When the multi-channel input is selected, an input signal input from another terminal is outputted to the video monitor. See “Outputting a video signal input from another input source during reproducing a multi-channel audio signal” on this page. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 4 Input source: Bluetooth (DOCK) ADVANCED OPERATION ■ BASIC OPERATION ■ ■ PREPARATION Set the Parental Lock (see page 38). When “MULTI” is selected as the input source, a video signal input from another terminal can be output to the video monitor. For example, even if an audio and video component such as a DVD player that does not support a multi-channel digital audio output, the video signal can be output to the video monitor while reproducing a multichannel analog audio signal. When TUNER is selected:See page 30. When XM is selected: See page 33. When SIRIUS is selected: See page 37. INTRODUCTION Automatically detects radio stations in the FM frequency band and registers them as preset stations (see page 29). Outputting a video signal input from another input source during reproducing a multi-channel audio signal APPENDIX English 45 En Editing surround decoders/sound field programs Selecting a decoder used with a sound field program 5 When using sound field programs for movies or TV programs, you can select a surround decoder to be used with the sound field program after setting the parameters from the following decoders. To set the parameters for sound field programs, see the following section. Decoders that can be used with a sound field program • PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie) • Neo:6 Cinema y • Repeat steps 4 and 5 to change other sound field program parameters. • A complete list of the parameters of some sound field programs may exceed one page. In this case, press oCursor k / n to scroll through pages. Note • The following MOVIE sound field programs cannot be used with a surround decoder. – Mono Movie – Sports – Action Game – Roleplaying Game Setting sound field parameters Although the field sound programs would satisfy you as they are with the default parameters, you can arrange sound effect or decoders suitable for acoustical conditions of sources or rooms by setting the parameters (sound field elements). Press oCursor k / n to select the parameter that you want to change, and press oCursor l / h to change the parameter. An asterisk (*) appears on the left of the sound field parameter name displayed on the monitor when you change the parameter from its default setting. For details on functions and adjustable ranges of the sound field parameters, see “Sound field parameters” on this page. 6 To end the edit, press mSETUP. To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field program, oCursor n repeatedly to select “Initialize” and then press, oCursor h. When the confirmation screen appears on the monitor, press oCursor h to confirm the initialization or oCursor l to cancel it. Sound field parameters y • The default settings are marked with “*.” y • You can protect the sound field against the changes of parameters the sound filed parameters when “Memory Guard” of the setup menu is set to “On” (see page 56). To change the parameters, set it to “Off.” 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press mSETUP on the remote control. The setup menu appears on the monitor. 3 Press oCursor k / n to select “DSP Parameter” and press oENTER. The screen changes as follows. Sound field program MOVIE1/2 .Sci-Fi SUR.;;;;PLII Movie 3DDSP;;;;;;;;;ON DSPLevel;;;;;0dB P.Init.Dly;;;16ms P.RoomSize;;;1.0 S.Init.DLY;;;;2ms p Cursor [ []/[]:Select Sound field parameters 4 Set values Press oCursor k / n to move “→” to the sound field program and press oCursor l / h to select the sound field program. 46 En CINEMA DSP basic parameters DSP Level Adjustable range: -6 dB to 0 dB* to +3 dB Fine adjusts an effect level (level of the sound field effect to be added). You can adjust the level of the sound field effect while checking sound levels. Adjust “DSP Level” as follows. • The effect sound is too soft. • There are no differences between effects of the sound field programs. →Increase the effect level. • The sound is dull. • The sound field effect is added too much. →Reduce the effect level. Editing surround decoders/sound field programs Dialog Lift Choices: 0* to 5 The ideal dialogue position INTRODUCTION Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is at the center of the video monitor screen. Adjusts attenuation characteristics of early-reflected sound. You can create a lively sound field (with a high reverberant sound level) as you increase the value, and a dead sound field (with a low reverberant sound level) as you decrease the value. Creating either a lively sound field or a dead sound field in an actual music hall is determined by the acoustic absorption characteristics of reflection surfaces. A dead sound field is created when the attenuation time is short while a lively sound field is created when the attenuation time is long. Original source sound Level Level Early-reflected sound Time Delay Time Delay PREPARATION If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video monitor screen, increase the value of “Dialog Lift.” Sound source BASIC OPERATION Move up to the ideal dialogue position Reflecting surface When the value is set to zero, the position is at the lowest. The position gets higher as you increase the value. Small = 1ms Notes Sound field parameters for the advanced configurations ■ • We recommend that you adjust the size of corresponding sound field when you adjust the delay time. ■ Parameters for specifying room size Parameter Parameter for CINEMA DSP 3D 3D DSP On* / Off When CINEMA DSP 3D is enabled, sets whether to use sound field programs in 3D mode. Note • When the presence speakers are not used, the 3D DSP parameters are not displayed. Parameters for adjusting early-reflected sound Parameter 0.1 to 2.0 Produces different senses of sound expansion according to room sizes specified. In a large size room such as a music hall, the duration from when reflected sound is heard until when the next reflected sound is heard is long. Thus, different senses of sound expansion can be created by changing the duration. 1.0 is the original room size. When this parameter is set to 2.0, each side of the room is defined as twice larger than the original room size. 1 to 99ms 1 to 99ms 1 to 49ms 1 to 49ms APPENDIX Init.Dly P.Init.Dly S.Init.Dly SB Init.Dly Adjustable range Room Size, P.Room Size, S.Room Size, SB Room Size Adjustable range ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Choices: ■ y ADVANCED OPERATION • “Dialog Lift” is displayed only when the presence speakers are available. • You cannot the move the dialogue position loser than the default setting. Large = 99ms English 47 En Editing surround decoders/sound field programs Source sound Level Level Early reflections Time Time Sound source Rev.Time parameter adjusts the attenuation time of the rear reverberant sound based on the time that about 1kHz reverberant sound takes for 60dB of attenuation. Reverberant sound attenuates faster as you decrease the value. Rev.Time adjustment allows you to create a natural reverberant sound, by setting the attenuation time longer for a sound source or room with less echo, or shorter for a sound source or room with more echo. Rear reverberation Source sound Rear reverberation Early reflections 60dB 60dB Time Small = 0.1 Rev.Time Short reverberation Long reverberation Parameters for defining attenuation characteristics of early-reflected sound Parameter Adjustable range Liveness S.Liveness SB Liveness Time Rev.Time Sound source 0 to 10 0 to 10 0 to 10 Small = 1.0s Adjusts the attenuation of reflected sound. You can create a lively sound field (with a high reverberant sound level) as you increase the value, and a dead sound field (with a low reverberant sound level) as you decrease the value. Creating either a lively sound field or a dead sound field in an actual music hall is determined by the acoustic absorption characteristics of reflection surfaces. A dead sound field is created when the attenuation time is short while a lively sound field is created when the attenuation time is long. Large = 5.0s Rev.Delay parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. Increasing the value of Rev.Delay allows you to create a reverberant sound in a wider area for the same Rev.Time. Level ■ Large = 2.0 Source sound (dB) Source sound Live Level Level Dead 60dB Reverberation Time Time Time Rev.Delay Small reflected sound Large reflected sound Small = 0 ■ Large = 10 Parameters for adjusting reverberant sound Parameter Rev.Time Rev.Delay Rev.Level 48 En Adjustable range 1.0 to 5.0s 0 to 250ms 0 to 100% Rev.Time Editing surround decoders/sound field programs Rev.Level parameter adjusts the reverberation sound level. Increasing the value of Rev.Level makes the reverbration sound level higher, which allows you to create more echo. Decoder parameters Source sound Level When PLIIx Music/PLII Music is selected Panorama (dB) Choices: Off*/On Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. Rev.Level Adjustable range: -3 to STD* to +3 Time Parameters only usable in certain sound field programs 2ch Stereo only Choices: Auto*/Off Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control circuit when an analog sound source is selected as the input source. You can enjoy a higher quality sound. 7ch Stereo only CT Level/SL Level/SR Level/ SB Level Adjustable range: 0 to 100% Adjustable range: 0 to 3* to 7 You can spread the center sound toward left and right according to your preference. Set this parameter to 0 for outputting the center sound from the center speaker only, or to 7 for outputting it from the front left/right speaker. When Neo:6 Music is selected C.Image Adjustable range: 0.0 to 0.3* to 1.0 Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. ADVANCED OPERATION Auto Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and tone control circuit when the “Bass” and “Treble” tone controls are both set to 0 dB. Off Do not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control. Center Width BASIC OPERATION Direct Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound field and the surround sound field. You can adjust the difference in level created by the software being played back to obtain the preferred sound balance. The surround sound gets stronger as you make the value more negative and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value more positive. PREPARATION Dimension INTRODUCTION You can customize decoder effects by setting the following parameters. For kinds of decoders, see page 27. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Adjusts the volume ofthe center (CT), surround L (SL) surround R (SR) and surround back (SB) channels in the 7ch Stereo program. The available parameters differ depending on the setting of the speakers. Straight Enhancer/7ch Enhancer only Effect Level Choices: High*/Low APPENDIX Adjusts the Compressed Music Enhancer effect level. When the high-frequency signals of the source is emphasized too much, set the effect level to “Low.” To reduce the effect, set this parameter to “Low.” To increase the effect, set it to “High.” English 49 En Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) You can call the setup menu using the remote control and change the settings of various menus. You can change the following settings in the setup menu. For details, read “Basic operation of the setup menu” first, and see the respective pages. Menu/Submenu Function Page Sets items for speakers. 51 1 Auto Setup (YPAO) Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers. 51 2 Manual Setup Manually adjusts output characteristics of speakers. 51 Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of speaker and a size of the connected speaker (sound reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening environment. 51 B)Level Separately adjusts volume of each speaker. 53 C)Distance Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound based on distances between speakers and the listening position. 53 D)Equalizer Selects an equalizer that adjusts speaker output characteristics. 53 Speaker Setup A)Config Generates test tones. 53 Sets various items for sound outputs. 53 1 Dynamic Range Adjusts dynamic ranges of speakers and headphones. 53 2 Lipsync Adjusts delay in output timing between video signals and audio signals. 54 HDMI Auto Sets on or off of automatic adjustments for delay between output timing between video signals input from the HDMI jack and audio signals. 54 Auto Delay Fine adjusts a delay time of HDMI Auto. 54 Manual Delay Manually fine adjusts the delay of audio and visual output. 54 Set various items for HDMI and display. 54 Sets various items for input sources. 54 Standby Through Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the HDMI IN jack to the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is on standby. 54 Audio Output Selects this unit or a component connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT jack of this unit for reproducing sound signals input from the HDMI IN jack. 54 Resolution Sets resolution of the HDMI output that is converted from analogy visual input signals. 54 Aspect Set an aspect ratio of images reproduced by HDMI signals converted from analog video input signals. 54 Set items for a monitor or the front panel display. 55 Sets brightness of the front panel display. 55 FL Scroll Selects the way to display characters on the front panel display. 55 OSD Shift Adjusts top and bottom positions of the screen displayed on the video monitor. 55 E)Test Tone Sound Setup Function Setup 1 HDMI 2 Display Dimmer Sets items for volumes. 55 Adaptive DRC Adjusts the dynamic range (difference between the maximum volume and the minimum volume) in conjunction with the volume level. 55 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally increased. 55 Init. Volume Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. 55 4 Input Rename Changes input source names to be displayed on a video monitor or the front panel display. 55 5 Zone2 3 Volume Sets the maximum volume level and initial volume level of Zone2. 56 Max Volume Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally increased. 56 Init. Volume Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. 56 DSP Parameter Sets parameters for the sound field programs. 56 Memory Guard Protects some settings against accidental alteration. 56 50 En Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) “A)Config” display (example) Basic operation of the setup menu A)Config The setup menu screen appears on both video display (OSD) and front panel display. Center SP INTRODUCTION Video display (OSD) SetupMenu . ;SpeakerSetup ;SoundSetup ;FunctionSetup ;DSPParameter ;MemoryGuard y • You can change other items by repeating step 4. 5 To finish the setting, press mSETUP. [ y • When oCursor or other keys do not work after completing the menu, select the input source again using hInput selection keys. Front panel display Speaker Setup ;SpeakerSetup Press mSETUP on the remote control. The setup menu screen appears. y 2 Select a menu using oCursor k / n, and press oENTER. Items of the selected menu are displayed. For example, the following screen appears when you select “Function Setup.” ;FunctionSetup . 1HDMI 2Display 3Volume 4InputRename 5Zone2 [ y • You can return to the previous screen by pressing oRETURN. 3 To display submenus, select a menu that you want to set using oCursor k / n, and press oENTER. For example, the following screen appears when you select “2 Display.” . Dimmer;;;;;;;;;;;;0 FLScroll;;Continue OSDShift;;;;;;;;;0 Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers to obtain optimum balance for the output sound based on positions and performances of the speakers and acoustic characteristics or the room, which are automatically measured. For details on operations, see page 19. 2 Manual Setup Adjusts output characteristics of speakers based on manually set parameters. After Auto Setup (YPAO) is performed, you can check automatically adjusted parameters in the Manual Setup menu. Fine adjust the parameters for your preference if necessary. ■ A)Config Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of speaker and a size of the connected speaker (sound reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening environment. y • The speaker configuration includes items for defining a speaker size: Large or Small. Large and Small refer to speakers with woofer diameters 16 cm or larger and smaller than 16 cm, respectively. Extra SP Assign Choices: [ 4 [ []/[]:Up/Down []/[]:Adjust [ [ Zone2/Presence/None* APPENDIX 2Display 1 Auto Setup ADDITIONAL INFORMATION [ []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter • The default settings are marked with “*.” ADVANCED OPERATION 1 BASIC OPERATION In this section, procedures of setting menus using the video monitor are described. You can set various items for speakers. Two kinds of adjustments are available. One is “Auto Setup (YPAO)” for automatic adjustment and another is “Manual Setup” for manual adjustment. PREPARATION [ []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter None >Small Large Selects the application for EXTRA SP terminals. Zone2 Assigns the EXTRA SP terminals for the speakers in the second zone. Presence Assigns the EXTRA SP terminals for the Presence speaker. None Disables the EXTRA SP terminals. Note • When setting “Extra SP Assign” to “Zone2” or “Presence,” the surround back channel signals for main output is separately output from other channels. 51 En English Select an item using oCursor k / n, and change the setting of the item using oCursor l / h. Some items in the Manual Setup menu of “Speaker Setup” take up a full screen. To display other items in the Manual Setup menu, press oCursor k / n. Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) LFE/Bass Out Choices: Center SP SWFR/Front/Both* Choices: None/Small*/Large Selects speaker(s) for outputting low-frequency components of the LFE (low-frequency effect sound) channel or other channels. The output status is as follows. Sets the size of center speaker. LFE channel signals Small Parameter Subwoofer Front speakers Other speakers Both Output Not output Not output SWFR Output Not output Not output Front Not output Output Not output Low-frequency components of other channel signals Parameter Subwoofer Front speakers Other speakers Both [1] [2] [3] SWFR [4] [3] [3] Front Not output [1] [3] [1] [2] [3] [4] Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right channels and the channel of speaker, the size of which is set to “Small.” Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right channels. Outputs low frequency components when the sizes of speakers are set to “Large.” Outputs low-frequency components of the channel of speaker, the size of which is set to “Small.” Front SP Choices: Small/Large* Sets the sizes of front left and right speakers. Small Large None Select this when small speakers are connected. Low-frequency components of the front left and right channels are output from a subwoofer. Select this when large speakers are connected. Note • When “LFE/Bass Out” is set to “Front,” you can only select “Large.” If “LFE/Bass Out” is changed to “Front,” “Front SP” automatically switches to “Large” even when it is set to “Small.” Large Select this when no center speaker is connected. Center channel signals are spread to front left and right speakers. Select this when a small center speaker is connected. Low-frequency components of center channel are output from a subwoofer. If a subwoofer is not connected they are output from front speakers. Select this when a large center speaker is connected. Sur. L/R SP Choices: None/Small*/Large Sets sizes of left and right surround speakers. None Small Large Select this when no surround speakers are connected. Surround channel signals are spread to front left and right speakers. “Sur.B L/R SP” automatically switches to “None” when this is selected. Select this when small surround speakers are connected. Low-frequency components of surround channels are output from a subwoofer. If a subwoofer is not connected they are output from front speakers. Select this when large surround speakers are connected. y • When “None” is selected, the sound field programs automatically enter the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. Sur.B L/R SP Choices: None/SMLx1/SMLx2*/LRGx1/LRGx2 Sets sizes of left and right surround back speakers. None SMLx1 SMLx2 LRGx1 LRGx2 Select this when no surround back speaker are connected. Surround back channel signals are output from the surround L/R speakers and subwoofer. If the subwoofer is disabled, they are output from the surround L/R speakers and front speakers. Select this when one small surround back speaker is connected. Select this when two small surround back speakers are connected. Select this when one large surround back speaker is connected. Select this when two large surround back speakers are connected. y • When “None” is selected, “PLIIx Movie,” “PLIIx Music,” and “PLIIx Game” cannot be selected. 52 En Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) Crossover Freq. Choices: 40Hz/60Hz/80Hz*/90Hz/100Hz/110Hz/120Hz/ 160Hz/200Hz Subwoofer Phase Normal*/Reverse Normal Select this not to change the phase of your subwoofer. Reverse Select this to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. B)Level Adjustable range: -10.0dB to +10.0dB (0.5 dB step) Defaults: “FR.L/FR.R/SWFR” 0dB “CNTR/SUR.L/SUR.R/SBL/SBR” -1.0dB y • When only one surround back speaker is connected, “SB” appears instead of “SBL” and “SBR.” • You can adjust the volume listening to test tones when you set “Test Tone” to “On” (see page 53). • If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, set the volume to half or the crossover frequency at the maximum. Unit Choices: meters (m)/feet (ft)* meters (m) feet (ft) Displays the speaker distance in meters. Displays the speaker distance in feet. y • Different items are displayed depending on settings of “A)Config” (see page 51). • When only one surround back speaker is connected, “Sur.B” appears instead of “Sur.B L” and “Sur.B R.” Adjusts sound quality of each speaker using a graphic equalizer. The graphic equalizer of this unit can adjust signal levels in 7 frequency ranges. To adjust the signal level within each range, select the desired speaker with oCursor l / h while “→” is displayed next to “Channel,” then the desired frequency band with oCursor k / n, and adjust the signal level with oCursor l / h. ■ E)Test Tone Choices: Off*/On Switches between on and off of an oscillator that generates test tones. To turn on the oscillator, select “On” using oCursor l / h. When “On” is selected, you can adjust the settings of “2 Manual Setup” while listening to a test tone. Off On Not generate test tones. Generates test tones. Sound Setup You can set various items for sound outputs. ■ 1 Dynamic Range Choices: Min/Auto/STD/Max* Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for reproducing bitstream signals. Min/Auto (Min) Sets the dynamic range suitable for low volume or a quiet environment, such as at night, for bitstream signals except for Dolby TrueHD signals. (Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby TrueHD signals based on input signal information. STD Sets the standard dynamic range recommended for regular home use. 53 En English Adjustable range: 0.30m to 24.00m (1.0ft to 80.0ft) Defaults: 3.00m (10.0ft) “Front L/Front R/ SWFR” 2.60m (8.5ft) “Center” 2.40m (8.0ft) “Sur. L/Sur. R/ Sur.B L/Sur.B R/PRNS L/PRNS R” 63Hz/160Hz/400Hz/1kHz/2.5kHz/ 6.3kHz/16kHz Adjustable range: -6.0dB to 0dB* to +6.0dB (0.5 dB step) Choices: APPENDIX Front L / Front R / Center / Sur. L / Sur. R / Sur.B L / Sur.B R / SWFR/ PRNS L/ PRNS R GEQ ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ C)Distance Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound so that sounds from speakers reach the listening position at the same time. Set unit (Unit) first and set the distance of each speaker. Auto PEQ Uses a parametric equalizer selected in “1 Auto Setup.” Characteristics of the currently used parametric equalizer (see page 19) are displayed below “Auto PEQ.” If Auto Setup is not executed, this parameter is not displayed. GEQ Uses a graphic equalizer. Press oENTER to adjust the characteristics of the graphic equalizer. Off Not use a graphic equalizer. ADVANCED OPERATION Separately adjusts volume of each speaker so that the sounds form speakers are at the same volume at the listening position. Items to be displayed vary depending on the number of speakers connected. Auto PEQ/GEQ*/Off BASIC OPERATION ■ Choices: Select an equalizer type. PREPARATION Choices: Sets the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. EQ Type Select INTRODUCTION Sets the lower limit of the low frequency component output from a speaker with a size set to “Small (SMLx1/ SMLx2).” Sound with a frequency below that limit is output from a subwoofer or front speakers. If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control, set the volume to half or the crossover frequency at the maximum. ■ D)Equalizer Adjusts sound quality and tone using a parametric graphic equalizer. Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) Max Outputs sound without adjusting the dynamic range of the input signals. ■ 2 Lipsync Adjusts delay between video output and audio output. HDMI Auto Choices: Off*/On Automatically adjusts output timing of audio and video signals when a monitor that supports an automatic lipsync function is connected to this unit. Off Select this when the connected monitor does not support the automatic lip-sync function or you do not use the automatic lip-sync function. Set the correction time in “Manual Delay.” Select this when the connected monitor supports the automatic lip-sync function. Fine adjust the correction time in “Auto Delay.” On ■ Audio Output Choices: Amp*/TV/Amp+TV Selects this unit or a component connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT jack of this unit for reproducing sound signals input from the HDMI IN jack. Amp TV Amp+TV Outputs HDMI sound signals form the speakers connected to this unit. Outputs HDMI sound signals from the speakers of a TV connected to this unit. Sound output from the speakers connected to this unit is muted. Outputs HDMI sound signals from the speakers connected to this unit and the speakers of a TV connected to this unit. Note • When “TV” or “Amp+TV” is selected, signal formats of audio and visual signals output from this unit to the monitor vary depending on specifications of the monitor. Auto Delay ■ Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step) Choices: Fine adjust the correction time when “HDMI Auto” is set to “On.” The actual correction time is displayed under in “Auto Delay” field and an offset time set by the user in “Offset” field. Upscales the resolution of HDMI output that is converted from analog video input signals and output from the HDMI OUT jack. Manual Delay • Resolution of the HDMI output converted from 720p or 1080i analog video signals cannot be upscaled. • When a video monitor is connected to this unit via the HDMI jack, this unit automatically detects a resolution that the monitor supports. An asterisk (*) appears on the left of the detected resolution. • If this unit cannot detect the resolution that the monitor supports, set “MON.CHK” in the advanced setup menu to “SKIP” (see page 60) and try it again. Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step) Manually fine adjusts the correction time. Select this when the connected monitor does not support the automatic lipsync function or you set “HDMI Auto” to “Off.” Function Setup You can set various items for HDMI and display. 1 HDMI You can set items for HDMI. ■ Standby Through Choices: On/Off* Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the HDMI IN jack to the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is on standby. When this parameter is set to “On” signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks can be output to a monitor component. On Off Outputs the HDMI signals to the HDMI OUT jack. Not output the HDMI signals to the HDMI OUT jack. y • To enables pass-through output, any one of the input sources connected to the HDMI1-4 must be selected before switching to standby. • When “Standby Through” turns on, the HDMI THROUGH indicator on the front panel display lights up. While the indicator lights up, it consumes 1 to 3W of power depending on a condition of an HDMI signal passing through this unit. 54 En Resolution Through*/480p/720p/1080i/1080p Notes ■ Aspect Choices: Thrgh*/16:9/Smart Set a horizontal to vertical ratio (aspect ratio) of images reproduced by HDMI signals output from the HDMI OUT jack when the HDMI signals are converted from analog video input signals by a video conversion function. Thrgh 16:9 Smart Outputs the video signals without changing the aspect ratio. Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3 images on a 16:9 monitor with black bands on the right and left sides of the monitor screen. Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3 images on a 16:9 monitor by stretching right and left of images to fit on the monitor screen. Notes • You cannot change the aspect ratio of the screen when “Resolution” is set to “Thrgh.” • The setting is not effective for inputs with the aspect ratio other than 4:3. • You cannot obtain an effect of the aspect ratio when visual signals are input from the HDMI IN jack or 720p, 1080i or 1080p signals are input. Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) ■ 2 Display You can set items for a monitor or the front panel display. Max Volume Adjustable range: -30.0dB to +15.0dB/+16.5dB* (5.0 dB step) Note ■ • The brightness of display does not become bright in Pure Direct mode even if the value is increased. Choices: Dimmer Adjustable range: -4 to 0* FL Scroll Choices: Continue*/Once Selects the way to scroll the screen when a total number of characters exceed a display area of the front panel display. Continue Once ■ OSD Shift Adjustable range: -5 to 0* to +5 3 Volume You can set items for volumes. ■ Adaptive DRC Choices: Auto/Off* Input level VOLUME: low Auto Off Output level Off Auto Off Selecting a name to be displayed from templates Select an input source that you want to change the name, and select a name from the following templates using Cursor. – Blu-ray – DVD – SetTopBox – Game – TV – DVR – CD – CD-R – Satellite – VCR – Tape – MD – PC – iPod – HD DVD – “blank” y • If you change the display name of an input source to your original one and select the input source, the current input source name and the template name are displayed. This is convenient if you want to cancel name change operation. Entering an original name Select an input source that you want to name, and press oENTER. You can enter up to 9 characters by selecting one character at a time with the following keys according to the following operation. Input level VOLUME: high Adjusts the dynamic range automatically. Not adjust the dynamic range automatically. y oCursor k / n oENTER For selecting characters that you want to change For selecting characters to be entered For entering the selected characters The following characters are available for input. A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) and space 55 En English • The Adaptive DRC setting is effective for headphones. oCursor l / h APPENDIX Output level Auto Changes input source names to be displayed on the front panel display. You can select an input source that you want to change the name to be displayed using oCursor. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Adjust the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume level. This feature is useful when you are listening at lower volumes or at night. When this function is enabled, the dynamic range is adjusted as follows. If the VOLUME setting is low: the dynamic range is narrow If the VOLUME setting is high: the dynamic range is wide 4 Input Rename ADVANCED OPERATION Adjusts top and bottom positions of the screen displayed on the video monitor. To move up the screen, set this value larger. To move down the screen, set it smaller. Note • If the setting of “Max Volume” is lower than the setting of “Init. Volume,” the setting of “Max Volume” becomes effective. For example, when you set “Max Volume” to “–30.0dB” and “Init. Volume” to “0.0dB,” the volume is automatically set to “–30.0dB” at the next time this unit is turned on. BASIC OPERATION Repeatedly displays all characters by scrolling. Displays all characters by scrolling once, halts scrolling, and then displays first 14 characters. Off*/Mute/-80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step) Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. When this parameter is set to “Off,” the volume is set to a level that last time this unit is set to standby. PREPARATION ■ Init. Volume INTRODUCTION Sets brightness of the front panel display. As the value is lowered, the brightness of the front panel display is darkened. Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally increased. For example, you can adjust the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB when you set this parameter to “–5.0dB.” The volume increases to the maximum level when this parameter is set to +16.5 dB (default). ■ Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu) 5 Zone2 Sets the maximum volume level and initial volume level of Zone2. y • This item is displayed only when “Extra SP Assign” is set to “Zone2.” ■ You can set parameters for the sound field programs. For details, see page 46. Memory Guard Max Volume Adjustable range: -30.0dB to +15.0dB / +16.5dB* (5.0 dB step) Sets the maximum volume level of Zone2, so that the volume will not be accidentally increased. For example, you can adjust the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB when you set this parameter to “–5.0dB.” ■ DSP Parameter Init. Volume Choices: Off*/Mute/-80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step) Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone2 when the power of Zone2 unit is turned on. Note • If the setting of “Max Volume” is lower than the setting of “Init. Volume,” the setting of “Max Volume” becomes effective. For example, when you set “Max Volume” to “–30.0dB” and “Init. Volume” to “0.0dB,” the volume is automatically set to “–30.0dB” at the next time this unit is turned on. 56 En Choices: Off*/On Protects settings of setup menu against accidental alteration. Off On Not protect settings. Protects the settings of the setup menu (except for the Memory Guard setting). Note • When this parameter is switched to “On,” “G” appears while the setup menu is displayed on the video monitor. Using multi-zone configuration Only analog signal can be sent to Zone2. If you want to output the sound from Zone2, connect an external component to AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 by analog connection. For example, if you want to output sound from an HDMI DVD player in Zone2, you must connect the component to this unit by both HDMI and analog connections. Connecting Zone2 Note • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone2 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some Yamaha models can be directly connected to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. You may not need use an infrared signal emitter for these products. Up to 6 Yamaha components can be connected as shown below. Infrared signal receiver Important safety notice The EXTRA SP speaker terminals of this unit should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel. Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage. Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found on the back panel of your unit. REMOTE OUT IN OUT This unit Yamaha component Connect the speakers in the second zone to the EXTRA SP terminals and then set the “Extra SP Assign” to “Zone2” (see page 51). ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Using the external amplifier EXTRA SP ZONE2/PRESENCE Connect the amplifier/receiver in the second zone and other components to this unit as follows. From the ZONE2 OUT jacks Second zone (Zone2) Main zone This unit Second zone (Zone2) Main zone y DVD player (etc.) Remote control This unit Infrared signal emitter English From the REMOTE OUT jack Infrared signal receiver • You can use the speakers connected to EXTRA SP speaker terminals as the front speaker system of another zone. Set “Extra SP Assign” to “Zone2” (see page 51). • When you use the internal amplifiers for the Zone2 speakers, you can adjust the volume level and set the initial volume and maximum volume of the Zone2 speakers (see page 56). APPENDIX Amplifier ADVANCED OPERATION REMOTE IN Using the internal amplifier of this unit BASIC OPERATION y • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. PREPARATION You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second zone. • An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits infrared signals from the remote control to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone. • An amplifier and speakers in the second zone. REMOTE INTRODUCTION This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone2). You can control this unit from the second zone using the supplied remote control. To the REMOTE IN jack 57 En Using multi-zone configuration Controlling Zone2 You can select and control Zone2 by using the control keys on the front panel or on the remote control. The available operations are as follows: • Selecting the input source (AV5-6, AUDIO1-2, V-AUX) of Zone2. • Adjusting the volume of Zone2 (when a Zone2 speaker is connected to the EXTRA SP jack). • Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as the input source of Zone2 (see page 29). • Tuning into XM Satellite Radio when “XM” is selected as the input source of Zone2 (see page 31) (U.S.A. model only). • Tuning into SIRIUS Satellite Radio when “SIRIUS” is selected as the input source of Zone2 (see page 35) (U.S.A. model only). • Playing back music stored on your iPod stationed in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as YDS-11 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal. Note • You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing on the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone2 mode is automatically canceled and this unit returns to the normal operation mode. In this case, repeat the Zone2 selection procedure. Controlling Zone2 with the front panel ■ Set Zone2 to the standby mode Press CZONE2 ON/OFF to set Zone2 to the standby mode. Controlling Zone2 with the remote control ■ Turning on Zone2 Switches bMAIN/ZONE2 to ZONE2 position, and press gPOWER. ■ Operating Zone2 Switches bMAIN/ZONE2 to ZONE2 position, and press one of the input selection keys to select the desired input source of Zone2. Note Activating the Zone2 operation mode Press DZONE2 CONTROL to control Zone2. The ZONE2 indicator flashes on the front panel display for approximately 10 seconds. ZONE 2 ■ ■ Turning on Zone2 Press CZONE2 ON/OFF to turn on Zone2. ■ • Select “SIRIUS” as the input source to use the SIRIUS Satellite Radio features in Zone2. For details about the SIRIUS Satellite Radio operations, see “SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning” on page 35. • Select “DOCK” as the input source to use iPod features in Zone2. For details about the iPod operations, see “Using iPod” on page 40. • Select “DOCK” as the input source to use Bluetooth component features in Zone2. For details about the Bluetooth component operations, see “Using Bluetooth components” on page 42. Flashes Operating Zone2 Press OINPUT l / h to select the desired input source while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing on the front panel display. • When AV5-6, AUDIO1-2 or V-AUX is selected, you can listening to the input source in Zone2. • Select “TUNER” as the input source to use the TUNER features in Zone2. For details about the TUNER operations, see “FM/AM tuning” on page 29. • Select “XM” as the input source to use the XM Satellite Radio features in Zone2. For details about the XM Satellite Radio operations, see “XM Satellite Radio tuning” on page 31. 58 En • rMUTE and pVOLUME +/– are available to control Zone2 with same procedure as mentioned above. ■ Setting Zone2 to the standby mode Switches bMAIN/ZONE2 to ZONE2 position, and press gPOWER and to set ZONE2 to the standby mode. Controlling other components with the remote control You can control external components for a selected input source with the remote control. The keys available for controlling external components are as follows: Input source Category Manufacturer Default code oCursor, ENTER, RETURN Operates the menus of external components. [A]/[B] — — [XM] Tuner Yamaha 5017 qDISPLAY Switches between the screens of external components. [SIRIUS] Tuner Yamaha 5009 [MULTI CH] — — — tNumeric keys Function as numeric keys of an external component. uTV control keys y • An external component that is controlled by the remote control can be automatically selected according to selection of the scenes (see page 22). Setting remote control codes You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. Switches visual inputs of TV Mute audio of TV Controls the volume of TV Switches channels of TV Turns on and off TV • You need to set the remote control code first to control external components. • The remote control keys for controlling external components are available only when the external components have corresponding control keys. 2 Press hInput selection keys. The following remote control codes are assigned to input sources as factory default settings. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 3 Enter a remote control code using tNumeric keys. Once the remote control code is registered, cTRANSMIT on the remote control blinks twice. If it fails, cTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from step 1. ■ Default remote control code settings Input source Category Manufacturer Default code Blu-ray Disc Yamaha 2018 [HDMI2] — — — [HDMI3] — — — [HDMI4] — — — [AV1] — — — [AV2] — — — [AV3] CD Yamaha 5013 [AV4] — — — [AV5] — — — — — — [AUDIO1] — — — [AUDIO2] — — — [V-AUX] — — — [TUNER] Tuner Yamaha 5007 [DOCK] DOCK Yamaha 5011 You can clear all the remote control codes previously set, and reset all of them to the initial factory settings. 1 Press dCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as a tip of a ballpoint pen. cTRANSMIT on the remote control blinks twice. 2 Press mSETUP on the remote control. 3 Enter “9981” using tNumeric keys. Once the initialization is complete, cTRANSMIT on the remote control blinks twice. If it fails, cTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from step 1. English [AV6] Resetting all remote control codes APPENDIX [HDMI1] ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Press dCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. cTRANSMIT on the remote control blinks twice. ADVANCED OPERATION 1 y BASIC OPERATION INPUT MUTE TV VOL +/– TV CH +/– POWER “—” indicates no assignment PREPARATION sExternal component operation keys Function as a recording or playback key of an external component, or a menu display key. — INTRODUCTION eSOURCE POWER Turns on and off an external component. 59 En Advanced setup In the advanced setup, you can set basic operations of this unit, such as on and off of a bi-amp connection, or initialize user settings. Perform the following steps to change settings. 1 Set this unit to the standby mode. 2 Press AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF while pressing and holding MSTRAIGHT on the front panel. The advanced setup menu appears on the front panel display. ADVANCEDSETUP 3 Press LPROGRAM l / h repeatedly to select the parameter you want to change. The default setting are marked with “*.” INIT-XXXXXXXXX Choices: 4 Press MSTRAIGHT a few times to select the value you want to change. The value selected here becomes effective when this unit is turned on the next time. You can change multiple settings by repeating steps 3 and 4. 5 Press AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF, turns off this system, and press AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF again. The value set in step 3 becomes effective, and this unit turns on. When you select initialization in step 3, the initialization is performed. y • Set values are placed in XXX of the following parameters on an actual display screen. SP IMP. -XXX Choices: 6ΩMIN/8ΩMIN* Selects output impedance of this unit according to connected speakers. REMOTE ID -XXX Choices: ID1*/ID2 Sets a remote control ID. When using multiple Yamaha AV receivers, you can operate them with a single remote control by setting the receiver IDs to the same setting. SR PIN -XXX Choices: RESET/CANCEL Resets Parental lock cord when using SIRIUS Satellite tuner. Setting a remote control ID Two IDs are provided for the remote control of this unit. If another Yamaha amplifier is in the same room, setting a different remote control ID to this unit prevents unwanted operation of the other amplifier. ID1 is set for both remote control and amplifier by default. When you change the remote control ID, display “Advance Setup” (see the previous section) and change the ID for the amplifier too. 1 Press dCODE SET on the remote control using a pointed object such as the tip of a ballpoint pen. cTRANSMIT blinks twice. 2 Press mSETUP on the remote control. 3 Enter the desired remote control ID code. To switch to ID1: Enter “5019” using tNumeric keys. To switch to ID2: Enter “5020” using tNumeric keys. Once the remote control code is registered, cTRANSMIT blinks twice. If it fails, cTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from step 1. BI AMP - XXX Choices: ON/OFF* Switches on and off of bi-amp connection of main speakers. For bi-amp connection, see page 12. SCENE IR -XXX Choices: ON*/OFF Selects whether or not to transmit the control signals to an external component connected to the REMOTE jacks on this unit when BD/DVD or CD SCENE function is selected. MON.CHK - XXXX Choices: YES*/SKIP Adds upscaling limitation on output signals to a video monitor connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT jack. 60 En DSP PARAM/VIDEO/ALL/CANCEL Initializes various settings stored in this unit. You can select an initialization method from the following. DSP PARAM: All parameters of sound field programs VIDEO: Video conversion settings (resolution/ aspect) in the setup menu and the OSD display position ALL: Reset this unit to initial factory settings CANCEL: Cancellation of initialization y • Initializing the remote control code (see page 59) returns it to ID1. APPENDIX Troubleshooting General Problem Remedy See page The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 60 (When this unit is turned back on and “CHECK SP WIRES!” is displayed.) The protection circuitry has been activated because this unit was turned on while a speaker cable was shorted. Make sure that all speaker cables between this unit and speakers are connected properly. 12 This unit cannot be turned off. The internal microcomputer is frozen due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a drop in power supply voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again. — No sound. “Audio Output” in “1 HDMI” Function Setup is set to “TV.” Select a choice for “Audio Output” (Function Setup → 1 HDMI → Audio Output) other than “TV.” 54 A proper audio decoder is not selected. Display the OPTION menu and set “Decoder Mode” to “Auto.” 44 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 14-17 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with OINPUT l / h or the hInput selection keys on the remote control. 22 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 11 The volume is turned down or muted. Turn up the volume. — Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Display Signal info of the option menu and check the input signal format. If “No Signal” is displayed, check if the playback component is properly connected to this unit (or a proper input source is selected). If “___” is displayed, the input signal in that format cannot be reproduced by this unit. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 74 APPENDIX — ADVANCED OPERATION Connect the power cable properly to an AC wall outlet. BASIC OPERATION The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. PREPARATION This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. Cause INTRODUCTION Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or service center. English 61 En Troubleshooting Problem No picture. Cause Remedy See page An appropriate video input is not selected on the monitor. Select an appropriate video input on the monitor. — The composite output terminals are used to output a component video signal, or the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks are used to output a composite video signal. If your monitor does not support the HDMI connection, connect it to the COMPONENT OUT jacks or the composite output terminals and select an appropriate video input on the monitor. 14 This unit outputs the video signals are not supported on the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Displays the advanced setup menu and select “VIDEO” in “INIT” to reset the video parameters. 60 Displays the advanced setup menu and set “MON.CHK” to “YES.” 60 Non-standard video signals are input. Connect the monitor to this unit via the COMPONENT OUT jacks or the composite output terminals. 14 The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 60 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. The playback component or speakers are not connected properly. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 11 The speaker level settings are incorrect. Adjust “B)Level” settings. 53 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When a monaural source sound field program is applied, sound of all channels are output from the center speaker for some surround decoders. Try another sound field program. 25 No sound is output from a specific speaker. Output from that speaker is disabled. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel display. If the corresponding indicator is turned off, try the following. 1) Change the input source to another one. 2) With the selected sound field program, sound is not output from that speaker. Select another sound field program. 3) “None” may have been selected for that speaker on this unit. Display Speaker Setup in the Setup menu and enables output of that speaker. 6, 22, 25, 52 The volume of that speaker is set to minimum in Speaker Setup in the Setup menu. Display Speaker Setup in the Setup menu and adjust the volume (2 Manual Setup → B)Level). 53 This unit or speaker is malfunction. Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel display. If the corresponding indicator lights up, connect another speaker and check if sound is output. If sound is not output, this unit may be malfunction. 6, 10 This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode. Press MSTRAIGHT or the kSTRAIGHT on the remote control to turn off the “STRAIGHT” mode. 28 Sound may not be output from certain channels depending on the input source or sound field program. Try another sound field program. 25 The sound suddenly goes off. No sound is heard from the presence speakers. 62 En Troubleshooting Problem No sound is heard from the subwoofer. Remedy See page 28 Sound may not be output from certain channels depending on input sources or sound field programs. Try another sound field program. 25 “LFE/Bass Out” of “A)Config” in “Speaker Setup” of the setup menu (Speaker Setup→2 Manual Setup→A)Config) is set to “Front” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “LFE/Bass Out” to “SWFR” or “Both.” 52 “LFE/Bass Out” of “A)Config” in “Speaker Setup” of the setup menu (Speaker Setup→2 Manual Setup→A)Config) is set to “SWFR” or “Front” when a 2-channel source is being played. Set “LFE/Bass Out” to “Both.” 52 The source does not contain low frequency signals. 44 The audio input sources cannot be played in the desired digital audio signal format. The connected component is not set to output the desired digital audio signals. Set the playback component properly referring to its operating instructions. — Noise/hum noise is heard. Incorrect cable connection. Connect the audio cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — A DTS-CD is being played back. 1) When only noise is output If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this unit by digital connection and play back the DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved, the problem may results from the playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback component. 2) When noise is output during playback or skip operation Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the option menu after selecting the input source and set “Decoder Mode” to “DTS.” “Memory Guard!” is displayed and the setting cannot be changed. “Memory Guard” in “Setup Menu” is set to “On.” Set “Memory Guard” to “Off.” 56 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer is frozen due to an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a drop in power supply voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet, wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again. — 15, 44 63 En English Set “Extended Surround” other than “Off” or “Auto.” APPENDIX “Extended Surround” in the OPTION menu is set to “Off,” or an input signal does not contain a surround back flag with “Extended Surround” set to “Auto.” ADVANCED OPERATION No sound is heard from the surround back speakers. BASIC OPERATION Press MSTRAIGHT or the kSTRAIGHT on the remote control to turn off the “STRAIGHT” mode. PREPARATION This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. INTRODUCTION No sound is heard from the surround speakers. Cause Troubleshooting Problem Cause Remedy See page “CHECK SP WIRES!” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 12 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to other digital or radio frequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video software is copy-protected. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — Cause Remedy HDMI™ Problem No picture or sound. See page The number of the connected HDMI components is over the limit. Disconnect some of the HDMI components. — The connected HDMI component does not support high-bandwidth digital copyright protection (HDCP). Connect an HDMI component that supports HDCP. 15 Tuner (FM/AM) Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM 64 En Cause You are too far from the station transmitter or the input from the antenna is weak. Remedy See page Check the antenna connections. 18 Replace the outdoor antenna with a more sensitive multi-element antenna. — Switch to monaural mode. 44 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or place it in a different location. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. You are in an area far from a station or an input from the antenna is weak. Replace an outdoor antenna with more sensitive multi element antenna. — Tune in manually or by direct frequency tuning. 29 Troubleshooting Problem Remedy See page The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation. 18 Use the manual tuning method. 29 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Supplied AM loop antenna is not connected. Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even if you use an outdoor antenna. 18 The noises may be caused by lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. It is difficult to completely eliminate noise, but it can be reduced by installing and properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna. 18 A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — There are buzzing and whining noises. XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only) PREPARATION The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. INTRODUCTION AM Cause If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear on the front panel display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. Cause Remedy See page Confirm the XM Mini-Tuner is fully seated in the dock and check the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock cable is connected to this unit. 31 CHECK ANTENNA The XM antenna is not connected to the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM antenna cable has become damaged. Check that the XM antenna is securely connected to the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock and check the antenna cable for damage. Replace the XM antenna if the cable is damaged. 31 LOADING XM The XM Mini-Tuner is acquiring audio or program information from the XM satellite signal. This message can also occur in weak XM signal conditions. Note that this unit may not respond to some operations while this message is displayed. This message should disappear in a few seconds in good signal conditions. If you see this message often, reposition the XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information on the front panel display or “XM Information” screen in the video monitor to check the antenna reception level. 34 NO SIGNAL The XM Mini-Tuner is not receiving the XM satellite signal. Something may be blocking the XM antenna’s view of the satellites or the antenna is not properly aimed. Check for antenna obstructions and reposition the XM antenna to get better signal reception. Use the “ANTENNA INFO” information on the front panel display or “XM Information” screen in the video monitor to check the antenna reception level. See instructions supplied with the XM Mini-Tuner and Dock for antenna installation information. 34 CH OFF AIR The XM channel you selected is not currently broadcasting. Check back at a later time; in the meantime, select another channel. — CH UNAUTH You may be attempting to tune to an XM channel that is blocked or that you cannot receive with your XM subscription package. Consult the latest channel guide at http://www.xmradio.com/ for the current list of channels. For information on receiving this channel, visit http://www.xmradio.com/ or contact XM Satellite Radio at 1-800-967-2346. 31 APPENDIX The XM Mini-Tuner is not installed in the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock or the XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock is not connected to this unit. ADVANCED OPERATION CHECK XM TUNER BASIC OPERATION Status message English 65 En Troubleshooting Status message See page Cause Remedy CH UNAVAIL The selected channel is not available. The channel may have been reassigned to a different channel number. This message may occur initially with a new XM MiniTuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not received XM’s signal for an extended period. Consult the latest channel guide at http://www.xmradio.com/ for the current list of channels. For cases of a new XM Mini-Tuner or an XM Mini-Tuner that has not received XM’s signal for an extended period, allow the XM Mini-Tuner to receive the XM satellite signal for at least 5 minutes and then try to select the channel again. — UPGRADE XM TUNER This unit has detected a XM CNP1000 which is not compatible with this unit. If you have connected the XM Mini-Tuner (CNP2000) and see this message, set this unit to standby, disconnect and reconnect the XM MiniTuner Home Dock and re-install the Mini-Tuner in the Home Dock and turn on this unit. If you continue to see this message with the XM Mini-Tuner, contact XM Satellite Radio at http://xmradio.com/ or 1-800-XMRADIO (1-800967-2346). If you have an incompatible XM CNP1000, contact XM for information on upgrading to the XM MiniTuner. — - - - - No artist name or song title is available for this selection. No action required. — SIRIUS Satellite Radio (U.S.A. model only) If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear on the front panel display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. Status message Cause Remedy See page ANTENNA ERROR The antenna is not connected to the SiriusConnect tuner properly. Check the connection of the antenna and SiriusConnect tuner. 35 SIRIUS LOADING This unit is communicating with the SiriusConnect tuner. The message disappears normally within several tens of seconds. — CHECK SR TUNER The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to the SIRIUS jack of this unit correctly. Check the connection of the SiriusConnect tuner and this unit. 35 The SiriusConnect tuner is not connected to the AC wall outlet. Connect the power cable of the SiriusConnect tuner to the AC wall outlet. 35 NOT SUPPORTED This unit does not support the connected SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner. Connect the SiriusConnect tuner that this unit supports, 35 ACQUIRING The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the antenna of the SiriusConnect tuner. Use the “Antenna” information on the front panel display or “SIRIUS Information” screen in the video monitor to check the antenna reception level. 39 UPDATING The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the channel list. Wait until the updating is complete. — The period of the subscription is end. Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to renew the subscription. 35 The SiriusConnect tuner is updating the firmware. Wait until the updating is complete. — F/W UPDATING 66 En Troubleshooting Status message The selected channel is not subscribed. The subscription information is updated. INVALID The selected channel is currently out of service. Not Available The operation you made is not available. See page Contact SIRIUS Satellite Radio to subscribe the selected channel. URL: https://activate.siriusradio.com/ Phone: 1-888-539-SIRIUS (1-888-539-7474) 35 Select another channel. 35 Select another channel. 35 Remote control Problem Remedy See page 9 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, strobe light, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Adjust the lighting angle or reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 9 The remote control ID of the remote control and this unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of this unit and the remote control. 60 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 59 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this manual. 59 If this unit does not work when you press oCursor, do the following. When the key does not work during DVD disc menu operation: press the hInput selection keys on the remote control again. When the key does not work during OPTION menu/ Setup menu operation: press the key applicable for the current menu operation again. — APPENDIX The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. ADVANCED OPERATION Wrong distance or angle. BASIC OPERATION The remote control does not work or function properly. Cause PREPARATION SUB UPDATED Remedy INTRODUCTION CALL SIRIUS (CALL 888-539SIRIUS TO SUBSCRIBE) Cause Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. English 67 En Troubleshooting iPod™ Note • In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing on the front panel display and on the OSD, check the connection of your iPod (see page 17). Problem Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 17 Remove your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock and then place it back in the dock. 17 This unit supports iPod Touch, iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano and iPod mini. — Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod Connected Your iPod is properly placed in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. Disconnected Your iPod is removed from the Yamaha iPod universal dock. Place your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock. 17 Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod. Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable. — Store some other playable music files on your iPod. — Bluetooth™ Problem Searching... Cause The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component are in the middle of the pairing. The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component are in the middle of establishing the connection. Completed The pairing is completed. Canceled The pairing is canceled. BT Connected The connection between the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the Bluetooth component is established. Disconnected The Bluetooth component is disconnected from the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver. 68 En Remedy See page Troubleshooting Auto Setup (YPAO) INTRODUCTION Notes • • • • If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screen appears, resolve the problem and then run “Auto Setup” again. Warning message “W-2” or “W-3” indicates that the adjusted settings may not be optimal. Depending on the speakers, warning message “W-1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct. If error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center. Before Auto Setup Error message Cause Remedy Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 19 Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. — Memory Guard! The parameters of this unit are protected. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off.” 56 PREPARATION See page During Auto Setup Cause Remedy See page 11 E-2:NO SUR. SP Only a signal from one of the surround channels are detected. Check the surround L/R speaker connections. 11 E-3:NO PRNS SP Only signals from one of the presence L/ R channels are detected. Check the presence L/R speaker connections. 11 E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. If you connect only one surround back speaker, connect it to the L-side terminal. 11 E-5:NOISY Measurement cannot be performed accurately due to loud ambient noise. Try running “Auto Setup” in a quiet environment. — Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners or move them away from the optimizer microphone. — E-6:CHECK SUR. Surround back speakers are connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. When using surround back speakers, you need to connect surround L/R speakers. 11 E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the “Auto Setup” procedure. Do not touch the optimizer microphone during “Auto Setup.” 19 E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. Check whether the microphone is properly placed. 19 Check whether the speakers are properly placed and connected. 11 The optimizer microphone or OPTIMIZER MIC jack may be defective. Contact the nearest Yamaha dealer or service center. 19 If a monitor such as a TV is connected to this unit via HDMI connection, sound may not be output from this unit due to the HDMI control function. In such a case, change the monitor setting, for example, change the sound output setting to an amplifier so that sound is output from this unit. — English Check the front L/R speaker connections. APPENDIX Front L/R channel signals are not detected. ADVANCED OPERATION E-1:NO FRONT SP BASIC OPERATION Error message 69 En Troubleshooting Error message Cause Remedy See page E-9:USER CANCEL “Auto Setup” was cancelled due to an inappropriate user operation. Run “Auto Setup” again. 19 E-10:INTERNAL ERROR An internal error occurred. Run “Auto Setup” again. 19 After Auto Setup Error message Cause Remedy See page W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. Check the polarities (+, –) of the displayed speaker. If they are correct, the speakers work properly even when this message is displayed. 11 W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). Bring the speaker within 24 m (80 ft) area around the listening position. — W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. Recheck the speaker positions and make sure all speakers are placed in a similar environment. — W-4:CHECK PRNS 70 En Presence speakers were not detected during measurement with “Extra SP Assign” set to “Presence.” Check the polarities (+, –) of the speakers. 11 We recommended that you use speakers with the same or similar specifications. — Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. — Check the presence speaker connections and perform measurement again. If presence speakers are not connected, set the “Extra SP Assign” to other than “Presence.” 51 If presence speakers are connected, set the “Extra SP Assign” to “Presence,” and retry Auto Setup. 51 Glossary ■ Audio and video synchronization (lip sync) ■ Dolby Digital Surround EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1channel sources. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “flyaround” effects. ■ ■ Bi-amplification connection ■ Component video signal ■ Composite video signal ■ Deep Color ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ APPENDIX Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification. This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays go from millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more shades of gray between black and white. Also Deep Color increases the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the RGB or YCbCr color space. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. ADVANCED OPERATION With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ BASIC OPERATION With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. Dolby Digital Plus Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for high-definition programming and media including HD broadcasts, and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate Dolby Digital. PREPARATION A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. INTRODUCTION Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining audio and video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission. Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction. Dolby TrueHD 71 En English Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range control. Glossary ■ DSD Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz and the dynamic range is 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive DSD signals via the HDMI jack. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. ■ DTS Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1channel format. ■ DTS Express This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Bluray discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming. In the case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio, enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the Internet while playing the main program. ■ DTS-HD High Resolution Audio DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. ■ DTS-HD Master Audio DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering a high-definition home theater experience. Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital Surround. 72 En ■ HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industrysupported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/.” ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ Neural Surround Neural Surround represents the latest advancement in surround technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural Surround employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multi-channel surround playback. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the fullrange channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation,” the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ “x.v.Color” A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors that could not be expressed before. While remaining compatible with the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics. Sound field program information ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ■ Compressed Music Enhancer The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance of the overall sound system. BASIC OPERATION Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and/or the ceiling) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are nondirectional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. SILENT CINEMA Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ADVANCED OPERATION Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound field processor. APPENDIX ■ PREPARATION Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. ■ INTRODUCTION ■ Elements of a sound field What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the playerfs instrument. CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home by using the Yamaha original sound field technology combined with various digital audio systems. English ■ CINEMA DSP 3D The actually measured sound field data contain the information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening room. 73 En Information on HDMI™ ■ HDMI signal compatibility Audio signals Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible media 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SA-CD, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. Bitstream (High definition audio) Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio, DTS Express Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc. y • If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources with the audio commentaries mixed down by using the following connections: – multi-channel analog audio input (see page 16) – DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL (or COAXIAL) • Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately. Notes • When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. • To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the component outputs the bitstream audio signals directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details. • This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD. This unit does not play back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents. Video signals This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions: • 480i/60 Hz • 576i/50 Hz • 480p/60 Hz • 576p/50 Hz • 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz • 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz 74 En Additional information About the HDMI™ control function 2 Turn on all components connected to this unit via the HDMI connection. For details on operations of external components, refer to their operating instructions. 3 Check the settings of those components and enable the HDMI control function. Bring up to setup menu, and set “Control” to “On.” For details on settings of the external components, refer to their operating instructions. y • If you connect this unit to an HDMI control-compatible DVD player or Blu-ray Disc player via HDMI, you can also control the connected component in synchronization with this unit (except some models). y You can turn on or off the HDMI control function from the following setup menu item. Setup menu Function Setup → 1 HDMI → Control • You do not need to do step 1 through 3 from the second time. Check if all components connected via the HDMI connection except for the TV are turned on. If they are turned off, turn them on. Choices: 6 Turn on the TV. 7 Set the input of the TV according to the component connected to this unit such as [HDMI]. 8 Set the input of this unit to the DVD recorder or Blu-ray recorder, and check if images from the recorder appear normal. 9 Perform operations with the TV remote control, such as switching this unit between on and standby, adjusting the volume and switching the sound output components. On/Off* Selects on or off of HDMI control function when a component that supports the HDMI control function is connected with this unit. On Off Enables the HDMI control function. Disables the HDMI control function. y • When the HDMI control function is enabled, display of the following items in “1 HDMI” of the setup menu turns off. – Standby Through – Audio Output • During standby, the HDMI THROUGH indicator on the front panel display lights up under the following conditions: – The HDMI control function is enabled. – An HDMI signal input to this unit passes through this unit and output. See “Standby Through” or “Standby” (Setup menu → Function setup → 1 HDMI) on the manual for the details on the pass-through output of an HDMI signal. • While this unit is on standby with the HDMI control turned on, it consumes 1 to 3W of power depending on a condition of an HDMI signal passing through this unit. Using the HDMI™ control function When you use the HDMI control function, do the following referring to the operating instructions of the TV. • Turn on the HDMI control function on the TV. • Connect the TV to this unit following the instructions for connecting the TV to an AV amplifier. y • If this unit does not work, check the following. It may also work normally after turning it off and back on or unplugging it and plugging it back in. – “Control” is set to “On.” – The HDMI control function is enabled in the TV settings (refer to the operating instructions of the TV). Note • If your monitor supports the HDMI control function, the scene of this unit is automatically set to “TV” according to switching of input on the monitor when the HDMI control function of this unit and the monitor are turned on. AV1 input is assigned to “TV” by default. By connecting an audio output terminal of the monitor to an optical digital terminal of AV1, you can watch a movie or a TV program right away. When the audio output of the monitor is connected to AV2-6, AUDIO1-2, and VAUX assign the input source for that terminal to “TV” with the SCENE function. English • The HDMI control-compatible components include Panasonic VIERA Link compatible TV, DVD player/recorder and Blu-ray Disc player. • When a DVD recorder/Blu-ray recorder/HD DVD recorder that supports the HDMI control function is connected via the HDMI connection, its operations are also linked to those of this unit. For details, refer to its operating instructions. • We recommend that you use a TV, DVD recorder, Blu-ray recorder and HD DVD recorder of the same manufacturer. y APPENDIX 5 Control ADVANCED OPERATION Turn off the TV. BASIC OPERATION 4 PREPARATION Connect a TV that supports the HDMI control function to this unit via the HDMI connection. INTRODUCTION This unit supports the HDMI control function. When a TV that supports the HDMI control function is connected with this unit via the HDMI connection, the following operations of this unit can be controlled with the TV remote control (except for some TVs). • Switching between on and standby (linked to the TV) • Volume control (up/down, mute) • Switching the sound output between a TV and this unit. 1 75 En Specifications AUDIO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back [U.S.A. and Canada models] 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................... 90 W [Other models] 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω .......................................................... 90 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) [U.S.A. and Canada models] Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω .................................. 95/110/130/150 W [Other models] Front Speakers 6/4/2 Ω .......................................... 100/110/125 W • Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA) [Australia, General and Asia models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 6 Ω ......................................................... 115 W • Maximum Output Power [Russia and Asia models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 105 W • Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models] 8 Ω.......................................................................................0.23 dB • IEC Output Power [Russia and Asia models] Front Speakers 1 kHz, 0.9% THD, 6 Ω ................................. 90 W • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO [Russia, Australia, General and Asia models] ............................................................................... 3.5 mV/47 kΩ AV5, etc................................................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Voltage PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) [Russia, Australia, General and Asia models] ..............................................................................60 mV or more AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ...................................2.0 V or more • Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance AUDIO OUT.......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo & FRONT: Small) ................................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE2 OUT.......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ................................ 100 mV/470 Ω • Frequency Response AV5 to FRONT ..................................10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB • RIAA Equalization Deviation [Russia, Australia, General and Asia models] PHONO .......................................................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to AUDIO OUT [Russia, Australia, General and Asia models] (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V)............................................0.02% or less AV5, etc. to FRONT, Pure Direct [U.S.A. and Canada models] (1 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)..................................................0.06% or less [Other models] (1 kHz, 50 W, 6 Ω)..................................................0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO Input Shorted (5.0 mV to AUDIO OUT) [General model] ............................................................................... 80 dB or more PHONO Input Shorted (5.0 mV to AUDIO OUT) [Russia, Australia and Asia models] ............................................................................... 86 dB or more AV5, etc. Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers) ............................................................................. 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front Speakers.......................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (Input Shorted) [Russia, Australia, General and Asia models] .................................................................... 60 dB/55 dB or more AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened)......................... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Volume Control ................................... MUTE / –80 dB to +16.5 dB 76 En • Tone Control (Front Speakers) BASS Boost/Cut ................................................... ±10 dB at 50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................. 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut............................................ ±10 dB at 20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency............................................ 3.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back: Small) ..................................................................................... 12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer).......................................................... 24 dB/oct. VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type (Gray Back) [U.S.A., Canada and General models]...................................NTSC [Other models]..........................................................................PAL • Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) ........................... NTSC/PAL • Signal Level Composite................................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video [Russia models] ....................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C) Component.................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (CB/CR) • Maximum Input Level ............................................ 1.5 Vp-p or more • Signal to Noise Ratio...................................................50 dB or more • Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT] Component................................................. 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................ 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ......... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models].............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF) Mono................................................................... 3.0 µV (20.8 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ............................................................... 74 dB/69 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ..................................................................... 0.3/0.3% • Antenna Input (unbalanced) .......................................................75 Ω AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................ 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ...................530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models]...................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] ............................... AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General model].................AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz [Australia model]................................................. AC 240 V, 50 Hz [Russia model]..................................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz [Asia model] .................................... AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ...................................270 W/320 VA [Other models]...................................................................... 280 W • Standby Power Consumption Standby through off ....................................................0.2 W or less Standby through on........................................................3 W or less • Maximum Power Consumption [Asia and General models] ................................................... 490 W • Dimensions (W x H x D)...................................435 x 151 x 364 mm (17-1/8 x 6 x 14-3/8 in) • Weight...................................................................... 8.5 kg (18.7 lbs) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. Index ■ Numerics A ■ C E E)Test Tone, speaker setup ............................ 53 Editing sound field program .......................... 46 Editing surround decoder ............................... 46 Effect Level, sound field parameter ............... 49 ENTER, remote control ................................... 7 EQ Type Select, D)Equalizer, speaker setup ............................................. 53 Extended Surround, OPTION menu .............. 44 External component operation key, remote control ............................................. 7 Extra SP Assign, A)Config, speaker setup .... 51 ■ F FL Scroll, 2 Display, function setup .............. 55 FM antenna connection .................................. 18 FM Mode, OPTION menu ............................. 44 FM tuning ...................................................... 29 FM/AM (CATEGORY l / h), front panel ... 4 Frequency tuning ........................................... 29 Front L, C)Distance, speaker setup ................ 53 I INFO, front panel ............................................ 4 INFO, remote control ...................................... 7 INIT, advanced setup .................................... 60 Init. Volume, 3 Volume, function setup ........ 55 Initialize setting, advanced setup .................. 60 INPUT l / h, front panel .............................. 4 Input selection key, remote control ................. 7 Input signal information displaying .............. 24 Input source registration ................................ 22 Installing batteries, remote control .................. 9 iPod playback ................................................ 40 iPod universal dock connection ..................... 17 iPod, troubleshooting .................................... 68 ■ L LFE/Bass Out, A)Config, speaker setup ....... 52 Low frequency sound adjustment ................. 23 ■ M MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, front panel ................ 4 MAIN/ZONE2, remote control ....................... 7 Manual Delay, 2 Lipsync, sound setup ......... 54 Max Volume, 3 Volume, function setup ....... 55 Memory guard, setup menu ........................... 56 MEMORY, front panel ................................... 4 MON.CHK, advanced setup .......................... 60 MONITOR OUT jack, rear panel ................... 5 Mono Movie, sound field program ............... 26 MULTI CH INPUT jacks, rear panel .............. 5 Multi information display, front panel display ...................................... 6 Multi-zone configuration ............................... 57 Music Video, sound field program ................ 26 MUTE indicator, front panel display .............. 6 MUTE, remote control .................................... 7 ■ N Numeric key, remote control ........................... 7 ■ O OPTICAL jack .............................................. 13 OPTIMIZER MIC jack, front panel ................ 4 OPTION menu .............................................. 43 OPTION, remote control ................................. 7 OSD Shift, 2 Display, function setup ............ 55 ■ P Pairing Bluetooth components ...................... 42 Pairing, OPTION menu ................................. 45 Panorama, decoder parameter ....................... 49 77 En English C)Distance, speaker setup ..............................53 C.Image, decoder parameter ..........................49 Category Search mode, SIRIUS satellite radio ................................36 Category Search mode, XM satellite radio ....32 Cellar Club, sound field program ...................26 Center SP, A)Config, speaker setup ...............52 Center speaker ................................................10 Center width, decoder parameter ...................49 Center, C)Distance, speaker setup .................53 Chamber, sound field program .......................26 Changing information on the front panel display .......................................................24 CINEMA DSP 3D indicator, front panel display .......................................6 CINEMA DSP basic parameter .....................46 CINEMA DSP indicator, front panel display ..6 Clear Preset, OPTION menu ..........................45 COAXIAL jack ..............................................13 ■ ■ APPENDIX B B)Level, speaker setup ...................................53 Basic operation, setup menu ..........................51 BI-AMP connection switch, advanced setup ..........................................60 Bluetooth component playback ......................42 Bluetooth wireless audio receiver connection .................................................17 Bluetooth, troubleshooting .............................68 D D)Equalizer, speaker setup ............................ 53 Decoder Mode, OPTION menu ..................... 44 Decoder parameter ......................................... 49 Dialog Lift, sound field parameter ................. 47 Dimension, decoder parameter ...................... 49 Dimmer, 2 Display, function setup ................ 55 Direct number access mode, SIRIUS satellite radio ............................... 36 Direct number access mode, XM satellite radio ..................................... 32 Direct, sound field parameter ........................ 49 Disconnect, OPTION menu ........................... 45 DISPLAY, remote control ............................... 7 Displaying input signal information .............. 24 Displaying the SIRIUS Satellite Radio information ................................................ 39 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information ................................................ 34 DOCK terminal, rear panel .............................. 5 Drama, sound field program .......................... 26 DSP Level, sound field parameter ................. 46 DSP Parameter, setup menu .......................... 56 H Hall in Munich, sound field program ............ 26 Hall in Vienna, sound field program ............. 26 HDMI Auto, 2 Lipsync, sound setup ............ 54 HDMI indicator, front panel display ............... 6 HDMI information ........................................ 74 HDMI jack ..................................................... 13 HDMI OUT/HDMI 1-4 terminals, rear panel .................................................... 5 HDMI THROUGH, front panel ...................... 4 HDMI, troubleshooting ................................. 64 Headphones using ......................................... 23 Hi-fi sound playback ..................................... 23 High frequency sound adjustment ................. 23 ADVANCED OPERATION ■ ■ ■ BASIC OPERATION A)Config, speaker setup .................................51 Action Game, sound field program ................26 Adaptive DRC, 3 Volume, function setup .....55 Adjusting high frequency sound ....................23 Adjusting low frequency sound .....................23 Advanced setup ..............................................60 Adventure, sound field program ....................25 All Channel Search mode, SIRIUS satellite radio ................................36 All Channel Search mode, XM satellite radio ......................................32 AM antenna connection .................................18 AM tuning ......................................................29 ANTENNA jacks, rear panel ...........................5 Aspect, 1 HDMI, function setup ....................54 AUDIO 1/2 jacks, rear panel ............................5 Audio and video player connection ................15 AUDIO jack ...................................................13 Audio jack ......................................................13 AUDIO L/R jack, front panel ...........................4 AUDIO OUT jacks, rear panel .........................5 Audio Output, 1 HDMI, function setup .........54 Audio player connection ................................16 Auto Delay, 2 Lipsync, sound setup ..............54 Auto Preset, OPTION menu ..........................45 Auto Setup (YPAO), troubleshooting ............69 Automatic setup .............................................19 AV 1-6 jacks, rear panel ...................................5 AV OUT jacks, rear panel ................................5 Front left speaker ........................................... 10 Front panel ....................................................... 4 Front panel display .......................................... 6 Front panel display, front panel ....................... 4 Front R, C)Distance, speaker setup ............... 53 Front right speaker ........................................ 10 Front SP, A)Config, speaker setup ................ 52 Function Setup, setup menu .......................... 54 PREPARATION ■ CODE SET, remote control ............................. 7 COMPONENT VIDEO jack ......................... 13 Connect, OPTION menu ............................... 45 Connecting AM antenna ................................ 18 Connecting audio and video player ............... 15 Connecting audio player ................................ 16 Connecting Bluetooth wireless audio Receiver .................................................... 17 Connecting external amplifier ....................... 16 Connecting external decoder ......................... 16 Connecting FM antenna ................................. 18 Connecting iPod universal dock .................... 17 Connecting multi-format player .................... 16 Connecting power cable ................................ 18 Connecting projector ..................................... 14 Connecting set-top box .................................. 15 Connecting speaker ........................................ 11 Connecting speaker cable .............................. 12 Connecting the SiriusConnect ....................... 35 Connecting the SiriusConnect tuner .............. 35 Connecting TV monitor ................................. 14 Connecting XM Mini-Tuner Home Dock ..... 31 Connecting Zone2 .......................................... 57 Connection ..................................................... 10 Controlling other component, remote control ........................................... 59 Controlling Zone2 .......................................... 58 Crossover Freq., A)Config, speaker setup ..... 53 CT Level, sound field parameter ................... 49 Cursor indicator, front panel display ............... 6 Cursors k / n / l / h, remote control ........... 7 INTRODUCTION 1 Dynamic Range, sound setup ......................53 1 HDMI, function setup .................................54 2 Display, function setup ................................55 2 Lipsync, sound setup ...................................54 2ch Stereo, sound field program ....................26 3 Volume, function setup ...............................55 3D DSP, sound field parameter ......................47 4 Input Rename, function setup .....................55 5.1-channel speaker layout .............................10 6.1-channel speaker layout .............................10 7.1-channel speaker layout .............................10 7ch Enhancer, sound field program ...............27 7ch Stereo, sound field program ....................27 Index Parental Lock, OPTION menu ...................... 45 PHONES jack, front panel ............................... 4 Placing speaker .............................................. 10 PORTABLE jack, front panel ......................... 4 Power cable connection ................................. 18 Power Cable, rear panel ................................... 5 POWER, remote control .................................. 7 PRE OUT jacks, rear panel .............................. 5 Presence left speaker ..................................... 11 Presence right speaker ................................... 11 PRESET l / h, front panel ........................... 4 Preset Search mode, SIRIUS satellite radio ............................... 37 Preset Search mode, XM satellite radio ......... 33 Preset tuning .................................................. 29 PRNS L, C)Distance, speaker setup .............. 53 PRNS R, C)Distance, speaker setup .............. 53 PROGRAM l / h, front panel ...................... 4 Projector connection ...................................... 14 PURE DIRECT, front panel ............................ 4 ■ R Registering input source ................................ 22 Registering sound field program ................... 22 Registering the SIRIUS Satellite Radio channels .................................................... 37 Registering XM Satellite Radio channels ...... 33 Remote control ................................................ 7 Remote control code resetting ....................... 59 Remote control code setting .......................... 59 Remote control ID, advanced setup ............... 60 Remote control signal transmitter, remote control ............................................. 7 Remote control, controlling other component ................................................. 59 Remote control, preparation ............................ 9 Remote control, troubleshooting ................... 67 REMOTE ID, advanced setup ....................... 60 REMOTE IN/OUT jack, rear panel ................. 5 Repeat playback, iPod ................................... 41 Repeat, OPTION menu .................................. 45 Resetting Parental lock cord, advanced setup .......................................... 60 Resetting remote control code ....................... 59 Resolution, 1 HDMI, function setup ............. 54 RETURN, remote control ................................ 7 Roleplaying Game, sound field program ....... 26 ■ S SB Level, sound field parameter ................... 49 SCENE function ............................................ 22 SCENE IR, advanced setup ........................... 60 SCENE, front panel ......................................... 4 SCENE, remote control ................................... 7 Sci-Fi, sound field program ........................... 25 Selecting SCENE ........................................... 22 Setting remote control code ........................... 59 Setting the Parental Lock, SIRIUS satellite radio ............................... 38 Set-top box connection .................................. 15 Setup menu .................................................... 50 Setup menu basic operation ........................... 51 SETUP, remote control ................................... 7 Shuffle playback, iPod ................................... 41 Shuffle, OPTION menu ................................. 45 Signal Info parameter .................................... 44 Signal Info, OPTION menu ........................... 44 SILENT CINEMA ......................................... 28 SIRIUS indicator, front panel display ............. 6 SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuning ....................... 35 SIRIUS Satellite Radio, troubleshooting ....... 66 SIRIUS terminal, rear panel ............................ 5 SL Level, sound field parameter .................... 49 SLEEP indicator, front panel display .............. 6 Sleep timer ..................................................... 24 SLEEP, remote control .................................... 7 Sound field parameter .................................... 46 Sound field program editing .......................... 46 Sound field program registration ................... 22 78 En Sound selection key, remote control ................7 Sound Setup, setup menu ...............................53 SOURCE POWER, remote control .................7 SP IMP., advanced setup ................................60 Speaker cable connection ...............................12 Speaker connection ........................................11 Speaker impedance, advanced setup ..............60 Speaker indicator, front panel display ..............6 Speaker layout ................................................10 Speaker placement .........................................10 Speaker setup .................................................51 SPEAKERS terminals, rear panel ....................5 Specifications .................................................76 Spectacle, sound field program ......................25 Sports, sound field program ...........................26 SR Level, sound field parameter ....................49 SR PIN, advanced setup .................................60 Standard, sound field program .......................25 Standby Through, 1 HDMI, function setup ...54 Straight decoding mode .................................28 Straight Enhancer, sound field program .........27 STRAIGHT, front panel ..................................4 Subwoofer ......................................................10 Subwoofer Phase, A)Config, speaker setup ...53 Sur. L, C)Distance, speaker setup ..................53 Sur. L/R SP, A)Config, speaker setup ...........52 Sur. R, C)Distance, speaker setup ..................53 Sur.B L, C)Distance, speaker setup ...............53 Sur.B L/R SP, A)Config, speaker setup .........52 Sur.B R, C)Distance, speaker setup ...............53 Surround back left speaker .............................10 Surround back right speaker ...........................10 Surround back speaker ...................................10 Surround decoder editing ...............................46 Surround left speaker .....................................10 Surround right speaker ...................................10 SWFR, C)Distance, speaker setup .................53 ■ ■ Y YPAO ............................................................ 19 YPAO, troubleshooting ................................. 69 ■ Z ZONE2 CONTROL, front panel ..................... 4 ZONE2 indicator, front panel display ............. 6 ZONE2 ON/OFF, front panel .......................... 4 ZONE2 OUT jacks, rear panel ........................ 5 T The Bottom Line, sound field program ..........26 The Roxy Theatre, sound field program ........26 Tone control ...................................................23 TONE CONTROL, front panel ........................4 TRANSMIT, remote control ............................7 TRIGGER OUT jack, rear panel ......................5 Troubleshooting .............................................61 Tuner indicator, front panel display .................6 Tuner key, remote control ................................7 Tuner, troubleshooting ...................................64 Tuning, AM ....................................................29 Tuning, FM ....................................................29 TUNING/CH l / h, front panel ....................4 Turning off .....................................................18 Turning on ......................................................18 TV control key, remote control ........................7 TV monitor connection ..................................14 ■ U Using the remote control ..................................9 ■ V VIDEO jack ....................................................13 Video jack ......................................................13 VIDEO jack, front panel ..................................4 Video Out, OPTION menu ............................45 Video/audio jack ............................................13 Virtual CINEMA DSP ...................................28 VOLUME +/–, remote control .........................7 VOLUME control, front panel .........................4 VOLUME indicator, front panel display .........6 Volume Trim, OPTION menu .......................43 ■ X XM indicator, front panel display ....................6 XM Satellite Radio tuning .............................31 XM Satellite Radio, troubleshooting .............65 XM terminal, rear panel ...................................5 “AMAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or “gPOWER” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to “Part names and functions” on page 4. List of remote control codes TV A.R. Systems Acme Acura ADC Admiral 0274 0260 0261, 0273 0259 0100, 0224, 0257, 0258, 0259, 0264, 0265 Advent 0204 Adventura 0107 Adyson 0260, 0327, 0328 Agashi 0327, 0328 Agazi 0259 Aiko 0260, 0261, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Aim 0274 Aiwa 0028, 0297 Akai 0063, 0096, 0101, 0205, 0231, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Akiba 0262, 0274 Akura 0259, 0262, 0273, 0274 Alaron 0327 Alba 0243, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0266, 0269, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0294, 0300, 0327 Albatron 0222 Alcyon 0249 Alleron 0105 Allorgan 0328 Allstar 0268, 0274 America Action 0225 AMOi 0326 Amplivision 0243, 0260, 0275, 0328 Amstrad 0259, 0261, 0262, 0273, 0274 Amtron 0104 Anam 0225, 0261 Anam National 0102, 0104 Anglo 0261, 0273 Anitech 0249, 0259, 0261, 0273, 0274 Ansonic 0243, 0250, 0261, 0263, 0273, 0274 AOC 0072, 0090, 0096, 0103 Apex 0061, 0117, 0139 Arcam 0327, 0328 Arcam Delta 0260 Aristona 0268, 0271, 0274 Arthur Martin 0275 ASA 0257, 0265 Asberg 0249, 0268, 0274 Astra 0261 Asuka 0259, 0260, 0262, 0327, 0328 Atlantic 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0327 Atori 0261, 0273 Auchan 0275 Audiosonic 0243, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 AudioTon 0243, 0260, 0328 Audiovox 0104, 0144, 0225 Ausind Autovox Aventura Awa Axion Baird Bang & Olufsen Basic Line Bastide Baur Bazin Beko Belcor Bell & Howell Benq Beon Best Bestar Binatone Blue Sky Blue Star Boots BPL Bradford Brandt Brillian Brinkmann Brionvega Britannia Brockwood Broksonic Bruns BTC Bush Candle Capsonic Carena Carnivale Carrefour Carver Cascade Casio Cathay CCE Celebrity Celera Centurion Century CGE Changhong Chimei Cimline Citizen City Clarion Clarivox 0249 0249, 0257, 0259, 0260, 0328 0097 0327, 0328 0206 0328 0230, 0257 0261, 0262, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0328 0260, 0328 0271, 0274 0328 0243, 0269, 0274, 0282, 0351, 0357, 0372, 0380 0090 0065, 0100 0051, 0160, 0315 0268, 0271, 0274 0243 0243, 0268, 0274 0260, 0328 0262, 0274 0270 0260, 0328 0270, 0274 0104, 0225 0267, 0272 0228 0274 0257, 0268, 0271, 0274 0260, 0327, 0328 0090 0063, 0225 0257 0262 0261, 0262, 0264, 0266, 0268, 0270, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0282, 0286, 0294, 0300, 0328, 0329, 0351, 0388, 0394, 0413 0072, 0090, 0096, 0107 0259 0274 0096 0266 0088 0261, 0273, 0274 0317 0268, 0271, 0274 0229, 0328 0057, 0101 0117 0268, 0271, 0274 0257 0243, 0249 0117 0323 0261, 0273 0072, 0085, 0090, 0096, 0104 0261, 0273 0225 0271 Clatronic 0243, 0249, 0259, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0269, 0273, 0274, 0328 CMS 0327 CMS Hightec 0328 Coby 0151 Colortyme 0072, 0090 Commercial Solutions 0071 Concerto 0072, 0090 Concorde 0261, 0273 Condor 0243, 0260, 0268, 0269, 0273, 0274, 0327 Contec 0225, 0260, 0261, 0266, 0273, 0327 Contec/Cony 0094, 0104 Continental Edison 0267 Cosmel 0261, 0273 Craig 0104, 0225 Crosley 0088, 0119, 0249, 0257 Crown 0104, 0225, 0243, 0249, 0261, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0273, 0274 CS Electronics 0260, 0262, 0327 CTC Clatronic 0263 CTX 0159 Curtis Mathes 0065, 0071, 0072, 0085, 0088, 0090, 0096, 0099, 0224 CXC 0104, 0225 Cybertron 0262 Cytron 0202 Daewoo 0072, 0085, 0090, 0103, 0119, 0245, 0260, 0261, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0281, 0285, 0303, 0321, 0327, 0328, 0344, 0361, 0387 Dainichi 0262, 0327 Dansai 0259, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0327, 0328 Dantax 0243, 0271 Dawa 0274 Daytron 0072, 0085, 0090, 0261, 0273 De Graaf 0264 Decca 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Dell 0167, 0195 Denver 0308, 0312 Desmet 0268, 0271, 0274 Diamant 0274 Diamond 0327 DiamondVision 0213, 0221 Dimensia 0099 Disney 0137 Dixi 0261, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328 Dream Vision 0415, 0416 DTS 0261, 0273 Dual 0260, 0274, 0328 Dual-Tec 0260, 0261 Dumont 0076, 0090, 0108, 0257, 0260, 0263, 0328 Durabrand 0077, 0097, 0133, 0225 Dux 0271 Dwin 0224 Dynatron 0268, 0271, 0274 Dynex 0181, 0182 Elbe 0243, 0250, 0274, 0328 Elcit 0257 Electa 0270 ELECTRO TECH 0261 Electroband 0057, 0101 Electrograph 0226 Electrohome 0072, 0090, 0101, 0102 Element 0180 Elin 0260, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327 Elite 0262, 0268, 0274 Elman 0263 Elta 0261, 0273, 0327 Emerson 0065, 0072, 0077, 0082, 0085, 0090, 0094, 0095, 0097, 0104, 0105, 0119, 0225, 0243, 0257, 0274 Emprex 0200 Envision 0072, 0090, 0096 Epson 0156, 0201, 0309 Erres 0268, 0271, 0274 ESA 0097 ESC 0328 Etron 0261 Eurofeel 0328 Euro-Feel 0259 Euroline 0271 Euroman 0243, 0327, 0328 Euromann 0259, 0260, 0268, 0274 Europhon 0260, 0263, 0268, 0274, 0327, 0328 Expert 0275 Exquisit 0274 Fenner 0261, 0273 Ferguson 0267, 0271, 0272 Fidelity 0260, 0264, 0274, 0327 Filsai 0328 Finlandia 0264 Finlux 0249, 0257, 0260, 0263, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 FIRST LINE 0260, 0261, 0268 Firstline 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Fisher 0065, 0243, 0257, 0260, 0266, 0269, 0328 Flint 0268, 0274 Formenti 0249, 0257, 0258, 0260, 0271, 0327 Formenti/Phoenix 0327 Fortress 0257, 0258 Fraba 0243, 0274 Friac 0243 Frontech 0259, 0261, 0264, 0265, 0273, 0328 Fujitsu 0023, 0024, 0025, 0105, 0328 Fujitsu General 0328 i Fujitsu Siemens 0425, 0426, 0427, 0428, 0429 Funai 0033, 0034, 0035, 0036, 0037, 0097, 0104, 0105, 0225, 0259 Futuretech 0104, 0225 Galaxi 0269, 0274 Galaxis 0243, 0274 Gateway 0163, 0226, 0227 GBC 0261, 0266, 0273 GE 0069, 0071, 0072, 0073, 0077, 0090, 0099, 0102, 0106, 0112, 0131 Geant Casino 0275 GEC 0260, 0265, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Geloso 0261, 0264, 0273 General Technic 0261, 0273 Genexxa 0262, 0265, 0268, 0274 GFM 0177, 0210 Giant 0328 Gibralter 0076, 0090, 0096, 0108 GoldHand 0327 Goldline 0274 GoldStar 0072, 0077, 0085, 0090, 0094, 0096, 0103, 0243, 0260, 0261, 0264, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Goodmans 0164, 0259, 0261, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0322, 0328, 0395, 0399, 0412 Gorenje 0243, 0269 GPM 0262 GPX 0211 Gradiente 0162 Graetz 0265 Granada 0249, 0260, 0264, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0275, 0328 Grandin 0261, 0262, 0270, 0271 Gronic 0328 Grundig 0242, 0243, 0249, 0274, 0356 Grunpy 0104, 0105, 0225 Haier 0187, 0207 Halifax 0259, 0260, 0327, 0328 Hallmark 0072, 0077, 0090 Hampton 0260, 0327, 0328 Hanseatic 0243, 0250, 0260, 0261, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328 Hantarex 0261, 0273, 0274 Hantor 0274 Harman/Kardon 0088 Harvard 0104, 0225 Harwood 0273, 0274 Havermy 0224 HCM 0259, 0260, 0261, 0270, 0273, 0274, 0328 Hema 0273, 0328 Hewlett Packard 0146 Higashi 0327 HiLine 0274 ii Hinari Hisawa Hisense Hitachi Hornyphon Hoshai Huanyu Hygashi Hyper Hypson Hyundai Iberia ICE ICeS Ilo IMA Imperial Indiana Infinity InFocus Ingelen Ingersol Initial Inno Hit Innovation Insignia Inteq Interactive Interbuy Interfunk International Intervision Irradio Isukai ITC ITS ITT ITV Janeil JBL JC Penney JCB Jensen JVC 0261, 0262, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274 0262, 0270, 0275 0165 0006, 0014, 0015, 0016, 0042, 0072, 0090, 0094, 0173, 0254, 0255, 0256, 0260, 0264, 0265, 0266, 0274, 0285, 0300, 0319, 0328, 0348, 0349, 0385, 0402, 0410 0268, 0274 0262 0260, 0327 0260, 0327, 0328 0260, 0261, 0273, 0327, 0328 0259, 0260, 0268, 0270, 0271, 0274, 0275, 0328 0223 0274 0259, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 0327 0198, 0203 0104 0243, 0249, 0265, 0268, 0269, 0274 0268, 0271, 0274 0088 0168, 0277, 0313, 0397, 0430 0265 0261, 0273 0203 0249, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328 0259, 0261 0182, 0188, 0190, 0209 0076 0243 0261, 0273 0243, 0257, 0265, 0268, 0271, 0274 0327 0243, 0259, 0260, 0263, 0274, 0328 0249, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274 0262, 0274 0260, 0328 0262, 0268, 0270, 0274, 0327 0261, 0265 0261, 0271, 0274 0107 0088 0072, 0073, 0085, 0090, 0099, 0103, 0106 0057, 0101 0072, 0090 0017, 0018, 0019, 0092, 0093, 0094, 0106, 0251, 0252, 0266, 0268, 0293, 0360, 0379 Kaisui Kamosonic Kamp Kapsch Karcher Kawasho KEC Kendo Kenwood KIC Kingsley KLH Kloss Novabeam Kneissel Kolster Konka Korpel Korting Kosmos Koyoda KTV Kyoto Lasat Lenco Lenoir Leyco LG LG/GoldStar Liesenk Liesenkotter Life Lifetec Lloyds Loewe Loewe Opta Logik Luma Lumatron Lux May Luxman Luxor LXI M Electronic MAG Magnadyne Magnafon 0260, 0261, 0262, 0270, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 0260 0260, 0327 0265 0243, 0260, 0261, 0271, 0274 0072, 0090, 0101, 0327 0225 0243, 0263, 0264, 0274 0072, 0090, 0096 0328 0260, 0327 0117 0104, 0107 0243, 0250, 0274 0268, 0274 0262 0268, 0271, 0274 0243, 0257 0274 0261 0085, 0096, 0104, 0225, 0229, 0260, 0328 0327, 0328 0243 0261, 0273 0260, 0261, 0273 0259, 0268, 0271, 0274 0016, 0038, 0039, 0077, 0103, 0145, 0222, 0243, 0246, 0253, 0260, 0261, 0264, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0282, 0290, 0299, 0316, 0327, 0328, 0351, 0359, 0367, 0382, 0384, 0389, 0396 0246 0271 0274 0259, 0261 0259, 0261, 0273, 0274 0273 0243, 0250, 0274, 0280, 0306, 0347 0257, 0268, 0271 0100 0264, 0271, 0273, 0274 0264, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 0268 0072, 0090 0260, 0264, 0328 0061, 0065, 0071, 0072, 0073, 0077, 0088, 0099 0260, 0261, 0265, 0267, 0268, 0271 0050 0257, 0263, 0271 0249, 0260, 0263, 0327 Magnavox 0072, 0088, 0090, 0091, 0095, 0096, 0098, 0114, 0115, 0129, 0134, 0176, 0178, 0189, 0210 Magnum 0259, 0261 Majestic 0100 Mandor 0259 Manesth 0259, 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Marantz 0072, 0088, 0090, 0096, 0158, 0268, 0271, 0274 Marelli 0257 Mark 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Masuda 0328 Matsui 0260, 0261, 0264, 0266, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328, 0405 Matsushita 0067 Maxent 0193, 0226 Mediator 0268, 0271, 0274 Medion 0259, 0261, 0274 Megapower 0222 Megatron 0072, 0077 MElectronic 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Melvox 0275 Memorex 0065, 0072, 0077, 0100, 0103, 0133, 0219, 0261, 0273 Memphis 0261, 0273 Mercury 0273, 0274 Metz 0257 MGA 0072, 0077, 0090, 0096, 0103 Micromaxx 0259, 0261 Microstar 0259, 0261 Midland 0069, 0071, 0073, 0076, 0085, 0106, 0108 Minerva 0249 Minoka 0268, 0274 Mintek 0203 Mitsubishi 0006, 0015, 0016, 0048, 0072, 0077, 0090, 0103, 0196, 0224, 0257, 0266, 0268, 0274, 0298, 0371 Mivar 0243, 0249, 0250, 0260, 0327, 0328 Monivision 0222 Montgomery Ward 0100 Motion 0249 Motorola 0102, 0224 MTC 0072, 0090, 0096, 0103, 0243, 0327 Multi System 0271 Multitech 0104, 0225, 0229, 0243, 0260, 0261, 0263, 0264, 0266, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Murphy 0260, 0327 NAD 0061, 0072, 0077 Naonis 0264 NEC 0026, 0053, 0072, 0090, 0096, 0102, 0103, 0266, 0328 Neckermann NEI Net-TV Neufunk New Tech New World NewTech Nicamagic Nikkai Nikko Nobliko Nokia Norcent Nordic Nordmende Nordvision Novatronic Oceanic Okano Olevia ONCEAS Onwa Opera Oppo Optimus Optoma Optonica Orbit Orion Orline Osaki Oso Otto Versand Pael Palladium Palsonic Panama Panasonic Panavision Pathe Cinema Pausa Penney Perdio Perfekt Philco Philharmonic Philips 0243, 0257, 0260, 0264, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0274, 0328 0268, 0271, 0274 0226 0273, 0274 0261, 0268 0262 0273, 0274, 0328 0260, 0327 0259, 0260, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 0072, 0077, 0096 0249, 0260, 0263, 0327 0265 0155 0328 0257, 0265, 0267, 0268 0271 0274 0265, 0275 0243, 0269, 0274 0052, 0140, 0149, 0154, 0157 0260 0104, 0225 0274 0208 0065, 0067 0194 0224 0268, 0274 0121, 0192, 0261, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0282, 0329 0274 0259, 0260, 0262, 0274, 0328 0262 0258, 0260, 0266, 0268, 0270, 0271, 0274, 0328 0260, 0327 0243, 0260, 0269, 0274, 0328 0328 0259, 0260, 0261, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 0006, 0007, 0066, 0067, 0068, 0069, 0070, 0102, 0106, 0113, 0147, 0215, 0241, 0265, 0274, 0279, 0310, 0332, 0334, 0368, 0374 0274 0243, 0250, 0260, 0275, 0327 0261, 0273 0061, 0069, 0071, 0077, 0096 0274, 0327 0274 0072, 0088, 0090, 0091, 0094, 0096, 0102, 0103, 0243, 0249, 0257, 0274 0260, 0328 0040, 0088, 0089, 0090, 0091, 0094, 0098, 0099, 0102, 0114, 0135, 0143, 0176, 0178, 0189, 0210, 0212, 0232, 0233, 0257, 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0278, 0287, 0301, 0302, 0307, 0311, 0314, 0330, 0331, 0333, 0337, 0338, 0339, 0341, 0343, 0345, 0355, 0363, 0365, 0377, 0378, 0381, 0383, 0406, 0409, 0414 Philips Magnavox 0089, 0114, 0115 Phoenix 0243, 0257, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0327 Phonola 0257, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0327 Pilot 0085, 0090, 0096 Pioneer 0012, 0013, 0072, 0090, 0243, 0265, 0267, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0408 Plantron 0259, 0268, 0273, 0274 Playsonic 0328 Polaroid 0117, 0152, 0184, 0220 Poppy 0261, 0273 Portland 0072, 0085, 0090, 0103 Prandoni-Prince 0249, 0264 Precision 0260, 0328 Prima 0161, 0207, 0261, 0265, 0273 Princeton 0222 Prism 0069, 0106 Profex 0261, 0273 Profi-Tronic 0268, 0274 Proline 0268, 0274 Proscan 0071, 0073, 0099 Prosonic 0243, 0260, 0271, 0274, 0327, 0328 Protech 0259, 0260, 0261, 0263, 0268, 0271, 0328 Proton 0072, 0077, 0090, 0094 Protron 0150 PROVIEW 0050, 0164 Provision 0271, 0274 Pulsar 0076, 0090, 0108 Pye 0268, 0271, 0274, 0296, 0338 Pymi 0261, 0273 Quandra Vision 0275 Quasar 0067, 0069, 0102, 0106 Quelle 0259, 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Questa 0266 Radialva 0274 RadioShack 0065, 0071, 0077, 0096, 0225, 0274 RadioShack/Realistic 0072, 0085, 0090, 0094, 0099, 0104 Radiola 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Radiomarelli 0257, 0274 Radiotone 0243, 0268, 0273, 0274 Rank 0266 RCA Realistic Recor Redstar Reflex Revox Rex RFT Rhapsody R-Line Roadstar Robotron Rowa Royal Lux RTF Runco Saba Saisho Salora Sambers Sampo Samsung Sandra Sansui Sanyo SBR Sceptre Schaub Lorenz Schneider Scotch Scott Sears SEG SEI 0071, 0072, 0073, 0074, 0075, 0090, 0099, 0102, 0103, 0109, 0120, 0179, 0218 0065, 0077, 0096, 0225 0274 0274 0274 0243, 0268, 0271, 0274 0259, 0264, 0265 0243, 0250, 0257 0327 0268, 0271, 0274 0259, 0261, 0262, 0273 0257 0327, 0328 0243 0257 0076, 0096, 0108 0257, 0265, 0267, 0272, 0376 0259, 0260, 0261, 0273, 0328 0264, 0265 0249, 0263 0072, 0085, 0090, 0096, 0226 0029, 0030, 0031, 0032, 0044, 0045, 0046, 0047, 0072, 0077, 0084, 0085, 0086, 0087, 0090, 0094, 0096, 0103, 0118, 0217, 0229, 0235, 0236, 0237, 0243, 0259, 0260, 0261, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0284, 0295, 0327, 0328, 0336, 0346, 0390, 0407 0260, 0327, 0328 0063, 0121, 0268, 0274 0020, 0021, 0022, 0049, 0065, 0090, 0141, 0191, 0243, 0250, 0260, 0266, 0273, 0291, 0327, 0328, 0370, 0373, 0391 0271, 0274 0166, 0185 0265 0260, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0287, 0300, 0328, 0364, 0366 0072, 0077 0072, 0077, 0090, 0094, 0104, 0105, 0199, 0225 0061, 0065, 0071, 0072, 0073, 0077, 0088, 0090, 0097, 0099, 0105 0259, 0260, 0263, 0266, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0300, 0327, 0328 0274 SEI-Sinudyne Seleco Sencora Sentra Serino Sharp Sheng Chia Shogun Siarem Sierra Siesta Signature Silva Silver Singer Sinudyne Skantic Solavox Sonitron Sonoko Sonolor Sontec Sony Sound & Vision Soundesign Soundwave Squareview SSS Standard Starlite Stenway Stern Strato Stylandia Sunkai Sunstar Sunwood Superla Superscan SuperTech Supra Supre-Macy Supreme Susumu Sutron SVA Sydney 0257, 0263, 0265 0264, 0265, 0266 0261, 0273 0273 0327 0009, 0010, 0011, 0072, 0080, 0081, 0082, 0083, 0085, 0090, 0094, 0110, 0148, 0183, 0216, 0224, 0247, 0248, 0258, 0266, 0288, 0304, 0324, 0325, 0340, 0358, 0362, 0369, 0386, 0392, 0398, 0400, 0401, 0403 0224 0090 0257, 0263, 0274 0268, 0274 0243 0100 0327 0266 0257, 0263, 0275 0257, 0263, 0271, 0274 0265 0265 0243, 0328 0259, 0260, 0261, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0328 0265, 0275 0243, 0268, 0271, 0274 0041, 0057, 0058, 0059, 0060, 0101, 0116, 0125, 0126, 0127, 0142, 0169, 0170, 0171, 0172, 0174, 0234, 0261, 0266, 0276, 0289, 0292, 0393, 0411 0262, 0263 0072, 0077, 0090, 0104, 0105, 0225 0268, 0271, 0274 0097 0090, 0104, 0225 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0328 0104, 0225, 0271, 0273, 0274 0270 0264, 0265 0273, 0274 0328 0261 0273, 0274 0261, 0268, 0273, 0274 0260, 0327, 0328 0095, 0224 0273, 0274, 0327 0261, 0273 0107 0057, 0101 0262 0261, 0273 0197 0260, 0327, 0328 iii Sylvania Symphonic Syntax Syntax-Brillian Sysline Sytong Tandy Tashiko Tatung TCM Teac Tec Technics TechniSat Techwood TEDELEX Teknika Teleavia Telecor Telefunken Telegazi Telemeister Telesonic Telestar Teletech Teleton Televideon Televiso Tensai Tesmet Tevion Texet Thomson Thorn TMK TNCi Tokai Tokyo Tomashi Toshiba Totevision Towada Trakton Trans Continens Transtec Trident iv 0072, 0088, 0089, 0090, 0091, 0095, 0096, 0097, 0098, 0175, 0177, 0210 0097, 0104, 0108, 0133, 0210, 0225 0149 0149 0271 0327 0224, 0258, 0260, 0262, 0265, 0328 0260, 0264, 0266, 0327, 0328 0102, 0227, 0260, 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 0259, 0261 0274, 0328 0260, 0261, 0273, 0328 0067, 0069, 0106 0320, 0417, 0418, 0419 0069, 0072, 0090, 0106 0328 0072, 0085, 0088, 0090, 0094, 0100, 0103, 0104, 0105, 0225 0267 0274, 0328 0267, 0268, 0272, 0274 0274 0274 0274 0274 0261, 0271, 0273, 0274 0260, 0328 0327 0275 0261, 0262, 0268, 0273, 0274, 0328 0268 0259, 0261 0260, 0273, 0327, 0328 0238, 0239, 0240, 0260, 0267, 0268, 0272, 0274, 0335 0271, 0274 0072, 0077, 0090 0076 0268, 0274, 0328 0260, 0327 0270 0027, 0043, 0053, 0054, 0061, 0062, 0063, 0064, 0065, 0122, 0123, 0124, 0128, 0130, 0132, 0139, 0214, 0244, 0266, 0283, 0305, 0328, 0329, 0342, 0350, 0352, 0353, 0354, 0375, 0404 0085 0265, 0328 0328 0274, 0328 0327 0328 Triumph Uher 0274 0243, 0249, 0265, 0268, 0274 Ultravox 0257, 0260, 0263, 0274, 0327 Unic Line 0274 United 0271 Universum 0243, 0249, 0259, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0274, 0328 Univox 0274 Vector Research 0096 Vestel 0264, 0265, 0268, 0269, 0271, 0274, 0328 Vexa 0261, 0271, 0273, 0274 Victor 0093, 0266, 0268 VIDEOLOGIC 0327 Videologique 0260, 0262, 0327, 0328 VideoSystem 0268, 0274 Videotechnic 0327, 0328 Vidikron 0088 Vidtech 0072, 0077, 0090, 0103 Viewsonic 0153, 0186, 0226, 0318 Viking 0107 Viore 0198 Visiola 0260, 0327 Vision 0268, 0274, 0328 Vizio 0090, 0136, 0160, 0227, 0420, 0421, 0422, 0423, 0424 Vortec 0268, 0271, 0274 Voxson 0249, 0257, 0264, 0265, 0268, 0274 Waltham 0260, 0274, 0328 Wards 0072, 0077, 0088, 0090, 0091, 0096, 0098, 0099, 0100, 0103, 0105 Watson 0268, 0271, 0274 Watt Radio 0260, 0263, 0327 Waycon 0061 Wega 0257, 0266, 0274 Wegavox 0273 Weltblick 0268, 0271, 0274, 0328 Westinghouse 0057, 0138, 0142 White Westinghouse 0008, 0119, 0260, 0263, 0271, 0274, 0327 Wincom 0055, 0056 Xrypton 0274 Yamaha 0000, 0001, 0002, 0003, 0004, 0005, 0072, 0090, 0096, 0103 Yamishi 0274, 0328 Yokan 0274 Yoko 0243, 0259, 0260, 0261, 0262, 0268, 0271, 0273, 0274, 0327, 0328 Yorx 0262 Zanussi 0264, 0328 Zenith 0076, 0077, 0078, 0079, 0090, 0100, 0108, 0111 VCR ABS 1066 Adventura Adyson Aiwa 1023 1090 1023, 1072, 1073, 1074 Akai 1071, 1073 Akiba 1079, 1090 Akura 1073, 1079, 1090 Alba 1074, 1075, 1076, 1079, 1090, 1091 Alienware 1066 Ambassador 1076 American High 1022 Amstrad 1072, 1090, 1091 Anitech 1079, 1090 Apex 1010 ASA 1077, 1078 Asha 1020 Asuka 1072, 1077, 1078, 1079, 1090 Audio Dynamics 1018 Audiosonic 1091 Audiovox 1021 Baird 1072, 1073, 1075, 1091 Bang & Olufsen 1067 Basic Line 1074, 1075, 1076, 1079, 1090, 1091 Baur 1078 Beaumark 1020 Bell & Howell 1019 Bestar 1075, 1076, 1091 Black Panther Line 1075, 1091 Blaupunkt 1078 Bondstec 1076, 1090 Broksonic 1054 Bush 1074, 1075, 1079, 1090, 1091, 1097, 1099, 1109, 1139 Calix 1021 Candle 1020, 1021 Canon 1022 Cathay 1091 Catron 1076 CGE 1072, 1073 Cimline 1074, 1079, 1090 CineVision 1058 Citizen 1020, 1021 Clatronic 1076, 1090 Colortyme 1018 Condor 1075, 1076, 1091 Craig 1020, 1021 Crown 1075, 1076, 1079, 1090, 1091 Curtis Mathes 1018, 1020, 1022 Cybernex 1020 CyberPower 1066 Daewoo 1023, 1075, 1076, 1091, 1116, 1141 Dansai 1079, 1090, 1091 Dantax 1074 Daytron 1075, 1091 DBX 1018 De Graaf 1078 Decca 1072, 1073, 1078 Dell 1066 Denko 1090 DiamondVision 1050 DigiFusion 1092 DIRECTV 1035, 1038, 1040, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1065 Dish Network 1064 Dishpro 1064 Dual 1073, 1078, 1091 Dumont Durabrand Dynatech Echostar Elbe Elcatech Electrohome Electrophonic Elsay Elta Emerson 1072, 1078 1032 1023 1064 1091 1090 1021 1021 1090 1079, 1090, 1091 1021, 1022, 1023, 1070, 1090 ESC 1075, 1091 Etzuko 1079, 1090 Expressvu 1064 Ferguson 1073 Fidelity 1072, 1090 Finlandia 1078 Finlux 1072, 1073, 1078 Firstline 1074, 1077, 1079, 1090 Fisher 1019 Flint 1074 Formenti/Phoenix 1078 Frontech 1076 Fuji 1022 Fujitsu 1072 Funai 1023, 1072 Galaxy 1072 Garrard 1023 Gateway 1066 GBC 1076, 1079 GE 1020, 1022 GEC 1078 Geloso 1079 General 1076 General Technic 1074 GOI 1064 GoldHand 1079, 1090 Goldstar 1018, 1021, 1072, 1077 Goodmans 1072, 1075, 1076, 1077, 1079, 1090, 1091 Gradiente 1023 Graetz 1073 Granada 1078 Grandin 1072, 1075, 1076, 1077, 1079, 1090, 1091 Grundig 1078, 1079 Hanseatic 1077, 1078, 1091 Harley Davidson 1023 Harman/Kardon 1018 Harwood 1090 HCM 1079, 1090 Headquarter 1019 Hewlett Packard 1066 Hinari 1074, 1079, 1090, 1091 Hisawa 1074 Hitachi 1072, 1073, 1078, 1089, 1108, 1124 HNS 1060 Howard Computers 1066 HP 1066 HTS 1064 Hughes 1035, 1040, 1061 Hughes Network Systems 1038, 1060 Humax 1035, 1060, 1094 Hush 1066 Hypson 1074, 1079, 1090, 1091 iBUYPOWER Impego Imperial Inno Hit 1066 1076 1072 1075, 1076, 1078, 1079, 1090, 1091 Innovation 1074 Instant Replay 1022 Interbuy 1077, 1090 Interfunk 1078 Intervision 1072, 1091 Irradio 1077, 1079, 1090 ITT 1073 ITV 1075, 1077, 1091 JC Penney 1018, 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022 JCL 1022 JVC 1011, 1012, 1013, 1014, 1015, 1016, 1017, 1018, 1019, 1028, 1035, 1064, 1073, 1085, 1117, 1130, 1131, 1133, 1134, 1135, 1136 Kaisui 1079, 1090 Karcher 1078 Kendo 1074, 1075, 1076, 1090 Kenwood 1018, 1019, 1073 Kodak 1021, 1022 Korpel 1079, 1090 Kyoto 1090 Lenco 1075 Leyco 1079, 1090 LG 1021, 1053, 1072, 1077, 1088, 1100, 1106, 1125, 1143 Lifetec 1074 Linksys 1066 Lloyd’s 1023 Loewe Opta 1077, 1078 Logik 1079, 1090 Lumatron 1075, 1091 Luxor 1090 LXI 1021 M Electronic 1072 Magnavox 1022, 1032, 1044, 1070 Magnin 1021 Manesth 1079, 1090 Marantz 1018, 1019, 1022, 1078 Mark 1091 Marta 1021 Matsui 1074, 1077 Matsushita 1022 Media Center PC 1066 Mediator 1078 Medion 1074 MEI 1022 Memorex 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023, 1032, 1048, 1069, 1072, 1077 Memphis 1079, 1090 MGN Technology 1020 Micromaxx 1074 Microsoft 1066 Microstar 1074 Migros 1072 Mind 1066 Mitsubishi 1029, 1072, 1078 Motorola 1022 MTC 1020 Multitech 1020, 1023, 1072, 1076, 1078, 1079, 1090 Murphy 1072 NEC 1018, 1019, 1073 Neckermann 1073, 1078 NEI 1078 Nesco 1079, 1090 Nikkai 1076, 1090, 1091 Nikko 1021 Niveus Media 1066 Noblex 1020 Nokia 1073, 1091 Nordmende 1073 Northgate 1066 Oceanic 1072, 1073 Okano 1074, 1090, 1091 Olympus 1022 Optimus 1021 Orion 1033, 1069, 1074, 1097, 1139 Orson 1072 Osaki 1072, 1077, 1079, 1090 Otto Versand 1078 Palladium 1073, 1077, 1079, 1090 Panasonic 1007, 1008, 1009, 1022, 1026, 1042, 1043, 1068, 1082, 1101, 1126, 1132 Pathe Marconi 1073 Perdio 1072 Philco 1022, 1090 Philips 1022, 1030, 1035, 1038, 1039, 1040, 1044, 1055, 1060, 1078, 1084, 1095, 1096, 1104, 1105, 1111, 1113, 1122, 1124, 1127, 1128, 1129 Philips Magnavox 1030 Phonola 1078 Pilot 1021 Pioneer 1078, 1118 Polaroid 1010, 1049 Portland 1075, 1076, 1091 Prinz 1072 Profex 1079 Proline 1072 Proscan 1065 Prosonic 1074, 1091 Pulsar 1032 Pye 1052, 1078 Quarter 1019 Quartz 1019 Quasar 1022 Quelle 1072, 1078 Radialva 1090 RadioShack 1021 RadioShack/Realistic 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023 Radiola 1078 Radix 1021 Randex 1021 RCA 1020, 1022, 1025, 1035, 1040, 1047, 1060, 1065 Realistic 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023 ReplayTV 1041, 1068 Rex 1073 RFT 1076, 1078, 1090 Ricavision Roadstar 1066 1075, 1077, 1079, 1090, 1091 Royal 1090 Runco 1032 Saba 1073 Saisho 1074, 1079 Samsung 1006, 1020, 1038, 1040, 1046, 1060, 1080, 1107, 1110, 1112, 1121, 1123, 1140, 1142 Samurai 1076, 1090 Sanky 1032 Sansui 1033, 1056, 1069, 1073 Sanyo 1019, 1020, 1114 Saville 1091 SBR 1078 Schaub Lorenz 1072, 1073 Schneider 1072, 1074, 1075, 1076, 1077, 1078, 1079, 1090, 1091 Sears 1019, 1021, 1022 SEG 1079, 1090, 1091 SEI-Sinudyne 1078 Seleco 1073 Sentra 1076, 1090 Sentron 1079, 1090 Sharp 1031, 1045, 1057, 1081, 1115, 1137 Shintom 1079, 1090 Shivaki 1077 Shogun 1020 Siemens 1077 Silva 1077 Silver 1091 Singer 1022 Sinudyne 1078 Solavox 1076 Sonic Blue 1041, 1068 Sonneclair 1090 Sonoko 1075, 1091 Sontec 1077 Sony 1000, 1001, 1002, 1003, 1024, 1027, 1036, 1062, 1066, 1083, 1098, 1103, 1138 Stack 1066 Stack 9 1066 Standard 1075, 1091 Stern 1091 STS 1022 Sunkai 1074 Sunstar 1072 Suntronic 1072 Sunwood 1079, 1090 Superscan 1070 Sylvania 1022, 1023, 1044, 1052, 1070 Symphonic 1023, 1044, 1090 Systemax 1066 Tagar Systems 1066 Taisho 1074 Tandberg 1091 Tandy 1019 Tashiko 1021, 1072 Tatung 1072, 1073, 1078 TCM 1074, 1093, 1120 Teac 1023, 1091 Tec 1076, 1090, 1091 Technics 1022 Teknika 1021, 1022, 1023 Teleavia 1073 Telefunken Teletech Tenosal Tensai 1073 1090, 1091 1079, 1090 1072, 1077, 1079, 1090 Tevion 1074 Thomson 1073, 1087 Thorn 1073 Tivo 1035, 1036, 1037, 1039, 1040, 1060, 1061, 1062 TMK 1020 Tokai 1077, 1079, 1090 Tonsai 1079 Toshiba 1004, 1005, 1034, 1051, 1063, 1066, 1073, 1078, 1086, 1099, 1102, 1119, 1144 Totevision 1020, 1021 Touch 1066 Towada 1079, 1090 Towika 1079, 1090 TVA 1076 Uher 1077 UltimateTV 1065 Ultravox 1091 Unitech 1020 United Quick Star 1075, 1091 Universum 1072, 1077, 1078 Vector Research 1018 Video Concepts 1018 Videon 1074 Videosonic 1020 Viewsonic 1066 Voodoo 1066 Wards 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023 Weltblick 1077 XR-1000 1022, 1023 Yamaha 1018, 1019 Yamishi 1079, 1090 Yokan 1079, 1090 Yoko 1076, 1077, 1079, 1090 Zenith 1032 ZT Group 1066 DVD 4Kus Accurian Advent AEG Airis Aiwa Akai 2097 2220 2169, 2201 2312 2318 2272 2170, 2195, 2225, 2227 Akura 2310 Alba 2018, 2232, 2247, 2259, 2264 Alco 2199 Alize 2315 Allegro 2215 Amitech 2312 Amphion MediaWorks 2145 AMW 2145, 2313 Apex 2044, 2045, 2046, 2047, 2076, 2208, 2209 Apple 2163 Arrgo 2216 Asono 2318 Aspire 2140, 2202 Astar 2162 v ATACOM Audiovox Avious Awa Axion Bang & Olufsen Baze BBK Bellagio Best Buy Blaupunkt Blue Parade Boghe Brainwave Brandt Broksonic Bush 2318 2111, 2199 2317 2313 2171 2210 2317 2318 2313 2309 2209 2207 2300 2312 2198, 2238 2192, 2195 2018, 2060, 2248, 2264, 2301, 2308, 2317, 2350, 2368 California Audio Labs 2197 Cambridge Audio 2304 CAT 2306, 2307 CAVS 2146 Centrum 2307 CGV 2304, 2312 Changhong 2222 Cinetec 2313 CineVision 2191, 2215 Clatronic 2308, 2317 Coby 2077, 2124, 2314 Conia 2301 Continental Edison 2313 Crown 2312 C-Tech 2305 Curtis Mathes 2217 CVG 2299 CyberHome 2048, 2068, 2216, 2233, 2258 Cytron 2166 Daenyx 2313 Daewoo 2083, 2215, 2280, 2299, 2312, 2313, 2326, 2376 Daewoo International 2313 Dalton 2311 Dansai 2303, 2312 Daytek 2145, 2234, 2313 Dayton 2313 DEC 2308 Decca 2312 Denon 2105, 2147, 2197, 2286 Denver 2288, 2308, 2310, 2314 Denzel 2302 Desay 2159 Diamond 2304, 2305 DiamondVision 2179, 2186 Disney 2078, 2088 DK Digital 2257 Dmtech 2226 Dual 2302 Durabrand 2218 DVX 2305 Easy Home 2309 Eclipse 2304 E-Dem 2318 Electrohome 2312 Elin 2312 Elta 2263, 2312, 2315 Emerson 2196, 2211, 2219 Enterprise 2211 vi Enzer Epson ESA Finlux Fintec Fisher Funai Gateway GE Gericom GFM Giec Global Solutions Global Sphere Go Video Goodmans 2302 2165 2219 2304, 2312, 2317 2299 2212 2219 2097 2079, 2206, 2209 2269 2176 2300 2305 2305 2135, 2215 2247, 2289, 2298, 2300, 2308, 2330, 2369 GPX 2177 Gradiente 2197 Graetz 2302 Greenhill 2209 Grundig 2271 Grunkel 2312, 2316 GVG 2299 H&B 2308 H_her 2318 Haaz 2304, 2305 Haier 2172 Harman/Kardon 2125, 2213 HiMAX 2309 Hitachi 2008, 2033, 2108, 2302, 2309, 2320, 2366 Hiteker 2208 Home Tech Industries 2318 Hyundai 2316 Ilo 2167 Initial 2167, 2209 Innovation 2228 Insignia 2080, 2175, 2219 Integra 2207 Irradio 2103 iSymphony 2164 JBL 2213 JVC 2049, 2050, 2051, 2052, 2053, 2054, 2055, 2056, 2057, 2070, 2242, 2261, 2275, 2276, 2277, 2278, 2339, 2340, 2341, 2342, 2386, 2387, 2389, 2390, 2391 Jwin 2148 Kansai 2314 Kawasaki 2199 Kennex 2312 Kenwood 2123, 2197, 2270 KeyPlug 2312 Kiiro 2312 Kingavon 2308 Kiss 2302 KLH 2199, 2209 Koda 2308 Koss 2095, 2198, 2204 KXD 2309 Landel 2221 Lasonic 2214 Lawson 2305 Lecson 2303 Lenco 2308, 2312, 2317 Lenoxx 2203, 2218 LG Life Lifetec Limit Liquid Video Liteon Loewe LogicLab Magnavox Magnex Majestic Marantz Marquant Matsui McIntosh Mecotek Medion Memorex MiCO Micromaxx Microsoft Microstar Minoka Minowa Mintek Mitsubishi Mizuda Monyka Mustek Mx Onda Mystral Naiko Nesa Neufunk Nevir Next Base Nexxtech NU-TEC Onkyo Oopla Oppo Optim Optimus Orava Orbit Orion Oritron P&B Pacific Panasonic Parasound peeKTON Philips 2080, 2107, 2115, 2116, 2141, 2188, 2211, 2215, 2237, 2239, 2285, 2293, 2295, 2348, 2370 2228 2228 2305 2204 2097, 2121, 2220 2274 2305 2075, 2096, 2178, 2180, 2196, 2205, 2219, 2308 2317 2314 2282 2312 2198, 2296 2149 2312 2228 2078, 2184, 2195 2300, 2304 2228 2206 2228 2312 2317 2167, 2209 2081 2308, 2309 2302 2232 2304 2316 2312 2209 2302 2312 2221 2161 2301 2205, 2290 2097 2150, 2173 2303 2230 2308 2313 2027, 2060 2198, 2204 2308 2305 2015, 2016, 2017, 2036, 2037, 2038, 2039, 2040, 2041, 2042, 2043, 2074, 2089, 2104, 2108, 2112, 2120, 2131, 2132, 2197, 2205, 2244, 2245, 2246, 2253, 2254, 2255, 2292, 2321, 2324, 2327, 2328, 2329, 2331, 2383, 2388 2151 2318 2026, 2061, 2062, 2075, 2090, 2094, 2096, 2097, 2103, 2110, 2126, 2180, 2193, 2205, 2231, 2235, 2241, 2251, Phonotrend Pioneer Pointer Polaroid Portland Powerpoint Prima Proceed Proscan Prosonic Protron Provision Pye Qwestar Raite RCA RedStar Regent Reoc Rimax Rio Roadstar Ronin Rotel Rowa Rownsonic Saba Sabaki Saivod Sampo Samsung Sansui Sanyo ScanMagic Schaub Lorenz Schneider Scientific Labs Scott Seeltech SEG Sharp Shinsonic Sigmatek Silva Singer Skymaster 2252, 2256, 2260, 2268, 2282, 2332, 2333, 2343, 2344, 2345, 2367, 2371, 2373, 2380, 2382, 2385 2317 2012, 2013, 2014, 2063, 2064, 2065, 2066, 2067, 2113, 2134, 2207, 2230, 2236, 2265, 2266, 2267, 2297, 2322, 2351, 2352, 2353, 2354, 2355, 2356, 2357, 2358, 2359, 2377 2312 2047, 2133, 2185 2312 2313 2174 2208 2206 2299, 2314 2152 2308 2194 2198 2302 2058, 2059, 2071, 2079, 2183, 2199, 2206, 2207, 2209 2310, 2312, 2314 2203 2305 2315 2215 2281, 2308 2313 2153 2200, 2301 2307 2198, 2238 2305 2312 2223 2031, 2032, 2033, 2034, 2035, 2082, 2127, 2137, 2138, 2154, 2182, 2197, 2283, 2319, 2325, 2346, 2347, 2349, 2372, 2381 2027, 2195, 2304, 2305, 2312 2139, 2195, 2212, 2374 2232 2312 2226 2305 2243, 2311 2318 2240, 2302, 2305, 2313 2009, 2010, 2084, 2122, 2142, 2143, 2144, 2181, 2190, 2228, 2262, 2375 2167 2309, 2318 2310 2304, 2305 2279, 2305 Skyworth Slim Art SM Electronic Sonic Blue Sontech Sony 2310 2312 2305 2215 2316 2005, 2006, 2007, 2020, 2021, 2022, 2023, 2024, 2025, 2069, 2072, 2073, 2085, 2086, 2087, 2091, 2092, 2093, 2102, 2128, 2129, 2130, 2249, 2250, 2323, 2334, 2335, 2336, 2360, 2361, 2362, 2363, 2364, 2365, 2384 Soundmaster 2305 Soundmax 2305 Spectra 2313 Spectroniq 2155 Standard 2305 Star Cluster 2305 Starmedia 2308, 2318 Sungale 2158 Sunkai 2312 Superscan 2196 Supervision 2305 Sylvania 2094, 2180, 2189, 2196, 2219, 2224 Symphonic 2062, 2180 Synn 2305 T.D.E. Systems 2316 Tatung 2083, 2312 TCM 2228, 2379 Teac 2199, 2287, 2301, 2305 Tec 2310 Technics 2197 Technika 2312, 2317 Telefunken 2307 Tensai 2312 Tevion 2228, 2305, 2311 Theta Digital 2207 Thomson 2229, 2238, 2284, 2294 Tokai 2302, 2310 Top Suxess 2318 Toshiba 2004, 2026, 2027, 2028, 2029, 2030, 2098, 2099, 2100, 2101, 2114, 2117, 2118, 2119, 2136, 2187, 2195, 2205, 2291, 2337, 2338, 2378 TRANScontinents 2313, 2317 Transonic 2317 Trio 2312 Trutech 2160 TruVision 2309 TSM 2318 Umax 2315 United 2317 Urban Concepts 2205 US Logic 2167 Venturer 2199 Viewmaster 2318 Vocopro 2156 VocoStar 2157 Waitec 2318 Welltech 2300 Westinghouse 2109, 2168 Wharfedale 2304, 2305 Woxter Xbox Xlogic XMS Xoro Yamada Yamaha Yamakawa Yukai Zenith 2315, 2318 2206, 2229 2305, 2312 2312 2300 2097, 2313, 2315 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2011, 2018, 2019, 2036, 2106, 2197, 2273 2302, 2313 2232 2080, 2141, 2205, 2211, 2215 Blu-ray Disc LG Panasonic Pioneer Samsung Sharp Sony Yamaha 2115 2089, 2131, 2132 2134 2035, 2127 2142, 2143, 2144 2025 2018 DVR Bush Panasonic Philips Pioneer RCA Samsung Yamaha 2060 2037, 2038, 2039, 2040, 2041, 2042 2061, 2062 2063, 2064, 2065, 2066, 2067 2059 2035 2036 DVD Recorder Aspire Astar Broksonic Go Video Hitachi Insignia Irradio JVC LG Liteon Panasonic Philips Pioneer Pye Samsung Sansui Sanyo Sony Sylvania Toshiba Yamaha 2140 2162 2192 2135 2108 2080 2103 2054, 2055, 2056, 2057 2107, 2115, 2141, 2188 2121 2037, 2038, 2039, 2041, 2042, 2043, 2089, 2104, 2108, 2112 2090, 2096, 2097, 2126, 2193 2067, 2113 2194 2034, 2082, 2138 2027 2139 2022, 2023, 2024, 2085, 2086, 2087, 2102, 2128, 2129, 2130 2189 2030, 2099, 2100, 2101, 2114, 2117, 2118, 2119 2106 Cable ABC ADB Adelphia 3004, 3015, 3016, 3017, 3037, 3040, 3067, 3080, 3081 3070 3003 Alcatel 3066 Americast 3046 Amstrad 3048, 3068 Antronix 3019, 3020 Archer 3020 Arcon 3048 AT&T 3013 Axis 3048 Bell South 3046 Cable Vision 3014 Cabletenna 3019 Cabletime 3058 Cableview 3005 Clearmaster 3045 ClearMax 3045 Clyde Cablevision 3059 Colour Voice 3022 Comcast 3006, 3010, 3039 Comcrypt 3057 Comtronics 3023 Contec 3024 Coolmax 3045 COX 3006 Cryptovision 3060 Director 3006 Eastern 3025 Everquest 3041 Fidelity 3048 Filmnet 3057 Filmnet Cablecrypt 3061 Filmnet Comcrypt 3061 Finlux 3051 Focus 3044 Foxtel 3068 France Telecom 3054, 3055 Freebox 3069 GC Electronics 3020 GE 3015, 3016 GEC 3059 Gemini 3026, 3041 General Instrument 3006, 3008, 3016, 3039, 3050, 3067, 3075 Goldstar 3042 Gooding 3049 Grundig 3048, 3049 Hamlin 3027, 3028 Hirschmann 3051 Hitachi 3016 HomeChoice 3056 Humax 3001, 3002, 3071 ITT Nokia 3051 Jasco 3041 Jerrold 3006, 3008, 3016, 3026, 3037, 3041, 3050, 3064, 3067, 3075 JVC 3049 Kabel Deutschland 3043, 3073, 3074 Macab 3055 Magnavox 3029 Maspro 3049 Matsui 3049 MegaCable 3039 Memorex 3030, 3040 Minerva 3049 Mnet 3057 Motorola 3006, 3008, 3010, 3013, 3039, 3072, 3075 Movie Time Mr Zapp Multichoice Multitech NEC NET Brazil Nokia Noos NSC Oak Pace Palladium Panasonic Paragon Philips 3031, 3063 3055 3057 3045 3018 3007 3051 3055 3031 3024 3011, 3043, 3084 3049 3034, 3036, 3040 3040 3021, 3022, 3029, 3049, 3053, 3054, 3055 Pioneer 3012, 3032, 3038, 3042, 3048, 3083, 3084 Popular Mechanics 3044 Proscan 3015, 3016 Pulsar 3040 PVP Stereo Visual Matrix 3064 Quasar 3040 RadioShack 3041, 3045 RCA 3005, 3036, 3076, 3077 Realistic 3020 Recoton 3044 Regal 3028 Regency 3025 Rembrandt 3016 Runco 3040 Sagem 3055 Samsung 3011, 3023, 3032, 3042 SAT 3048 Scientific Atlanta 3003, 3004, 3011, 3012, 3013, 3062, 3078, 3079, 3080, 3081, 3082, 3083, 3084 Signal 3026, 3041 Signature 3016 Sony 3014, 3047 Sprucer 3036 Standard Component 3033 Starcom 3026, 3037, 3041, 3067 Stargate 3026, 3041 Starquest 3026, 3041 Supercable 3008 Supermax 3045 Tele+1 3057, 3061 Telepiu 3057 Thomson 3000, 3009 TIME WARNER 3006 Tocom 3017 Torx 3067 Toshiba 3040 Tristar 3045 Tudi 3052 Tusa 3026, 3041 TV86 3031 Unika 3019, 3020 United Cable 3037, 3064 Universal 3019, 3020 Universum 3049, 3051 V2 3045 Videoway 3065 View Star 3024, 3029, 3031 vii Viewmaster Vision Visiopass Vortex View Wittenberg Zenith Zentek 3045 3045 3051, 3054, 3055 3045 3048 3035, 3040, 3046 3044 Sattelite AB Sat AccessHD ADB AGS Akai Alba 4138, 4139 4058 4142 4138 4101, 4103 4083, 4084, 4085, 4086, 4108, 4139 Aldes 4085, 4087, 4088 Allsat 4098, 4101, 4103 Allsonic 4074, 4087, 4090 Alltech 4139 Alpha 4103 Alpha Digital 4058 Alphastar 4031 Amitronica 4139 Amstrad 4089, 4113, 4136, 4139 Anglo 4139 Ankaro 4074, 4087, 4090, 4139 Anttron 4083, 4086 Apollo 4083 Armstrong 4089, 4103 Artec 4054 Asat 4101, 4103 ASLF 4139 Astacom 4138 Astra 4089, 4091, 4100, 4137, 4139 Astro 4074, 4086, 4088, 4090, 4093, 4135, 4136, 4137 AudioTon 4086, 4098 Aurora 4140 Austar 4140 Axiel 4138 Axis 4074, 4090, 4091, 4096 Best 4074, 4090 Blaupunkt 4093 Blue Sky 4139 Boca 4089, 4100, 4105, 4139 Boston 4138 Brain Wave 4095 Broadcast 4094 Broco 4139 BSkyB 4113, 4123 BT 4138 Bubu Sat 4139 Bush 4084, 4127 Cambridge 4136 Canal Satellite 4135 Canal+ 4135 CaptiveWorks 4049 Channel Master 4060, 4085 Chaparral 4025 CHEROKEE 4138 Chess 4134, 4139 CityCom 4084, 4133, 4137 Clatronic 4095 CNT 4088 Comag 4000, 4001, 4002, 4003, 4004 Commlink 4087 Comtech 4096 viii Condor Connexions Conrad 4074, 4090, 4137 4074, 4092 4074, 4133, 4136, 4137 Conrad Electronic 4137, 4139 Contec 4096 Coolsat 4050 Cosat 4098 Coship 4063 Crown 4089 Daeryung 4092 Daewoo 4107, 4139 DDC 4085 Delega 4085 Dew 4096 Diamond 4097 Digiality 4137 Digital Stream 4059 DIRECTV 4017, 4018, 4020, 4021, 4022, 4024, 4037, 4038, 4040, 4041, 4043, 4045, 4057, 4106, 4143, 4144, 4145, 4146, 4147, 4148, 4149, 4150, 4151, 4152, 4153, 4154, 4155, 4156, 4157 Discoverer 4134 Discovery 4138 Diseqc 4138 Dish Network 4011, 4012, 4013, 4014, 4019, 4039, 4064 Dishpro 4039, 4064 Distrisat 4103 Ditristrad 4098 DNT 4092, 4101, 4103 Drake 4026 DStv 4140 Dune 4074 Echostar 4011, 4019, 4039, 4064, 4092, 4139 Einhell 4083, 4087, 4089, 4136, 4139 Elap 4138, 4139 Elekta 4088 Elsat 4139 Elta 4074, 4083, 4090, 4098, 4101, 4103 Emanon 4083 Emme Esse 4074, 4090 Engel 4139 Ep Sat 4084 EURIEULT 4077 Eurodec 4102 Europa 4103, 4136, 4137 Europhon 4137 Eurosat 4089 Eurosky 4074, 4089, 4090, 4133, 4136, 4137 Eurostar 4089, 4133, 4137 Eutelsat 4139 Exator 4083, 4086 Expressvu 4039 Fenner 4074, 4134, 4139 Ferguson 4084, 4102, 4132 Fidelity 4136 Finlandia 4084 Finlux 4084 FinnSat 4096, 4102 Flair Mate 4139 Foxtel 4140 Freecom 4083, 4099, 4136 FTEmaximal 4074, 4139 Fuba 4074, 4083, 4090, 4092, 4093, 4101, 4133 Galaxis 4074, 4087, 4090, 4091, 4096, 4098, 4133, 4140 GE 4015, 4016, 4061, 4151 General Instrument 4027, 4065 GMI 4089 GOI 4039 Goldbox 4135 GoldStar 4099 Goodmans 4079, 4080, 4084 Goodmind 4061 Grandin 4077 Grothusen 4083, 4099 Grundig 4084, 4086, 4093, 4113, 4129, 4136, 4140 Hänsel & Gretel 4137 Hantor 4083, 4095 Hanuri 4088 Hauppauge 4126 Heliocom 4137 Helium 4137 Hinari 4085 Hirschmann 4074, 4093, 4128, 4136, 4137, 4138 Hisawa 4095 Hisense 4066 Hitachi 4032, 4084, 4149, 4153 Homecast 4005, 4006, 4007 Houston 4098 HTS 4039 Hughes 4018, 4022, 4144, 4146, 4150, 4152 Hughes Network Systems 4021 Humax 4051, 4075, 4076, 4110 Huth 4087, 4089, 4094, 4095, 4096, 4098, 4137, 4141 Hypson 4077 Ilo 4066 Imex 4077 Innovation 4090 Insignia 4057 Intertronic 4089 Intervision 4098, 4137 ITT Nokia 4084 Jerrold 4065 Johansson 4095 JOK 4138 JSR 4098 JVC 4011, 4019, 4039, 4079 Kamm 4139 Kathrein 4093, 4101, 4103, 4109, 4112, 4120, 4133, 4138, 4139 Kathrein Eurostar 4133 Klap 4138 Konig 4137 Kosmos 4099 KR 4086 Kreiselmeyer 4093 K-SAT 4139 Kyostar 4083 L&S Electronic 4074 Lasat 4074, 4088, 4090, 4100, 4133, 4134, 4137 Lasonic 4062 Lenco 4074, 4083, 4099, 4133, 4137, 4139 Leng 4095 Lennox 4098 Lenson 4136 Lexus 4103 LG 4053, 4057, 4099 Lifesat 4074, 4090, 4134, 4139 Lifetec 4090 Lorenzen 4137 Lorraine 4099 Lupus 4074, 4090 Luxor 4136 Lyonnaise 4102 Macab 4102 Magnavox 4045, 4055 Manata 4077, 4138, 4139 Manhattan 4084, 4088, 4098, 4138 Marantz 4101 Mascom 4088 Maspro 4084, 4139 Matsui 4138 Max 4137 Mediabox 4135 Mediamarkt 4089 Mediasat 4091, 4135, 4136 Medion 4074, 4090, 4139 Medison 4139 Mega 4101, 4103 Memorex 4045 Metronic 4077, 4078, 4083, 4086, 4087, 4088, 4139 Metz 4093 Micro electronic 4136, 4137, 4139 Micro Technology 4139 MicroGem 4056 Micromaxx 4074, 4090 Microstar 4090 Microtec 4139 Minerva 4093 Mitsubishi 4084, 4093, 4152 Mitsumi 4100 Morgan’s 4089, 4100, 4101, 4103, 4139 Motorola 4008, 4009, 4010, 4065 Multichoice 4140 Multitec 4134 Muratto 4099 Mysat 4139 Navex 4095 Neuhaus 4091, 4098, 4136, 4137, 4139 Neusat 4139 Next Level 4065 NextWave 4141 Nikko 4089, 4139 Nokia 4084, 4122 Nordmende 4083, 4084, 4085, 4088, 4102 Nova 4140 Novis 4095 Oceanic 4097 Octagon 4083, 4086, 4096 Okano 4089 Optex 4098 Optus 4135, 4140, 4141 Orbitech OSat Otto Versand Pace Pacific Packsat Palcom Palladium Palsat Panasat Panasonic Panda Pansat Patriot Paysat PCT Philco Philips Phoenix Phonotrend Pioneer Polsat Predki Premiere Priesner Primestar Profile Promax Prosat Proscan Protek Proton Provision Quadral Quelle Quiero RadioShack Radiola Radix Rainbow RCA Realistic Redpoint Redstar RFT Roadstar Roch Rover Saba Sabre Sagem Sakura Samsung SAT Sat Cruiser Sat Partner Sat Team 4083, 4134, 4135, 4136 4086 4093 4084, 4093, 4113, 4121, 4125, 4138 4097 4138 4085 4089, 4136 4134, 4136 4140 4043, 4044, 4046, 4084, 4113, 4118, 4143, 4148 4084, 4137 4047 4138 4045 4060 4055 4021, 4022, 4045, 4084, 4101, 4103, 4111, 4115, 4135, 4138, 4150, 4152, 4153, 4155, 4156 4096 4084, 4087, 4098 4124, 4135 4102 4095 4098, 4135 4089 4030 4138 4084 4085, 4087 4015, 4016, 4040, 4151 4097 4066 4088 4074, 4085, 4087, 4090, 4138 4093, 4133, 4137 4102 4065 4101, 4103 4092, 4119 4086 4015, 4016, 4034, 4035, 4036, 4037, 4038, 4040, 4151, 4157 4028 4091 4074, 4090 4087, 4101, 4103 4139 4077 4074, 4139 4088, 4133, 4137, 4138 4084 4069, 4102 4096 4018, 4021, 4023, 4041, 4042, 4081, 4082, 4083, 4114, 4150, 4154 4085, 4136 4141 4083, 4086, 4088, 4095, 4099, 4136 4139 Satcom Satec Satelco Satford Satmaster Satplus Schneider Schwaiger SCS Seemann SEG 4094, 4137 4139 4074 4094 4094 4134 4090, 4134, 4138 4097, 4134, 4137 4133 4089, 4091, 4092 4074, 4083, 4090, 4095 Seleco 4098 Servi Sat 4077, 4139 Siemens 4093 Silva 4099 Skantin 4139 Skardin 4091 Skinsat 4136 SKR 4139 Skymaster 4067, 4068, 4087, 4134, 4139 Skymax 4101, 4103 SkySat 4134, 4136, 4137, 4139 Skyvision 4098 SM Electronic 4134, 4139 Smart 4133, 4139 Sony 4017, 4020, 4135 SR 4089, 4100 Star Choice 4065 Starland 4139 Starring 4095 Start Trak 4083 Strong 4074, 4083, 4086, 4090, 4099, 4140 STS 4033 STVI 4077 Sumida 4089 Sunny Sound 4074 Sunsat 4139 Sunstar 4074, 4089, 4100 Supermax 4141 Tandberg 4102 Tandy 4086 Tantec 4084 TCM 4090 Techniland 4094 TechniSat 4071, 4072, 4073, 4092, 4103, 4116, 4117, 4134, 4135, 4136 Technology 4140 Technosat 4141 Technowelt 4137 Teco 4089, 4100 Telanor 4085 Telasat 4133, 4137 Telecom 4139 Telefunken 4067, 4083, 4138 Teleka 4086, 4089, 4092, 4136, 4137 Telemaster 4088 Telesat 4137 Telestar 4134, 4135, 4136 Televes 4084, 4136 Telewire 4098 Tempo 4141 Tevion 4090, 4139 Thomson 4070, 4084, 4102, 4104, 4130, 4133, 4135, 4137, 4138, 4139 Thorens 4097 Thorn 4084 Tivax Tivo Tokai Tonna Toshiba Triad Triasat Triax Turnsat Tvonics Twinner UEC Uher UltimateTV Uniden Unisat Unitor Universum US Digital Variosat Vega Ventana Viewsat Visiosat Voom Vortec Welltech WeTeKom Wevasat Wewa Winersat Wisi Woorisat Worldsat Xrypton XSat Zehnder Zenith Zodiac 4058 4150 4103 4084, 4094, 4098, 4136, 4139 4144, 4152, 4153 4099 4136 4093, 4133, 4136, 4139 4139 4132 4077, 4139 4140 4134 4020 4029, 4045 4089, 4096, 4103 4095 4093, 4133, 4137 4066 4093 4074 4101, 4103 4048 4095, 4098, 4138, 4139 4065 4083 4134 4134, 4136 4084 4084 4095 4084, 4092, 4093, 4136, 4137 4088 4138 4074 4139 4074, 4088, 4090, 4131, 4133 4052, 4057, 4145 4086 CD Yamaha 5000, 5013 CD Recoder Yamaha 5001 MD Yamaha 5002, 5003, 5004 Tape Yamaha 5005, 5006 Tuner Yamaha 5007, 5008, 5009, 5010, 5014, 5015, 5016, 5017, 5018 USB Yamaha 5012, 5021 DOCK Yamaha 5011, 5022 LD Yamaha 2002 ix © 2009 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved. Printed in China WQ95420 U HTR-6260 The letters in circles and the numbers in squares correspond to those in the Owner's Manual. ■ Front panel V U D E F G H I Q VOLUME HDMI THROUGH ZONE2 ON/OFF ZONE2 CONTROL INFO l MEMORY FM l h PRESET AM CATEGORY h l TUNING/CH h SCENE BD/DVD TV CD RADIO PROGRAM STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES TONE CONTROL l ON/OFF h EFFECT SILENT CINEMA A l h VIDEO AUX OPTIMIZER MIC VIDEO B C K L MN O P J R AUDIO S PORTABLE T ■ Remote control a c MAIN ZONE2 e CODE SET TRANSMIT b d POWER SOURCE POWER SLEEP f HDMI 1 2 3 4 3 4 g AV 1 h 2 AUDIO 5 6 1 2 V-AUX [ A ] [ B ] DOCK TUNER SIRIUS XM MULTI PRESET TUN./CH i CATEGORY FM AM j INFO MEMORY MOVIE MUSIC ENHANCER SUR. DECODE k STEREO STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT SCENE l m BD DVD TV CD SETUP o p VOLUME ENTER DISPLAY TOP MENU t n OPTION RETURN s RADIO MENU MUTE r q REC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 10 ENT TV INPUT u POWER TV VOL TV CH MUTE Printed in China WQ95440-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
Yamaha HTR-6260 de handleiding
- Categorie
- AV-ontvangers
- Type
- de handleiding
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha HTR-6260 Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha HTR-6260 Manuale del proprietario
- русский: Yamaha HTR-6260 Инструкция по применению
- français: Yamaha HTR-6260 Le manuel du propriétaire
- español: Yamaha HTR-6260 El manual del propietario
- Deutsch: Yamaha HTR-6260 Bedienungsanleitung
- português: Yamaha HTR-6260 Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha HTR-6260 Brugervejledning
- suomi: Yamaha HTR-6260 Omistajan opas
- čeština: Yamaha HTR-6260 Návod k obsluze
- svenska: Yamaha HTR-6260 Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha HTR-6260 El kitabı
- polski: Yamaha HTR-6260 Instrukcja obsługi
- română: Yamaha HTR-6260 Manualul proprietarului
Gerelateerde papieren
-
Yamaha 6240 - HTR AV Receiver de handleiding
-
Yamaha HTR-6250 de handleiding
-
Yamaha HTR-6280 de handleiding
-
-
-
-
Yamaha RX-V671 de handleiding
-
-
Yamaha RX-V863 de handleiding
-
Yamaha RX-V563 Handleiding
Andere documenten
-
Samsung HT-J5500 Handleiding
-
-
Kenwood SW-508 Handleiding
-
Rotel RC-1090 de handleiding
-
JBL SCS 140 de handleiding
-
-
3M Multi-Touch PCAP Displays Gebruikershandleiding
-
Monitor Audio Silver W12 Handleiding
-
Monitor Audio Silver W-12 de handleiding
-
AEI Security & Communications DGHDP1 Handleiding
